JP2024071502A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of providing novel game contents.SOLUTION: With entry of a game ball B1 into a first through gate 35 as an opportunity, an ordinary electric open lottery is executed. In a game board 24, an adjustment mechanism 180 for discharging the game ball B1 toward and into the first through gate 35 is provided at an upper portion of the first through gate 35. In a Pachinko game machine 10, a low-frequency support mode, and a high-frequency support mode for more easily causing ordinary electric open winning than the low-frequency support mode are set. A main-side ROM stores a winning determination value table for the low-frequency support mode and a winning determination value table for the high-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, a winning continuous period occurs. During the winning continuous period, ball entry timing of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and entering the first through gate 35 corresponds to a target period of the ordinary electric open winning.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

In this regard, innovative gameplay is required for gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can provide innovative gameplay.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down a game area can enter,
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus under at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the ball entry section;
Equipped with
A first mode and a second mode in which the privilege is granted more easily than the first mode are set as a control mode of the privilege granting state,
A guide means for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry portion;
a predetermined situation generating means for generating a predetermined situation in which each induction timing of the game ball guided by the induction means in the first mode corresponds to or is likely to correspond to a timing at which the game ball guided to the ball entrance section is a timing at which the privilege is granted;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

The present invention makes it possible to create innovative gameplay content.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. 1 is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism and its surroundings. 4A is a front view and a right side view of a rotating body separated from an adjustment mechanism, and FIG. 4B is a front view and a plan view of the rotating body. This is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cut directly above the intake port on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board. 1A and 1B are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball taken into the adjustment mechanism. 13A and 13B are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of a game ball that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and enters the first through gate. A front view of the adjustment mechanism showing the movement of the game ball being discharged from the adjustment mechanism and deviating from the first through gate. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and game board when cut directly above the intake port on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board; (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first blade portion when cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board; and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and game board when cut directly above the intake port on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. An explanatory diagram to explain the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. (a) is a low-frequency winning determination value table showing winning determination values for the regular power opening lottery in the low-frequency support mode, and (b) is a high-frequency winning determination value table showing winning determination values for the regular power opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode. 4A to 4C are time charts showing the timing at which a normal power release winning can occur in a comparative pachinko machine. (a) to (d) are time charts showing the timing when a regular power release winning may occur. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an open counter update process executed by a main CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing a normal power control process executed by the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the pending information acquisition process on the main side executed by the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the general map change start processing executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the regular power release lottery processing executed by the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the process during general map confirmation executed by the main CPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensor are input to the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process executed by the main CPU. A block diagram to explain the electrical configuration of a dispensing control device and various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the dispensing CPU. 4 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a correspondence relationship memory; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a history memory; 13 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management side CPU. 13A to 15D are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in a correspondence memory. 13 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. 4A to 4E are time charts showing how history information is stored in a history memory. 13 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. A front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism and its periphery in a second embodiment. 1A is a plan view of the housing cut away from directly above the adjustment mechanism, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the housing enlarged and showing the area around the rotation shaft. FIG. 13 is a front view of the rotating body separated from the adjustment mechanism. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and game board when cut directly above the sorting nail on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board; (b) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of a game ball that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and enters the first through gate; (c) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and game board when cut directly above the sorting nail on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board; and (d) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of a game ball that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and misses the first through gate. 13A to 13D are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball that is taken into the adjustment mechanism and transported. 13A to 13C are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball near the intake port. A front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism and its surroundings in a third embodiment. FIG. 2A is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the area around an electric nail in a permitted position, and FIG. 2B is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the area around an electric nail in a prohibited position. 13A to 13C are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball around the adjustment mechanism. 13A to 13C are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain how a game ball is released from being pinched at the top of the adjustment mechanism. A front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism and its surroundings in the fourth embodiment. This is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotating body cut by a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. 13A to 13D are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of a game ball that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and enters the first through gate. 13A and 13B are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of a game ball being discharged from the adjustment mechanism and escaping through the first through gate. A front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism and its surroundings in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2A is a front view of the adjustment device in a closed state, and FIG. 2B is a front view of the adjustment device in an open state. 13A to 13D are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball around the adjustment mechanism. A front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of a second operating port. (a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device as seen from the side, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device as seen from the rear side. A front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism and its surroundings in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management side CPU. 13A to 13H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. FIG. 23 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a management IC according to a ninth embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a control CPU in the tenth embodiment. 23A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a management CPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the twelfth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a control-side CPU in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a control side CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the fifteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU of the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process executed by the main CPU. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a history memory; 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a parameter management process executed by a main CPU. A block diagram to explain the configuration of the signal path that transmits the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and the management IC in the 18th embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded form. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made of wooden boards connected at all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to an island facility. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island facility of the amusement hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by using an unlocking key to perform an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front side of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 of the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted into it. The window panel 52 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be formed of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, or may be formed of color and transparency as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The configuration of the game board 24 will now be described with reference to Figure 3. Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in Figure 3, the game board 24 has a number of openings, large and small, penetrating it in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a first through gate 35, a second through gate 39, a variable display unit 36, a special chart unit 37, and a general chart unit 38, etc. There are a total of four general winning ports 31, and one of each of the others.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) patterns. The pattern display device 41 has a display surface 41a that displays effects, and is arranged in an opening 24c provided in the game board 24 so that the display surface 41a can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a center frame 57 is arranged in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the pattern display device 41. The upper part of this center frame 57 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as a decrease in visibility of the display screen due to the falling of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 3, the center frame 57 includes a roof unit 58 that defines the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 24c. The game board 24 includes game areas PA on both the left and right sides of the center frame 57.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail that guides the game ball B1. The game ball B1 launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

2, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies the game ball B1 stored in the upper tray 55a (described later) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball B1 supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating the launching operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball B1 is launched. By adjusting the amount of rotation in the rotation operation, the player can launch the game ball B1 aiming at the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57, and can also launch the game ball B1 aiming at the game area PA on the right side of the center frame 57.

As shown in FIG. 3, even if a ball enters the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39, the game ball B1 is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out. Specifically, when one game ball B1 enters the first operating opening 33 or when one game ball B1 enters the second operating opening 34, one prize ball is paid out, when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and when one game ball B1 enters the special electric winning device 32, fifteen prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, or the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls B1 that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls B1, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, "entering" refers to the game ball B1 passing through a specified opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball B1 passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also the case where the game ball B1 continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the game ball B1 entering the outlet 24a, the game ball B1 entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the first through gate 35, and the second through gate 39 will also be referred to as "winning."

As shown in FIG. 3, the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are united as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are open upward. In addition, both actuation ports 33, 34 are lined up vertically with the first actuation port 33 facing upward. The second actuation port 34 is provided with a normal power device 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right. When the normal power device 34a is in a closed state, the game ball B1 cannot enter the second actuation port 34, but when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, it becomes possible for the game ball B1 to enter the second actuation port 34.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA to the left of the center frame 57, a first through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second actuation port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball B1. The first through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and the game ball B1 that enters the first through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after entering. Therefore, the game ball B1 that enters the first through gate 35 can reach the area where the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are provided, and enter either the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA to the right of the center frame 57, a second through gate 39 is provided upstream of the second actuation port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball B1. The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and the game ball B1 that enters the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after entering. Therefore, the game ball B1 that enters the second through gate 39 can reach the area where the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are provided, and enter either the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state based on winning the through gates 35, 39. Specifically, a normal power release lottery is held as a trigger when a ball wins the through gates 35, 39, and a changing image is displayed on the normal power display section 38a of the normal power unit 38 located in the lower left corner of the play area PA, an area where the game ball B1 does not pass. Then, when the result of the normal power release lottery is a normal power release win, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the changing display on the normal power display section 38a ends, the normal power release state is entered. In the normal power release state, the normal power role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is set to a low-frequency support mode in which the normal power device 34a opens intermittently when the ball enters the through gates 35, 39 to support entry into the second operating port 34, and a high-frequency support mode in which the normal power device 34a opens in a manner that makes it easier for the game ball B1 to enter the second operating port 34 than in the low-frequency support mode.

In this pachinko machine 10, in the low frequency support mode where the transition to the high frequency support mode has not been made, effects are given such that the player aims at the left side play area PA where the first through gate 35 is located. Then, when the mode is transitioned to the high frequency support mode, effects are given such that the player aims at the right side play area PA where the second through gate 39 is located. Details of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode will be described later.

The map display unit 38a is configured with a segment display in which a number of segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. The image displayed on the map display unit 38a may be a number of different types of letters, a number of symbols, a number of characters, or a number of colors that are switched between.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. Up to four game balls B1 that have entered the through gates 35 and 39 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

A winning lottery is triggered by the entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The lottery result is then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special pattern unit 37 in detail, the special pattern unit 37 is provided with a special pattern display section 37a. The display area of the special pattern display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special pattern display section 37a, a winning lottery is held by triggering the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, and a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special pattern display section 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the pattern displayed on the special pattern display section 37a may be a configuration in which multiple types of letters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special chart unit 37, a special chart reserve display section 37b is provided adjacent to the special chart display section 37a. The number of game balls B1 that have entered the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the special chart reserve display section 37b.

Regarding the pattern display device 41 in detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the pattern display device 41, when the special pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined pattern based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the winning of the second operation port 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined pattern accordingly. For example, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern rows, an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row, set as a plurality of display areas, and in each pattern row, main patterns numbered "1" to "9" are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display of all pattern rows is started first, and the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of the upper pattern row → the lower pattern row → the middle pattern row, and finally, the display ends with a predetermined pattern being statically displayed in each pattern row. Then, for example, in a game in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a valid line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

In addition, the pattern display device 41 not only performs display effects triggered by winning the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, but also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the game is switched after a winning combination is achieved. In addition, based on winning the actuation port 33, 34, display is started on the special pattern display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41, and one game round is played until a predetermined result is displayed and the game ends. In addition, the manner of the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the patterns displayed by the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above patterns, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed as patterns may be used.

When a big jackpot is won in a lottery based on winning the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the mode transitions to an open/close execution mode in which winning is possible in the special electric winning device 32. The special electric winning device 32 has a large winning port (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open/close door 32a that opens and closes the large winning port. The open/close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open/close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball B1 can win if a lottery is won to transition to the open/close execution mode. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to which the mode transitions when a winning result is obtained. Note that while winning is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which winning is more difficult than in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 3, an adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35 to adjust the timing at which the game ball B1 is supplied toward the first through gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 180 supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 by discharging the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 below. The distance between the adjustment mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is set so that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. The adjustment mechanism 180 is described below.

Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged view of the first through gate 35 and the structure above the first through gate 35. As shown in Figure 4, the adjustment mechanism 180 includes a rotating body 183 that takes in the game ball B1 at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180 and transports it to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180, an adjustment drive unit 184 that rotates the rotating body 183 clockwise, and a storage unit 181 that stores the rotating body 183 and prevents the game ball B1 that has been taken in by the rotating body 183 from being thrown out before the discharge position by the centrifugal force associated with the rotation.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rotating body 183 is provided at the center of the adjustment mechanism 180. The rotating body 183 is formed by providing four recesses 183b to 183e capable of taking in the game ball B1 in a substantially disk-shaped transparent resin member whose diameter tapers toward the rear. FIG. 5(a) is a front view and a right side view of the rotating body 183, and FIG. 5(b) is a front view and a plan view of the rotating body 183. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are formed so as to be recessed from the outer edge portion of the rotating body 183 toward the axis line side. The recesses 183b to 183e are formed so that their centers are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and in the rotational direction, the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, the third recess 183d, and the fourth recess 183e are arranged in that order.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), none of the recesses 183b-183e reach the axis of the rotor 183 and are mutually discontinuous. Each recess 183b-183e has a shape and size that allows one entire game ball B1 to fit inside. In each of the recesses 183b-183e, the inner wall near the outer edge of the rotor 183 has a slope such that the recesses 183b-183e become wider toward the outer edge, and the width of each recess 183b-183e near the outer edge is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the rotor 183 includes a first blade 188 sandwiched between the fourth recess 183e and the first recess 183b, a second blade 189 sandwiched between the first recess 183b and the second recess 183c, a third blade 190 sandwiched between the second recess 183c and the third recess 183d, and a fourth blade 191 sandwiched between the third recess 183d and the fourth recess 183e.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the adjustment mechanism 180, the storage section 181 that stores the rotating body 183 has a base body 181a that prevents the game ball B1 captured in each of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 from moving rearward beyond the front surface of the game board 24 during transport. The base body 181a has a fixing flange 181b that is formed by protruding radially from the outer periphery of the base body 181a.

Figure 6 is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when cutting directly above the intake port 185 on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. In order to explain the configuration of the storage section 181, Figure 6 shows the state in which the rotating body 183 has been removed. As shown in Figure 6, a fixing recess 24d capable of storing the base body 181a and the fixing flange 181b is formed on the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in Figure 4, the storage section 181 is fixed to the game board 24 by screwing the fixing flange 181b in a state in which the base body 181a and the fixing flange 181b are stored in the fixing recess 24d (Figure 6). The base body 181a is located behind the rotating body 183, and the front surface of the base body 181a is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24.

As shown in FIG. 4, a storage space for storing the rotating body 183 is formed in front of the base body 181a, and the rotating body 183 is stored in the storage space. An adjustment drive unit 184 is disposed behind the rotating body 183. The adjustment drive unit 184 has an output shaft 184a that extends forward from the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 in a manner perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. The rotating body 183 is connected to the output shaft 184a such that the axis of the rotating body 183 is aligned in the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184.

The adjustment drive unit 184 is connected to an output port of the MPU 62 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. When a drive signal is supplied to the adjustment drive unit 184 and the adjustment drive unit 184 is in a driving state, the rotor 183 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° in 1 sec. A stepping motor is used as the adjustment drive unit 184, and specifically, a 1-2 phase excitation drive that alternates between 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation is adopted. Note that the phase excitation method is not limited to this, and other phase excitation methods may be adopted. The adjustment drive unit 184 is configured so that the output shaft rotates once when 500 pulses of excitation signals are sent from the main control unit 60, and the angle change based on one pulse of the excitation signal, i.e., the angle change per step, is 0.72°.

As shown in FIG. 4, the storage section 181 has upright walls 181c, 181d for dividing the storage space. The upright walls 181c, 181d divide the storage space into a space slightly larger than the rotating body 183. The distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the upright walls 181c, 181d of the storage section 181 is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the circumferential surfaces 188a-191a of each of the blades 188-191, and the difference between these two distances is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. This eliminates the possibility of the game ball B1 getting between the circumferential surfaces 188a-191a of each of the blades 188-191 and the upright walls 181c, 181d.

The upright walls 181c, 181d are formed at intervals around the circumference of the base body 181a in a manner that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 181a. Of the upright walls 181c, 181d, the left upright wall 181c on the left side and the right upright wall 181d on the right side are spaced apart laterally, so that an intake port 185 is present at the top of the storage section 181.

As shown in FIG. 4, the shape and size of the intake port 185 are set so that one game ball B1 can pass through the intake port 185, but multiple game balls B1 cannot pass through the intake port 185 at the same time. Therefore, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game balls B1 one by one through the intake port 185.

The left side standing wall 181c prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left of the intake port 185 from entering the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180. For this reason, the game ball B1 is taken into the recesses 183b-183e that open to the left, and the game ball B1 is not discharged after being transported for a long time in the order of the top → right → bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180. In addition, the right side standing wall 181d prevents the game ball B1, after being taken into the adjustment mechanism 180, from being thrown out of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the centrifugal force of the rotor 183 before it is transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 and is ready to be discharged.

As shown in FIG. 4, the left side standing wall 181c and the right side standing wall 181d are separated horizontally, so that the storage section 181 is open downward. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is taken into one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged toward the first through gate 35 located below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the storage section 181 is equipped with a discharge protrusion 181e for discharging the game ball B1 captured in the recesses 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 at a predetermined discharge position. The discharge protrusion 181e is provided near the lower center of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 6, the discharge protrusion 181e protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 181a to a position halfway into the game area PA with a protruding dimension of 9 mm.

As already explained, the length dimension in the front-rear direction of the play area PA (FIG. 3) sandwiched between the front of the play board 24 and the back of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is 18 mm, and the diameter of the play ball B1 is 11 mm. Therefore, the discharge protrusion 181e has a length dimension in the front-rear direction that allows it to contact both the play ball B1 located on the back side of the play area PA (the play board 24 side) and the play ball B1 located on the front side of the play area PA (the window panel 52 side). Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge protrusion 181e is formed by extending downward from near the bottom of the center of the base body 181a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the lower end of the discharge protrusion 181e is shorter than the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of the blades 188-191 (FIG. 5(a)). Also, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the first blade 188 and the third blade 190 of the rotating body 183 are provided with collision avoidance grooves 192 to avoid collision with the discharge protrusion 181e, and as shown in FIG. 5(b), the second blade 189 and the fourth blade 191 are also provided with collision avoidance grooves 192 to avoid collision with the discharge protrusion 181e.

The collision avoidance groove 192 is provided to be larger than the protruding dimension of the ejection protrusion 181e, and does not come into contact with the rotating body 183 regardless of the rotation state of the ejection protrusion 181e. Therefore, the ejection protrusion 181e does not interfere with the rotation of the rotating body 183.

As shown in FIG. 4, the ejection protrusion 181e has an ejection right side surface 181g that slopes downward to the left as its right side surface. The ejection right side surface 181g comes into contact with the game ball B1 present in the recesses 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 at the ejection position of the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180. After the game ball B1 is transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, it comes into contact with the ejection right side surface 181g and is ejected toward the first through gate 35 below.

When the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 directly downward, it enters the first through gate 35 located below without colliding with any obstacles on the way. As already explained, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, there is a possibility that the discharged game ball B1 may fall out of the first through gate 35 depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 at the discharge position. The discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 is fixed by the discharge protrusion 181e, and the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is short. Therefore, when the discharged game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, the time from when the game ball B1 is discharged in the adjustment mechanism 180 to when the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 falls within a predetermined range.

The timing of the discharge of the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 180 occurs in a 1-second cycle, so that the entry of the game ball B1 into the first through gate 35 also occurs in approximately 1-second cycles. The details of the process by which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described later.

The rotating body 183 rotates clockwise while the game ball B1 taken in through the intake port 185 is present in the recesses 183b to 183e, thereby transporting the game ball B1 toward the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180.

When any of the recesses 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 is open facing upward, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in game balls B1 flowing down from above. By configuring the inner walls of the recesses 183b-183e near the outer edge of the rotating body 183 to have a shape that widens toward the outer edge, the period during which the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in game balls B1 at the intake port 185 can be extended. This makes it possible to increase the number of game balls B1 taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180 and to increase the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180.

In addition, by configuring the rotor 183 to have multiple recesses 183b-183e, it is possible to reduce the rotation speed of the rotor 183 required to eject the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 180 in a 1-second cycle. In this way, by rotating the rotor 183 slowly, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the top of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be captured by the recesses 183b-183e of the rotor 183.

Here, the configuration around the adjustment mechanism 180 on the game board 24 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged above the intake port 185 to collect the game balls B1 flowing down the game area PA upstream of the intake port 185 toward the intake port 185. In the upper left area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged to change the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the right and direct the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185, and in the upper right area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged to change the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the left and direct the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185.

As shown in FIG. 4, the nails 24b arranged near the upper part of the intake port 185 are arranged so that the distance from the nail 24b to the left standing wall 181c and the distance from the nail 24b to the right standing wall 181d are at least one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. In addition, a space is provided on the left and right sides of the adjustment mechanism 180 to allow the game ball B1 that flows down toward the intake port 185 and is not taken in by the intake port 185 to escape downstream. No nails 24b are arranged in this space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that flows down near the intake port 185 and is not taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180 can be discharged from between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181c or between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d into the space on the left and right of the adjustment mechanism 180. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B1 from accumulating around the intake port 185.

Next, we will explain the detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 180. First, we will explain the configuration for taking in the game ball B1.

As already explained, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm, and the length of the game area PA (Figure 3) in the front-to-rear direction is 18 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Thus, there is a gap in the game area PA that allows the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA to move in the front-to-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 5, each recess 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 is inclined toward the axis toward the front. Therefore, when the rotating body 183 is in a rotating state in which the recesses 183b-183e are open toward the top, each recess 183b-183e is inclined downward toward the front. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when the first recess 183b is open toward the top, the first recess 183b is inclined downward toward the front.

The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 fits into one of the recesses 183b-183e that are open upward at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180. As described above, the recesses 183b-183e that are open upward at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180 are inclined downward toward the front. Therefore, while the game ball B1 is transported toward the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotor 183, the game ball B1 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA, which has a thickness in the front-to-rear direction.

Next, the timing at which the adjustment mechanism 180 takes in the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the intake port 185 is open facing upward. If the state in which any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is located below the intake port 185 is regarded as an intake permitted state, then in this intake permitted state, the game ball B1 that enters the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 can fit into the recess 183b to 183e.

On the other hand, if the rotor 183 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 4 and one of the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 is positioned below the intake port 185, which is considered to be an intake prohibited state, in this intake prohibited state, the game ball B1 attempting to enter the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of the blades 188-191. In this case, the game ball B1 is not taken into the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180.

At the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180, as the rotor 183 rotates, the intake port 185 alternates between an intake permitted state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in, and an intake prohibited state in which the game ball B1 cannot be taken in.

First, we will explain the case where the intake port 185 is in an intake permission state. Figures 7(a) and (b) are front views of the game board 24, showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 180 and its vicinity. The rotating body 183 in Figure 7(a) is in a rotated state in which the first recessed portion 183b is positioned at the top, and the rotating body 183 in Figure 7(b) is in a rotated state in which the rotating body 183 in Figure 7(a) has been rotated 90° clockwise.

When the game ball B1 enters the intake port 185 in the intake permitted state, it is taken in by the upper recessed portion 183b-183e. For example, as shown in FIG. 7(a), when the first recessed portion 183b is positioned at the top, the game ball B1 that enters the intake port 185 is taken in by the first recessed portion 183b.

The game ball B1 that is taken into one of the recesses 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180 is transported toward the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 as the rotating body 183 rotates. At this time, the right side standing wall 181d prevents the game ball B1 that is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from being released outside the adjustment mechanism 180 before the discharge timing arrives.

For example, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the game ball B1 caught in the first recess 183b is first subjected to a force from the first wing 188 in the forward direction of rotation (to the right in FIG. 7(a)). Next, the game ball B1, which is about to fall due to its own weight, is supported by the second wing 189.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the game ball B1 attempts to fall to the lower right due to its own weight and the force applied by the second wing portion 189, but a resistance force is applied from the right-side upright wall 181d, preventing the game ball B1 from falling to the lower right. In this state, the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is transported toward the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183.

The game ball B1 that is taken into one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged in a certain direction by coming into contact with the right discharge side surface 181g (Figure 4) of the discharge protrusion 181e (Figure 4).

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the side of the first blade 188 located at the front in the rotational direction is referred to as the first front surface 188b, and the side of the second blade 189 located at the front in the rotational direction is referred to as the second front surface 189b. The side of the third blade 190 located at the front in the rotational direction is referred to as the third front surface 190b, and the side of the fourth blade 191 located at the front in the rotational direction is referred to as the fourth front surface 191b. The front surfaces 188b-191b of each blade 188-191 are surfaces that extend in the radial direction of the rotor 183.

When the game ball B1 that has been taken into any of the recesses 183b-183e (Figure 5(b)) in the rotating body 183 comes into contact with the right side surface 181g for ejection and the timing for ejection arrives, the game ball B1 comes into contact with the front surface 188b-191b on the rear side in the rotation direction and the right side surface 181g for ejection in the recess 183b-183e in which the game ball B1 is present.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d have the same shape and size. Therefore, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the second recess 183c and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180, and the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the third recess 183d and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 are the same as the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180.

On the other hand, the fourth recess 183e has the same shape as the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d, and has a size slightly smaller than the three recesses 183b to 183d. Therefore, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the fourth recess 183e and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 may differ from the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b to the third recess 183d and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180. If the discharge mode of the game ball B1 discharged from all the recesses 183b to 183e is the same, the movement of the game ball B1 after discharge becomes monotonous. In contrast, by varying the discharge mode of the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B1 after discharge.

First, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 that is taken into any of the first recessed portion 183b to the third recessed portion 183d and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be explained using the first recessed portion 183b as an example.

Figures 8(a) and (b) are front views of the game board 24, showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 180 and its vicinity. Figure 8(a) shows the state just before the game ball B1 captured in the first recess 183b is about to be discharged, and Figure 8(b) shows the state when the game ball B1 has reached the discharge timing.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), just before the ejection timing, the contact state between the game ball B1 captured in the first recess 183b and the right-side upright wall 181d is released. As a result, the game ball B1, which has lost its support, is able to fall downward to the right. However, because the rotating body 183 rotates at an angular velocity of 90° per second, the game ball B1 is pushed in the rotational direction (leftward in FIG. 8) by the first blade portion 188 and continues to move in the rotational direction (leftward in FIG. 8).

As shown in FIG. 8(b), at the time of discharge, the game ball B1 is in contact with the discharge right side surface 181g and the first front surface 188b. The distance between the two surfaces 181g, 188b that sandwich the game ball B1 gradually increases from the top to the bottom.

As the rotor 183 continues to rotate, the area between the two faces 181g, 188b that has a width greater than the diameter of the game ball B1 gradually disappears from the top. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the right discharge face 181g and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front face 188b both have a component that pushes the game ball B1 downward. Therefore, the game ball B1 that was captured in the first recess 183b is pushed downward as the rotor 183 rotates. Then, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the game ball B1 is discharged downward from the first recess 183b, and there is a high probability that it will enter the first through gate 35.

At the discharge timing shown in FIG. 8(b), the discharge right side surface 181g and the first front side surface 188b apply a force to the game ball B1, which is originally attempting to fall downward due to its own weight, in the same downward direction to cause the game ball B1 to fall. At this time, the movement of the game ball B1 to the left is restricted by the discharge right side surface 181g. As a result, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is limited to one direction, increasing the probability of the game ball B1 entering the first through gate 35.

As already explained, at the outer edge of the rotating body 183, the width of the recesses 183b to 183e is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, the position of the game ball B1 in the recesses 183b to 183e just before the discharge timing is not the same every time. The discharge direction of the game ball B1 will differ depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the recesses 183b to 183e just before the discharge timing.

During the design stage, the position of the discharge protrusion 181e and the inclination of the discharge right side surface 181g were adjusted so that the majority of the game balls B1 captured in the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d enter the first through gate 35. However, as already explained, the distance between the discharge position in the adjustment mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is set to approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the first recess 183b gets caught on the first front surface 188b and is pushed to the left, when the game ball B1 discharged from the second recess 183c gets caught on the second front surface 189b and is pushed to the left, and when the game ball B1 discharged from the third recess 183d gets caught on the third front surface 190b and is pushed to the left, the game ball B1 after being discharged may fall off to the left of the first through gate 35.

Here, we will explain the discharge mode of the game ball B1 that is taken into the fourth recessed portion 183e and transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180. Figure 9 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 180 to explain the case where the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recessed portion 183e falls out of the first through gate 35.

As already explained, the fourth recess 183e is formed slightly smaller than the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e is likely to be caught by the fourth front surface 191b and pushed to the left, and is likely to fall off to the left of the first through gate 35.

During the design stage, the position of the ejection protrusion 181e and the inclination of the ejection right side surface 181g were adjusted so that the probability of a game ball B1 ejected from the fourth recess 183e entering the first through gate 35 is lower than the probability of a game ball B1 ejected from the other three recesses 183b to 183d entering the first through gate 35.

By configuring the adjustment mechanism 180 so that a portion of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 does not pass through the first through gate 35, the player's attention is prevented from being focused solely on the intake of the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180, and the player is also interested in the discharge of the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180.

As already explained, the ejection protrusion 181e is located below the center of the rotating body 183. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the center of the game ball B1 that is in contact with the ejection protrusion 181e at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 is located to the right of the center of the rotating body 183. The game ball B1 that is taken into the rotating body 183 at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180 comes into contact with the ejection protrusion 181e and is ejected at a timing earlier than the timing at which the game ball B1 rotates 180° around the center of the rotating body 183.

By configuring the game ball B1 taken in at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180 to be discharged before it rotates 180° or more around the center of the rotating body 183 and begins to rise, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from rising at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180. In addition, by shortening the time from when the game ball B1 is taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180 to when it is discharged, the time required for the series of steps of taking in, transporting, and discharging the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180 can be shortened, and the possibility of the player's attention shifting to something else in the middle of this series of steps can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), when the game ball B1 is in contact with both the discharge protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183 at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180, the area sandwiched between the discharge right side 181g with which the left side of the game ball B1 is in contact and the front sides 188b-191b with which the right side of the game ball B1 is in contact has a shape that gradually widens from the top to the bottom. Then, as the rotating body 183 continues to rotate clockwise, the width of the area sandwiched between the discharge right side 181g and the front sides 188b-191b narrows overall. For this reason, within the area sandwiched between the discharge right side 181g and the front sides 188b-191b, the part that has a width that allows the game ball B1 to exist is limited to the lower part.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), the right side surface for discharge 181g is inclined downward and to the left. Therefore, when a force in the left direction is applied from the rotating body 183 during rotation to the game ball B1 in contact with the right side surface for discharge 181g, the game ball B1 moves leftward and downward along the inclination of the right side surface for discharge 181g. At the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 that is in contact with both the ejection protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183 is pushed downward and ejected as the rotating body 183 rotates. Because the right side surface for discharge 181g is inclined downward and to the left, the game ball B1 is prevented from rising and staying at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 without being ejected.

Next, a configuration for allowing game ball B1 that attempts to enter the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 but is not taken into the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 to escape to the rear of the game board 24 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is provided at the rear of the game board 24 as a passage for allowing game ball B1 that is not taken in at the intake port 185 to escape. A passage entrance 171, which is the entrance of the escape passage 172, is provided on the front of the game board 24. The passage entrance 171 is located behind the intake port 185. By allowing game ball B1 that is not taken in at the intake port 185 to escape to the passage entrance 171, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 that is not taken in from remaining around the intake port 185.

First, we will explain the game ball B1 that flowed down into the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state and was not taken into the intake port 185.

Figure 10(a) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when cut directly above the intake port 185 on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24, and Figure 10(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first blade portion 188 when cut on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. In Figures 10(a) and (b), the rotating body 183 is in a rotating state with the first blade portion 188 positioned at the top.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), when a game ball B1 flows down into an intake port 185 that is in an intake prohibited state, the game ball B1 comes into contact with the peripheral surface 188a-191a (FIG. 5(b)) of one of the blade portions 188-191 of the rotor 183 located below the intake port 185.

As shown in Figures 5(a) and (b), the peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of each of the blade portions 188-191 of the rotor 183 are inclined toward the axis toward the rear. Therefore, as shown in Figure 5(a), when the first blade portion 188 is facing upward, the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is inclined downward toward the rear. As a result, as shown in Figure 10(a), the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is guided rearward.

In the intake prohibition state where the second blade portion 189 faces upward, the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189 is inclined downward toward the rear, and in the intake prohibition state where the third blade portion 190 faces upward, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190 is inclined downward toward the rear. In addition, in the intake prohibition state where the fourth blade portion 191 faces upward, the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191 is inclined downward toward the rear.

Although not shown, in the prohibited pick-up state, a game ball B1 that comes into contact with any of the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190, and the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191, which are facing upward, is guided rearward in the same manner as the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 shown in FIG. 10(a).

As shown in FIG. 4, the passage entrance 171 is an opening provided on the front surface of the game board 24 and is located behind the intake port 185. The passage entrance 171 is formed from the left end of the intake port 185 to the right end of the intake port 185 on the front surface of the game board 24.

The upper end of the passage entrance 171 is set approximately half a game ball B1 higher than the upper end of the game ball B1 that contacts the peripheral surface 188a-191a of one of the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 when that blade is facing upward. This allows the game ball B1 that flows down from above the play area PA, collides with the peripheral surface 188a-191a of the blades 188-191 that are inclined downward toward the rear, and bounces diagonally backward to enter the passage entrance 171.

On the other hand, to prevent the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA from entering the passage entrance 171 before reaching the intake port 185, the area above the passage entrance 171 is set to the minimum area possible to prevent the game ball B1 that has not been taken in by the intake port 185 from stopping or stagnating.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lower left end of the passage entrance 171 is located lower than the upper end of the back surface of any of the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 when the blades 188-191 are facing upward. The lower right end of the passage entrance 171 is located lower than the lower left end. The lower right end of the passage entrance 171 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, a passage recess 181f is formed on the upper part of the base body 181a in the storage section 181 so as not to interfere with the movement of the game ball B1 guided to the passage entrance 171 by the peripheral surface 188a-191a (FIG. 5(a)) of one of the blade portions 188-191 of the rotating body 183.

The passage recess 181f is formed from the left end to the right end of the passage entrance 171. The left side of the passage recess 181f is formed so that when any of the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 are facing upward, the upper end of the base body 181a is positioned lower than the upper end of the back surface of the blade 188-191.

On the left side of the passage recess 181f, the upper end of the base body 181a is located at the same position as the lower end of the passage entrance 171, or higher than the lower end of the passage entrance 171. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10(b), when a game ball B1 comes into contact with the blades 188-191 while attempting to enter the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state, it is guided by the peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of the blades 188-191, and enters the passage entrance 171 without its path being obstructed by the base body 181a of the storage section 181.

As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is formed on the front surface of the game board 24 as a recessed portion recessed toward the rear. The escape passage 172 is formed as a recessed portion having a depth dimension in the front-rear direction greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, and a width dimension in the lateral direction greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the escape passage 172 has a passage cross-section that allows the game balls B1 to pass through when they are lined up in a single row.

The upstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed from the passage entrance 171 toward the lower left, and the downstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed vertically downward. The escape passage 172 guides the game ball B1 that enters from the passage entrance 171 to the lower left of the first through gate 35.

A step is provided on the edge of the recess formed as the escape passage 172 on the front surface of the game board 24. The escape passage 172 is covered from the front by a transparent acrylic plate 172a molded in the same shape as the portion of the escape passage 172 that does not overlap with the base body 181a of the storage section 181 when viewed from the front. The acrylic plate 172a is fixed to the step formed on the edge of the escape passage 172 with adhesive.

The step formed on the edge of the escape passage 172 has a depth in the front-rear direction equal to the thickness of the acrylic plate 172a, and the front surface of the acrylic plate 172a is located on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24. The escape passage 172 is closed by the acrylic plate 172a and the base body 181a of the storage section 181, and the places where the game ball B1 can enter and exit are limited to the passage entrance 171 and the passage exit 173.

The acrylic plate 172a and adjustment mechanism 180 fixed to the front of the escape passage 172 are transparent, so the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 can be seen from outside. If the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 cannot be grasped from the outside, the player cannot follow the movement of the game ball B1 after it enters the passage entrance 171, and the flow of the game ball B1 is interrupted midway. In contrast, by making the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 visible from the outside, the flow of the game ball B1 that the player can grasp can be maintained as a continuous one.

As shown in FIG. 4, a passage exit 173, which is the exit of the escape passage 172, is provided on the lower left of the first through gate 35 on the game board 24. The passage exit 173 is formed as an opening facing forward on the front surface of the game board 24. The passage exit 173 has a shape and size that allows the game balls B1 guided by the escape passage 172 to be discharged forward one by one.

As shown in FIG. 4, an exit roof 174 is provided near the upper part of the passage exit 173 to prevent the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173 from colliding with the game ball B1 flowing down ahead of the front surface of the game board 24. The exit roof 174 is provided as a protrusion that protrudes from the front surface of the game board 24 toward the window panel 52 (FIG. 1), and exists from the front surface of the game board 24 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52. Since the upper surface of the exit roof 174 is inclined downward toward the right, the game ball B1 that flows down from above and comes into contact with the exit roof 174 is guided to the right in a manner that does not collide with the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173.

The game ball B1 that passes through the escape passage 172 and is discharged from the passage exit 173 forward of the front surface of the game board 24 flows down the game area PA. As shown in FIG. 3, the passage exit 173 is located upstream of the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173 can reach the area where the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are provided, and enter either the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

As already explained, the game ball B1 that enters the first through gate 35 can also flow down the game area PA and enter either the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The game ball B1 that is guided to the first through gate 35 by the adjustment mechanism 180, and the game ball B1 that is guided to the escape passage 172 by the adjustment mechanism 180 and discharged from the passage outlet 173 can both flow down to the area where the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are provided. Therefore, the presence of the adjustment mechanism 180 does not reduce the number of game balls B1 that reach the area where the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are provided.

Returning to the explanation of the intake of the game ball B1 at the intake port 185, as shown in FIG. 4, in the transition process from the intake permitted state to the intake prohibited state, when the game ball B1 flows down into the intake port 185 at the timing when the gap between the blades 188-191 and the right standing wall 181d transitions from a wider state than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a narrower state, the game ball B1 may be sandwiched between the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 and the right standing wall 181d. Below, the state transitioning from the intake permitted state to the intake prohibited state is referred to as an intermediate state. Also, the end face that is located at the top of the right standing wall 181d that sandwiches the game ball B1 together with the blades 188-191 in the intermediate state is referred to as the standing wall end face 182, which is a surface that defines the right end of the intake port 185.

Here, we will explain the configuration for allowing the game ball B1, which is sandwiched between the blades 188-191 and the upright wall end face 182 at the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, to escape to the escape passage 172. First, we will explain the inclination of the front faces 188b-191b, which are the side faces of the blades 188-191 and are located at the front of the rotation direction of the rotor 183, with reference to Figure 5 (b).

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the front surfaces 188b-191b of each of the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 are inclined rearward in the direction of rotation. Therefore, when the blades 188-191 are facing upward, the front surfaces 188b-191b of the blades 188-191 are inclined leftward in the rearward direction.

Regardless of the rotation state of the rotor 183, the front faces 188b-191b of the upper blades 188-191 are inclined leftward toward the rear. Therefore, in the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the second front face 189b of the second blade 189 and the standing wall side end face 182, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the third front face 190b of the third blade 190 and the standing wall side end face 182, and the game ball B1 sandwiched between the fourth front face 191b of the fourth blade 191 and the standing wall side end face 182 move in the same direction as the game ball B1 sandwiched between the first front face 188b of the first blade 188 and the standing wall side end face 182. Below, we will explain the movement of the game ball B1 that is sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the upright wall side end surface 182 by using the game ball B1 as an example when it is sandwiched in the intake port 185 in the intermediate state.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188 facing upward is inclined leftward toward the rear. FIG. 10(c) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when cutting directly above the intake port 185 with a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 10(c), the upright wall side end surface 182 is inclined rightward toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 in the intermediate state and is sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the upright wall side end surface 182, the two surfaces 182, 188b sandwiching the game ball B1 form a "V" shape with the rear side (game board 24 side) being wider than the front side (window panel 52 side).

When the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise while the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the two faces 182, 188b, the distance between the two faces 182, 188b gradually decreases from the front side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front face 188b and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the upright wall side end face 182 both have a component that moves the game ball B1 backward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the game ball B1 sandwiched between the two faces 182, 188b is pushed toward the passage entrance 171 provided behind the intake port 185 by the rotation of the rotating body 183. The pushed-out game ball B1 then enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171 and is guided to the passage exit 173.

As already explained in FIG. 5(b), the front surfaces 188b-191b of each of the blades 188-191 are surfaces that extend in the radial direction of the rotor 183. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with both one of the front surfaces 188b-191b and the right side upright wall 181d (FIG. 10(c)) at the intake port 185, the front surface 188b-191b in contact with the game ball B1 is tilted downward and to the left. Therefore, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the front surfaces 188b-191b by the rotor 183 rotating clockwise includes a downward component. This prevents the game ball B1 from moving upward when it is pushed toward the passage entrance 171.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), the inclination of the front faces 188b-191b and the upright wall end face 182, and the rotation of the rotor 183 are used to push the trapped game ball B1 out to the passage entrance 171, thereby preventing the game ball B1 from staying still or rising, and eliminating the trapped state of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 4, the right side of the passage entrance 171 and the right side of the passage recess 181f are formed so that in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 and the right side upright wall 181d can enter the passage entrance 171.

The game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188-191 and the right side upright wall 181d is positioned lower than the game ball B1 that contacts the peripheral surface 188a-191a of any of the blades 188-191 in the intake prohibited state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower end of the right side of the passage entrance 171 is positioned lower than the lower end of the left side of the passage entrance 171, and the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is positioned lower than the upper end of the base body 181a on the left side of the passage recess 181f.

The upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is located lower than the lower end of the game ball B1 that is sandwiched between the wing portions 188-191 and the right side standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. In addition, the lower end of the right side of the passage entrance 171 is formed to be located at the same position as the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f, or lower than the upper end of the base body 181a.

However, in order to prevent the game ball B1 taken into one of the recesses 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 in the intake permitted state from passing through the passage recess 181f formed at the rear and entering the passage entrance 171, the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is set to be slightly lower than the lower end of the game ball B1 that is sandwiched between the blades 188-191 and the right side upright wall 181d in the intermediate state.

As already explained, each recess 183b-183e of the rotor 183 is inclined toward the axis toward the front, so that the game ball B1 captured in each recess 183b-183e is held at the front of the game area PA. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B1 captured in each recess 183b-183e will pass through the passage recess 181f located at the rear (particularly the right side of the passage recess 181f) and enter the passage entrance 171.

When one game ball B1 has already been taken into the upper recessed portions 183b-183e at the intake port 185 (FIG. 7(a)), another game ball B1 may arrive at the intake port 185. In this case, the recessed portions 183b-183e are already being held on the window panel 52 side. Therefore, the center of the game ball B1 that arrives at the intake port 185 later is likely to be located behind the center of the game ball B1 already taken into the recessed portions 183b-183e. In this case, the game ball B1 that arrives at the intake port 185 later will come into contact with the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b-183e, bounce back, and enter the passage entrance 171.

In addition, if the center of the game ball B1 that arrives at the intake port 185 later is shifted to the left or right from the center of the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the game ball B1 that arrives at the intake port 185 later will come into contact with the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e and bounce off to the left or right, and will flow downstream in the game area PA to the side of the adjustment mechanism 180 without being taken into the adjustment mechanism 180. In this way, when multiple game balls B1 arrive at the intake port 185 in a single intake permission state at the intake port 185, one game ball B1 will be taken into one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e, and the remaining game balls B1 will be able to flow downstream in the game area PA without remaining near the intake port 185.

Figure 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of the game ball B1 that has flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball B1 that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball B1 that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. The game ball B1 that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back of the game board 24, discharge passages 42-48 are formed corresponding to the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the outlet 24a, respectively. The game balls B1 that flow into the discharge passages 42-48 flow down the discharge passages 42-48 and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are collected in a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The game balls B1 collected in the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment on which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each discharge passage section 42-48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a-48a for detecting the game ball B1. These discharge passage sections 42-48 and detection sensors 42a-48a will be described below. As already explained, four general winning openings 31 are provided, and therefore discharge passage sections 42-44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided for each of the first discharge passage section 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage section 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it on the right. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range is located in the middle of the first discharge passage section 42, and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so that the detection range is located in the middle of the second discharge passage section 43. The game ball B1 that enters the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game ball B1 that enters the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the left is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage section 44 is provided for the two general winning openings 31 on the right side, which are formed so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and the entrance side areas merge at an intermediate position to form one exit side area. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the exit side area in the third discharge passage section 44. The game ball B1 that enters one of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

The fourth discharge passage section 45 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the fourth discharge passage section 45, and the game ball B1 that enters the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a while passing through the fourth discharge passage section 45. The fifth discharge passage section 46 exists in correspondence with the first operating port 33. A first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball B1 that enters the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a while passing through the fifth discharge passage section 46. The sixth discharge passage section 47 exists in correspondence with the second operating port 34. A second actuation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the game ball B1 that enters the second actuation port 34 is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a while passing through the sixth discharge passage section 47. A seventh discharge passage section 48 exists corresponding to the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and the game ball B1 that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a while passing through the seventh discharge passage section 48.

Note that a game ball B1 that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a-48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A first gate detection sensor 49a is provided for the first through gate 35, and a second gate detection sensor 50a is provided for the second through gate 39. Therefore, a game ball B1 that passes through the first through gate 35 on its way down the play area PA is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a, and a game ball B1 that passes through the second through gate 39 is detected by the second gate detection sensor 50a.

The various detection sensors 42a-50a are all electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect the game ball B1 individually. The various detection sensors 42a-50a are electrically connected to the main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-50a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a-50a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting the game ball B1, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting the game ball B1. However, this is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a display light-emitting unit 53 is provided above the window 51. A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are also provided to output sound effects according to the game status. An upper bulge 55 and a lower bulge 56 are arranged vertically below the window 51, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 55, and a lower tray 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 56. The upper tray 55a has the function of temporarily storing game balls B1 paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 56a also has the function of storing surplus game balls B1 in the upper tray 55a.

Next, we will explain the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) is equipped with a main control device 60 that mainly controls the game. The main control device 60 is composed of a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The board box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Possible trace means include a joint structure that inseparably connects the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a and requires destruction of a specified portion when separating them, or a structure in which a seal sticker that leaves a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the object to be attached when peeled off is attached across the boundaries between the multiple case bodies. Also, a trace structure may be a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 72 formed from a transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls B1 are successively replenished from the island equipment of the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls B1 stored in the tank 75. The game balls B1 paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power source on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has the function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply and launch control device 78 that generates and outputs the predetermined power required by the various control devices, etc., and controls the launch of the game ball B1 in response to the player's operation of the launch operation device 28. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are stacked one behind the other, with the payout control device 77 at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 which is responsible for the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 which monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62. In addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit, the MPU 62 also contains a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 also contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. 12, the main ROM 64 stores a low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 and a high-frequency winning judgment value table T2 that are used in the normal power opening lottery to determine whether or not to open or close the normal power role 34a. The low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 and the high-frequency winning judgment value table T2 record judgment values that are eligible for winning in the normal power opening lottery. Details of the low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 and the high-frequency winning judgment value table T2 will be described later.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 allows random access, and when compared for the same data capacity, requires less time to read data than the main ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control programs stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry status of the game ball B1 in the game area PA based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Details will be described later, but the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball B1 into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a, and grasps the entry frequency into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 according to the grasped ball entry history.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60. The power outage monitoring board 67 is connected to a power supply and launch control device 78 that has the function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power outage monitoring board 67.

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to various sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a. As already explained, the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the first operating hole detection sensor 46a, the second operating hole detection sensor 47a, the out hole detection sensor 48a, the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the second gate detection sensor 50a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a, the main CPU 63 judges whether a ball has entered each entry section. In addition, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on the entry into the first operating hole 33 and executes various lotteries based on the entry into the second operating hole 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and an audio/light emitting control device 81. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the game ball B1 entering a prize ball entry section among the above-mentioned entry sections, where the occurrence of the ball entry corresponds to the payout of the game ball B1. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio/light emitting control device 81.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to the special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, the normal electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34, the special chart unit 37, the normal chart unit 38, and the adjustment drive unit 184. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a special chart display unit 37a and a special chart reserved display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal chart unit 38 is provided with a normal chart display unit 38a and a normal chart reserved display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open/close execution mode, the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the special power drive unit 32b so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. Also, when the open state of the normal power role device 34a is selected, the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the normal power drive unit 34b so that the normal power role device 34a is opened and closed. Also, during each game round, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special chart display unit 37a. Also, when the lottery result of whether or not the normal power role device 34a is to be opened is to be clearly displayed, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the normal chart display unit 38a. In addition, when a winning entry occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a change display starts in the special chart display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special chart pending display unit 37b, and when a winning entry occurs in the through gates 35, 39, or when a change display starts in the regular chart display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the regular chart pending display unit 38b.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement hall. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the power supply and launch control device 78 generates the necessary operating power for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the adjustment drive unit 184, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power outage such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, the power supply unit for power outage supplies memory retention power to the main RAM 65 of the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77. The power supply and launch control device 78 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when the specified launch conditions are met.

The audio and light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on commands received from the audio and light emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

During play, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to perform a lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, settings for the display of the special symbol display section 37a, settings for the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, settings for the display of the normal symbol display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot, a reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery for determining whether a reach occurs when the symbol display device 41 misses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuating type counter CS for determining the display duration time in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41. In addition, a normal electric device release counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 is in a normal electric open state, and an opening initial value counter C5 used for setting the initial value of the normal electric device release counter C4 are used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 are located in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 65a provided as acquired information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The reserved storage area 65a comprises a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reserved area RE comprises a first reserved area RE1, a second reserved area RE2, a third reserved area RE3 and a fourth reserved area RE4, and a combination of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 according to the winning history of the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, the numerical information is stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order from the first holding area RE1 to the second holding area RE2 to the third holding area RE3 to the fourth holding area RE4. By providing four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls B1 in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other multiple, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the various numerical information stored in the first reserve area RE1 of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 37a begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

In addition, information corresponding to the normal power feature opening counter C4 is stored in the normal power reserve storage area 65c provided in the main RAM 65 when a winning combination occurs in the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39.

The regular power reserve storage area 65c comprises a regular power reserve area HA and a regular power execution area HB. The regular power reserve area HA comprises a first regular power reserve area HA1, a second regular power reserve area HA2, a third regular power reserve area HA3 and a fourth regular power reserve area HA4, and the numerical information of the regular power role opening counter C4 is stored as regular power reserve information in one of the regular power reserve areas HA1 to HA4 according to the winning history of the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39.

In this case, when multiple wins occur consecutively at the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first regular power holding area HA1 to the fourth regular power holding area HA4 in the order of the first regular power holding area HA1 → the second regular power holding area HA2 → the third regular power holding area HA3 → the fourth regular power holding area HA4. By providing four regular power holding areas HA1 to HA4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls B1 at the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other multiple, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The regular power execution area HB is an area in which regular power reserved information for which a regular power release lottery is to be conducted is stored when the change display is started in the regular map display unit 38a (Figure 3). Specifically, when the change display is started in the regular map display unit 38a, the regular power reserved information stored in the first regular power reserved area HA1 is shifted to the regular power execution area HB.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail below.

First, we will explain the normal power feature opening counter C4 and the opening initial value counter C5. The normal power feature opening counter C4 and the opening initial value counter C5 are loop counters that are incremented by one within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. When the normal power feature opening counter C4 goes around once, the value of the opening initial value counter C5 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4.

As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, the normal power release lottery is executed when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39. The numerical information updated in the normal power feature release counter C4 is used for the normal power release lottery. Specifically, when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39, the numerical information updated in the normal power feature release counter C4 is acquired as an opening random number. Hereinafter, the numerical information updated in the normal power feature release counter C4, acquired when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39, and used for the normal power release lottery is described as an opening random number. In the normal power release lottery, a judgment is made as to whether the opening random number to be selected is a winning judgment value that is the target of the lottery for winning the normal power release, and if a positive judgment is made, the normal power release is won, and if a negative judgment is made, the result is a loss.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of support modes are set so that the manner of support provided by the normal power device 34a differs from one another. In detail, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which the game ball B1 continues to be released in the same manner into the game area PA.

First, we will explain the normal power release lottery that is executed in the low frequency support mode. The main ROM 64 (Figure 12) stores a low frequency winning judgment value table T1 that records the winning judgment values that are the targets for winning the normal power release lottery in the normal power release lottery that is executed in the low frequency support mode. Figure 14 (a) shows the low frequency winning judgment value table T1.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the winning judgment value for the normal power release lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode is set to (250×n-5) to (250×n). Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 262. The probability of winning the normal power release lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode is approximately 1/42.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the winning judgment values that are the target for winning the normal power release are consecutive numbers in units of 6. In addition, the update period of the opening random numbers in the normal power role opening counter C4 is 4 msec. Therefore, in the normal power role opening counter C4, the period during which the updated opening random numbers become the winning judgment values for the normal power release winning targets in the normal power release lottery in the low frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

If the winning target period is the 24 msec period during which the winning determination value that is eligible for the normal power release win continues, then in the low-frequency support mode, the winning target period occurs in a 1-sec cycle, as shown in Figure 14 (a). Here, if the timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 (Figure 4) enters the first through gate 35 is the winning possible timing, then as described above, the cycle at which the winning possible timing occurs is 1 sec, the same cycle as the winning target period occurs in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in low-frequency support mode, the period in which the winning timing overlaps with the winning target period becomes a consecutive winning period in which regular power release wins occur consecutively. This consecutive winning period continues until the initial value of the regular power feature release counter C4 is updated and the timing of the winning target period occurs shifts. If the timing of the winning target period occurs shifts, a consecutive non-winning period will occur in which losing results continue in the regular power release lottery executed in low-frequency support mode until the winning target period and the winning timing overlap again.

As described above, the timing at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and a winning entry occurs in the first through gate 35 can occur in 1-second cycles. For this reason, during the consecutive non-winning periods and consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode, the normal map fluctuation time during which the normal map display section 38a (Figure 3) fluctuates is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than 1 second. For this reason, even if the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 continuously in 1-second cycles, when a winning entry occurs, the fluctuation of the normal map display section 38a corresponding to the previous winning entry will have ended. This makes it possible to prevent a state in which the normal map pending information exceeds the upper limit (4 pieces) from becoming a normal state.

Next, we will explain the normal power release lottery that is executed in the high frequency support mode. The main ROM 64 (Figure 12) stores a high frequency winning judgment value table T2 that records the winning judgment values that are the targets for winning the normal power release lottery in the normal power release lottery that is executed in the high frequency support mode. Figure 14 (b) shows the high frequency winning judgment value table T2.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the winning judgment value for the regular power release lottery executed in the high frequency support mode is set to (m to m+2). Here, the variable m is a natural number from 1 to 65501. The probability of winning the regular power release lottery executed in the high frequency support mode is approximately 3/5. In addition, the regular map change time in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.5 sec in order to speed up the consumption of regular map pending information.

The opening mode of the normal power role 34a when the normal power release is won in the low-frequency support mode is the same as the opening mode of the normal power role 34a when the normal power release is won in the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, a series of opening and closing operations in which the normal power role 34a is open for 1 second and closed for 1 second is repeated five times with one normal power release winning as a trigger. In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, the minimum time secured between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery (i.e., the duration of one display on the normal power display unit 38a) is set to the same length as the secured time in the high-frequency support mode.

In the case of a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning of the normal power release lottery, which is triggered by winning the first through gate 35, will not occur. On the other hand, even during a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning of the second through gate 39, which does not have the adjustment mechanism 180 above, may occur. In this case, there is a low probability (approximately 1/42) of winning the normal power release lottery, which is triggered by winning the second through gate 39. During a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, both the game ball B1 entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may occur. During a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning of the normal power release occurring and the opening and closing operation of the normal power role 34a being performed is low, so the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than the probability of winning the second operating port 34.

In the high frequency support mode, there is a high probability (approximately 3/5) of winning the regular power release lottery, which is held in response to winning through gates 35 and 39. Here, the shortest interval at which game ball B1 is launched from game ball launching mechanism 27 (Figure 2) is 0.6 sec. In contrast, the shortest interval at which game ball B1 is released from adjustment mechanism 180 toward first through gate 35 is 1 sec. For this reason, in the high frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for second through gate 39 than for first through gate 35.

In the high frequency support mode, it is possible for the game ball B1 to enter both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. In the high frequency support mode, the normal power opening win occurs frequently and the opening and closing operation of the normal power device 34a is executed, so there is a higher chance of the game ball entering the second operating port 34 than the first operating port 33. The payout of a predetermined number of game balls B1 is executed in response to the entry into the second operating port 34, so in the high frequency support mode the player can play without reducing the number of balls he or she has.

When there is a consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, there is a high probability of consecutive winnings in the regular power release lottery, which is triggered by an entry into the first through gate 35. This increases the frequency with which the opening and closing operation of the regular power device 34a is performed, and during the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible for the game ball B1 to both enter the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34.

During the consecutive winning period in low-frequency support mode, the shortest interval between consecutive normal power release wins is 1 second, and there is a higher chance of winning the normal power release by aiming the game ball B1 at the first through gate 35 than by aiming the game ball B1 at the second through gate 39. For this reason, during the consecutive winning period in low-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first through gate 35 than for the second through gate 39.

During the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the possibility of firing the game ball B1 at the first through gate 35 and winning the regular power release lottery is higher than the possibility of firing the game ball B1 at the second through gate 39 in the high-frequency support mode and winning the regular power release lottery. Also, as already explained, the opening mode of the regular power role 34a when the regular power release is won in the low-frequency support mode is the same as the opening mode of the regular power role 34a when the regular power release is won in the high-frequency support mode. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, when the consecutive winning period occurs, it becomes temporarily easier for the second operating port 34 to win than in the high-frequency support mode.

The consecutive winning period is set in the low-frequency support mode, in which the player has low expectations for winning at the second operating port 34, and the player is not notified of the timing of the transition from the consecutive non-winning period to the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, during the consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the player will launch the game ball B1, aiming at the first through gate 35, in the hope of transitioning to the consecutive winning period.

In the case of pachinko machines that do not have consecutive winning periods, the possibility of winning the normal power release in low-frequency support mode is lower than the possibility of winning the normal power release in high-frequency support mode. For this reason, players' expectations of winning the normal power release are lower in low-frequency support mode than in high-frequency support mode.

In response to this, the present pachinko machine 10 is configured so that during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the initial value of the normal power device opening counter C4 can be changed to transition to a consecutive winning period, allowing the player to have hope that, even in the low-frequency support mode, the machine may transition to a consecutive winning period in which there is a higher possibility of a normal power opening win than in the high-frequency support mode. And, by configuring the machine so that the timing of the transition from the consecutive non-winning period to the consecutive winning period is not notified to the player, the player can always maintain a sense of hope that a transition to a consecutive winning period may occur.

This allows the player's expectations of winning the normal power release to be increased in the low-frequency support mode, which combines consecutive non-winning periods with consecutive winning periods, while maintaining a lower probability of winning the normal power release than in the high-frequency support mode.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode being in the normal power release state per unit time compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. Here, the low-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support mode that combines a continuous non-winning period and a continuous winning period. For example, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time (for example, the time of variable display executed in the normal power display unit 38a based on winning at the through gates 35 and 39) are prepared for the time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of conditions from increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, shortening the reserved time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, shortening the average time of the reserved time, and increasing the probability of winning.

Here, the consecutive winning periods and consecutive non-winning periods that occur during the low frequency support mode will be explained based on Figures 15(a)-(c) and Figures 16(a)-(d). First, the timing of the normal power release winning in a comparative pachinko machine in which consecutive winning periods and consecutive non-winning periods do not occur will be explained based on the time charts of Figures 15(a)-(c). Figure 15(a) shows the timing when winning through gates 35 and 39 can occur in the comparative pachinko machine, Figure 15(b) shows the winning target period during which the numerical information (opening random number) updated in the normal power feature opening counter C4 of the comparative pachinko machine becomes the winning judgment value that is the target for the normal power release winning, and Figure 15(c) shows the timing when the normal power release winning can occur in the comparative pachinko machine.

The comparative pachinko machine is a pachinko machine in which the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4) is not provided on the game board 24 and the initial value of the random number for release, which is updated by the normal power device release counter C4, is not updated in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Also, at the timings t1 to t6 shown in FIGS. 15(a) to (c), the comparative pachinko machine is in the low frequency support mode. The timing at which winning occurs at the through gates 35 and 39 in the comparative pachinko machine is random, so the timing shown in FIG. 15(a) is just one example.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), at time t1, the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35, 39. However, as shown in FIG. 15(b), time t1 is outside the period eligible for winning. The period eligible for winning starts at time t2, which follows time t1. For this reason, even if the winning at time t1 triggers the acquisition of an opening random number, and a regular power opening lottery is held using that opening random number, the result will be a losing one.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the next period eligible for winning starts at time t3 after time t2, the period eligible for winning continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 15(a), when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35, 39 at time t4 within the period eligible for winning, the winning at time t4 triggers the acquisition of an opening random number. Then, as shown in FIG. 15(c), in the regular power opening lottery that is held using the opening random number acquired at time t4, the regular power opening is won.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), at t5, 1 sec after t3, the next winning period, which lasts for 24 msec, begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 15(a), at t6 after the winning period ends, the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35, 39 and an opening random number is obtained. As shown in FIG. 15(c), the regular power opening lottery, which is conducted using the opening random number obtained at t6, results in a loss.

In this way, in a comparative pachinko machine in which the adjustment mechanism 180 is not provided on the game board 24 and the initial value of the random number for release is not updated, the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35, 39 is random, and the normal power release is won only when the timing of the winning overlaps with the winning target period that starts every 1 second. For this reason, in this comparative pachinko machine, there are no consecutive winning periods or consecutive non-winning periods.

Next, the timing at which a normal power release win occurs in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained based on the time charts of Figures 16(a) to (d). Figure 16(a) shows the timing at which the game ball B1 can enter the first through gate 35, Figure 16(b) shows the winning target period during which the numerical information (random number for release) updated in the normal power device release counter C4 becomes the winning determination value that is the target for the normal power release win, Figure 16(c) shows the initial value update timing of the numerical information (random number for release) updated in the normal power device release counter C4, and Figure 16(d) shows the timing at which a normal power release win can occur. At the timings t1 to t12 shown in Figures 16(a) to (d), this pachinko machine 10 is in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning eligible period starts at time t1, and the winning eligible period lasts for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the time t2 when winning occurs at the first through gate 35 is located between the winning eligible period that starts at time t1 and the next winning eligible period that starts at time t3, 1 sec after time t1, and is outside the winning eligible period. Therefore, even if winning occurs at the first through gate 35 at time t2, it does not result in a winning of the normal power release.

As already explained, the interval at which the game ball B1 can be discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 towards the first through gate 35 is 1 sec. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the timing t4 at which a winning entry into the first through gate 35 can occur next after timing t2 is 1 sec after timing t2. As shown in FIG. 16(b), timing t4 is outside the period eligible for winning. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 16(d), even if a winning entry into the first through gate 35 occurs at timing t4, it does not result in a winning of the normal power release.

The period during which it is possible to win at the first through gate 35 and the period during which the winning period occurs are the same period. Therefore, if the timing at which a win at the first through gate 35 can occur deviates from the winning period, it will be a consecutive non-winning period in which there are consecutive losing results in the regular power opening lottery.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 is updated at the timing of t5. When the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 is updated, the timing at which a win is possible at the first through gate 35 may shift and overlap with the winning target period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning target period begins at the timing of t6, which is after the timing of t5. Then, as shown in FIG. 16(a), a win occurs at the first through gate 35 at the timing of t7 within the winning target period, and a random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(d), when a normal power opening lottery is executed using the random number for opening obtained at the timing of t7, a normal power opening lottery is won.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the eligible winning period starts again at t8, 1 sec after t6. Also, as shown in FIG. 16(a), at t9, 1 sec after t7, a winning entry into the first through gate 35 occurs and an opening random number is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(d), a regular power opening win occurs in the regular power opening lottery, which is conducted using the opening random number obtained at t9. In this way, once the timing at which a winning entry into the first through gate 35 can be made overlaps with the eligible winning period, a consecutive winning period occurs during which regular power opening wins occur consecutively in the regular power opening lottery.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16(c), at the timing of t10, the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 is updated again. As a result, the timing at which the first through gate 35 can win is shifted from the winning target period. As shown in FIG. 16(a), at the timing of t11, which is later than the timing of t10, the first through gate 35 wins and the opening random number is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the timing of t11 is outside the winning target period, and the next winning target period begins at the timing of t12, which is later than the timing of t11. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16(d), if the normal power opening lottery is executed using the opening random number obtained at the timing of t11, the result will be a loss. In this way, if the timing at which the first through gate 35 can win is shifted from the winning target period due to the initial value update of the normal power role opening counter C4, the normal power opening lottery returns to a continuous non-winning period in which losing results are consecutive.

As shown in FIG. 12, the main RAM 65 is provided with a skip flag 65d, which is set to "1" at the start of a consecutive winning period, thereby enabling the skip of updating the initial value in the normal power reel opening counter C4, and a skip completion flag 65e, which is set to "1" when a consecutive winning period is reached and the skip of updating the initial value in the normal power reel opening counter C4 has already been performed during that consecutive winning period.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a consecutive winning period occurs, the initial value update of the regular power device opening counter C4 is postponed once at the first timing for updating the initial value of the regular power device opening counter C4. By frequently updating the initial value of the regular power device opening counter C4, the possibility of a consecutive winning period occurring during a consecutive non-winning period is increased, and by postponing the update of the initial value of the regular power device opening counter C4 when a consecutive winning period occurs, the consecutive winning period is made to continue for a long time. This makes the occurrence of a consecutive winning period attractive to players. By making the occurrence of a consecutive winning period an event that players look forward to, the excitement of the game can be increased.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 when the game ball B1 enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/lose table. As a win/lose table, a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode are set. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the win/lose lottery means.

In a game state where the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot win is two. On the other hand, in a game state where the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot win is twenty. Note that the number of random numbers that will result in a win can be any number, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a when the game ball B1 enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: (1) the manner of opening and closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and (3) the support mode in the regular electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As the manner of opening and closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Specifically, in either the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode, a predetermined number of rounds are played up to the upper limit.

Here, a round of play refers to a game that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls B1 have entered the special electric winning device 32. In addition, the number of rounds of play in the open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is the same fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, regardless of the jackpot result, the upper limit number of rounds of play is set to 15 rounds.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the special electric winning device 32 is set to have multiple opening modes with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed. In detail, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a short time of 0.06 seconds, which is shorter than the long time, are set.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball B1 is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, the upper limit number of balls for the end condition of the round game is set to nine. In this case, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to a time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to a time shorter than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launch cycle of the game ball B1. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of balls in one round game, and when one opening is performed in the short-time mode, it is expected that no winning will occur in the special electric winning device 32, or that if a winning occurs, it will be about one ball.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a short time mode.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, the number of rounds of play, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of times per round of play in the high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the main ROM 64. The allocation destinations are set to a low probability jackpot result, a low probability jackpot result with a high probability of winning, and a most favorable jackpot result.

A low probability jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose selection mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, this high frequency support mode will transition to the low frequency support mode if the number of plays reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 plays) after the transition.

A low-winning, high-probability jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes a low-frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability and high-frequency support modes continue until the lottery result in a win/lose lottery win and the jackpot state is entered.

The most favorable jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high probability and high frequency support modes continue until the lottery result in a win in the jackpot state, which transitions to the jackpot state.

In relation to the above game states, the normal game state refers to a state in which the win/lose selection mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, rather than the open/close execution mode. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a low prize-winning high probability jackpot result is not set as a game result. Also, in the open/close execution mode in a low prize-winning high probability jackpot result, the number of rounds of play may be fewer than in the case of a low probability jackpot result and a most favorable jackpot result.

In the distribution table, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 29," "0 to 9" correspond to a low probability jackpot result, "10 to 14" correspond to a low probability jackpot result with a high probability of winning, and "15 to 29" correspond to the most favorable jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expectation effect is set as a type of display effect in the pattern display device 41. The expectation effect refers to a display state that makes the player think that the change display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result from the start of the change display of the patterns in the pattern display device 41 and before the stop result is derived and displayed in a gaming machine equipped with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing a change display of the patterns, and in which the final stop result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result is a grant corresponding result. Note that, specifically, the grant corresponding result is displayed as a combination of patterns with the same number on one of the pay lines.

There are two types of expectation effects: reach displays and warning displays that are set to anticipate the occurrence of reach displays or corresponding results before the reach display occurs.

The reach display includes a display state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed by stopping the display of the patterns for some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern. In addition, it includes a state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on the background screen, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a reduced or hidden display of the reach pattern combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on almost the entire display surface 41a.

Pre-notification displays include a mode in which characters are displayed separately from the patterns on the pattern rows in a situation in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner in all pattern rows after the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 starts displaying the variable patterns, or in a situation in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner in some pattern rows. Pre-notification displays also include a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner, and a mode in which the patterns on the pattern rows are displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner. Such pre-notification displays can occur in both game rounds when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game round in which the same symbol combination is ultimately displayed. Also, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in a game round corresponding to a miss result, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60, but by the audio and light control device 81. In this case, the audio and light control device 81 executes a lottery process for the preview display so that a game round corresponding to any jackpot result satisfies at least one of the conditions that a preview display is more likely to occur and that a preview display with a low occurrence rate is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a miss result. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the performance for the game round is executed by the pattern display device 41.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. The change type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration in the special chart display unit 37a and the display duration of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is obtained when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the special chart display unit 37a and at the start of the pattern change by the pattern display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, we will explain each process executed to progress the game by the master CPU 63. The processes of the master CPU 63 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In this power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and then a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses before proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of this power-on wait process, the operation start and initial settings of the pattern display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main CPU 63 are set (step S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 has been manually operated (step S104), and further whether the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 has been set to "1" (step S105). In addition, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data (step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example when the gaming hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Similarly, if the power interruption occurrence information has not been set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by a checksum, the process moves to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 is set to an initial value, such as initializing the power outage flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) is executed to cause the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output process is executed to output various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 (step S111). The details of the recognition process and the data output process will be explained later.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but timer interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring when main processing is started. This state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released when step S111 is completed and before step S112 is executed, and timer interrupt processing is permitted to be executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output processing of step S111 ends, and timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before step S112 is started. Therefore, processing to progress the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

Then, proceed to the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI and the release initial value counter C5, and in step S114, a fluctuation counter update process is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, each is cleared to "0". After that, in step S115, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 18. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, the power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cut is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if a power outage is identified, the power outage process is executed and then an infinite loop is entered. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is saved.

Then, a random number update process for lottery is executed (step S202). In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is read out sequentially from the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read out is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, each is cleared to "0".

After step S202, in step S203, an open counter update process is executed to update the normal power feature open counter C4 (FIG. 13). The details of the open counter update process will be described later. Then, in step S204, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI and the open initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S205, a variable counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

The normal power feature opening counter C4 is a loop counter, and the opening counter update process that updates the normal power feature opening counter C4 is executed periodically. Therefore, the timing for updating the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4, which occurs when the normal power feature opening counter C4 goes around once, occurs periodically.

Here, if the opening initial value counter C5 for updating the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 is a loop counter and the opening initial value counter C5 is updated periodically, the numerical information obtained as the initial value from the opening initial value counter C5 at the timing of updating the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 is limited to a part of the numerical information updated by the opening initial value counter C5.

In this case, the timing of the occurrence of consecutive winning periods in the low frequency support mode already explained will not be random. There may be a situation where the winning period and the timing when it is possible to win do not overlap, resulting in no consecutive winning periods, a situation where the winning period and the timing when it is possible to win overlap frequently, resulting in frequent consecutive winning periods, or a situation where consecutive winning periods occur periodically, allowing the player to easily guess when the consecutive winning periods will occur.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the random number initial value update process, which updates the opening initial value counter C5, both within the periodic timer interrupt process and within the non-periodic remaining process of the main process. This allows the winning target period and the timing when a prize can be won to overlap at an appropriate frequency. This makes it possible to generate a consecutive winning period in a low-frequency support mode that combines consecutive non-winning periods with consecutive winning periods, in a manner that makes the possibility of a normal power opening winning lower than the possibility of a normal power opening winning in the high-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18, after executing the fluctuation counter update process in step S205, in step S206, a rotation control process is executed to rotate the rotor 183 once every 4 seconds. In this rotation control process, it is determined whether it is time to rotate the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 that is connected to the rotor 183, and if it is time to rotate the output shaft 184a, a pulse signal is sent to the adjustment drive unit 184 to rotate the output shaft 184a. In this rotation control process, a pulse signal is sent once every 8 msec to rotate the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 by 0.72°. In other words, in the timer interrupt process executed at a cycle of 4 msec, a pulse signal is sent once every two times to drive the adjustment drive unit 184.

After that, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a specific event set as a target for fraudulent activity has occurred (step S207). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and if a specific event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". In the following step S208, it is determined whether or not the game progress has been stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag has been set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S208, the process from step S209 onwards is executed.

In step S209, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 32b, 34b. For example, when information is set to switch the special power winning device 32 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when information is set to switch the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, a read process is executed (step S210). In the read process, signals other than the power outage signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S211). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a-50a are read, and based on the read results, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, the second operating hole 34, the first through gate 35, and the second through gate 39. Details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Then, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of the multiple types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S212). In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled in a consolidated manner, but it is also possible to configure the system to collectively update both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters.

Then, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of the game ball B1 (step S213). When the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, one game ball B1 is launched at a predetermined launch cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the following step S214, as an input status monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S210, a disconnection check is performed for each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 is confirmed.

Then, a special chart special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the open/close execution mode (step S215). In the special chart special electric control process, when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored as reserved information in the reserved storage area 65a in chronological order.

Here, if the period during which the normal power device 34a is opening and closing is taken as the support execution period, if a winning entry into the second operating port 34 occurs during the support execution period, a process of adding "1" to the support winning counter is performed. Then, if the value of the support winning counter reaches the upper limit of winnings set for the support execution period, the support end flag is set to "1". Here, the support winning counter is a counter that the main CPU 63 refers to in order to grasp the total number of winnings into the second operating port 34 that occurred during the support execution period, and is provided in the main RAM 65. The support winning counter is cleared to "0" at the start timing of the support execution period. Also, the support end flag is a flag that the main CPU 63 refers to in order to grasp that the number of winnings into the second operating port 34 that occurred during the support execution period has reached the upper limit and that the support execution period has ended, and is provided in the main RAM 65.

In the special chart special electricity control process, on the condition that the game is not in progress or the open/close execution mode and reserved information is stored, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether the reserved information corresponds to a jackpot win or not, and if it does correspond to a jackpot win, an allocation determination process is executed to determine which jackpot result the reserved information corresponds to.

Here, in the win/loss determination process, if a jackpot is won, the high frequency flag is set to "1". The high frequency flag is a flag that is set to "1" if the support mode for winning through the second operating port 34 is the high frequency support mode. By referencing the high frequency flag, the main CPU 63 determines whether the support mode for winning through the second operating port 34 is the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode. As already explained, if a jackpot is won, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the type of jackpot.

In the special chart special power control process, not only the hit/miss judgment process and the allocation judgment process, but also, if the reserved information does not correspond to a big win, a reach judgment process is executed to judge whether the reserved information corresponds to a reach occurrence or not, and a process to select the duration of the game round using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, a variation command including information on the duration according to the results of each process and a type command including information on the game result are sent to the sound and light emission control device 81, and the variation display of the pattern on the special chart display unit 37a is started. By receiving the variation command and the type command, the sound and light emission control device 81 starts the performance for the game round corresponding to the contents of these commands in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 81 sends a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82. By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 starts the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern command on the pattern display device 41. This starts one game round.

In the special chart special electricity control process, during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether the duration of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed, thereby determining whether it is time to end the game round. If it is time to end the game round, a process is executed to end the game round with a display corresponding to the game result. In this case, if the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of any jackpot result, the image corresponding to the type of jackpot result is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart display unit 37a, and if the current game round corresponds to a loss result, the image corresponding to the loss result is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart display unit 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 81. By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light emission control device 81 ends the performance for the current game round in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the performance for the current game round in the pattern display device 41.

In the special chart special electric control process, if the result of the game round corresponds to the transition to the open/close execution mode, a process for starting the open/close execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the open/close execution mode is to be started is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. In addition, in the special chart special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When a round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state, and when a round game is ended, the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. In each of these processes, an opening command indicating that a round game is to be started is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81, and a closing command indicating that the round game is to be ended is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. In addition, in the special chart special electric control process, when the open/close execution mode is to be ended, an ending command indicating that is to be ended is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. The sound and light emission control device 81 executes the performance for the open/close execution mode in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the open/close execution mode. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening and closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to execute the performance for the opening and closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the various commands received during the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, in the special pattern special electric control process, when the opening and closing execution mode is to be ended, a process is performed so that the winning/losing lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode become modes corresponding to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening and closing execution mode.

Specifically, if the type of jackpot result is a low probability jackpot, the play count counter is set to "100" as the end criterion for the high frequency support mode. The play count counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the end reference number of play times has been consumed in the high frequency support mode. The numerical information set in the play count counter is updated so that "1" is subtracted when a play time ends. Also, if the type of jackpot result is a low prize-winning high probability jackpot, or the most favorable jackpot result, the indefinite flag is set to "1". The indefinite flag is a flag for continuing the high frequency support mode until the lottery result in the win/lose lottery becomes a jackpot state win after the open/close execution mode ends, and the jackpot state is transitioned to as a result. In the high frequency support mode with the unlimited flag set to "1", if the jackpot result is a low probability jackpot, the unlimited flag is cleared to "0" and the number of plays counter is set to "100", and if the jackpot result is a low probability jackpot or a most favorable jackpot, the unlimited flag is set to "1" again.

After executing the special chart special power control process in step S215 in the timer interrupt process, the normal chart normal power control process is executed (step S216). In the normal chart normal power control process, when a winning entry has been made to the through gates 35 and 39, a process of executing a normal power opening lottery to determine whether or not to open and close the normal power role 34a is executed, and a process of displaying the normal chart display section 38a and opening and closing the normal power role 34a is executed in a manner according to the result of the normal power opening lottery. The details of the normal chart normal power control process will be described later.

In the next step S217, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the special drawing display unit 37a in the special drawing reserved display unit 37b, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the ordinary drawing display unit 38a in the ordinary drawing reserved display unit 38b. Also, in step S217, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, output information is set to update the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a, and output information is set to update the display contents of the ordinary drawing display unit 38a.

Then, a payout status receiving process is executed to confirm the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 and perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S218). A payout output process is also executed to set the prize ball command as the output target (step S219). An external information setting process is also executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt processing (step S220). Then, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball B1 in the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S221). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, the open counter update process executed in step S203 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the open counter update process executed by the main CPU 63.

First, in step S301, the current numerical information of the normal power reel opening counter C4 is read, and in step S302, it is determined whether the current numerical information read in step S301 is a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value. Here, the current initial value is the numerical information that is newly stored each time the initial value of the normal power reel opening counter C4 is updated.

If the current numerical information is a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value (step S302: YES), this means that this is the time to update the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4. In this case, step S303 determines whether the high frequency flag is set to "1". If the high frequency flag is not set to "1" in step S303, this means that the low frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, step S304 determines whether the pass-through completion flag 65e (FIG. 12) is set to "1".

As already explained, the main RAM 65 (Fig. 12) has a skip flag 65d (Fig. 12) and a skip completion flag 65e (Fig. 12). The skip flag 65d is a flag that is set to "1" when a period of consecutive wins occurs during the normal power release lottery held in the low frequency support mode, and normal power release wins occur three times in a row.

In low frequency support mode, the cases where a normal power release win can occur are when a win occurs at the second through gate 39 during a consecutive non-winning period, when a win occurs at the first through gate 35 during a consecutive winning period, and when a win occurs at the second through gate 39 during a consecutive winning period. Of these, the probability of a win at normal power release when a win occurs at the second through gate 39 is approximately 1/42 during both the consecutive non-winning period and the consecutive winning period.

For this reason, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the regular power release lottery three times in a row, which is triggered by winning the second through gate 39, is low (approximately 1/74000), and winning the regular power release three times in a row almost never occurs. Even if it does happen by chance, if the next regular power release win ends in a loss, the pass-by flag 65d is cleared to "0".

On the other hand, during the consecutive winning period, if a winning entry into the first through gate 35 triggers a regular power release lottery, the regular power release is won. Therefore, if the consecutive winning period begins while the player is operating the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35, the skip flag 65d is set to "1" when the consecutive winning period begins and the first through gate 35 has been won three times. During the consecutive winning period, when the skip flag 65d is set to "1" and the initial value update timing arrives, the update of the initial value of the regular power device opening counter C4 is skipped.

In addition, the skip completion flag 65e is a flag that is set to "1" when the timing for updating the initial value arrives with the skip flag 65d set to "1" and the initial value update of the normal power role opening counter C4 is postponed. Here, the skip flag 65d is a flag that is set to "1" on the condition that the mode is the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the skip flag 65d is never set to "1" in the high frequency support mode. Since the skip flag 65d is not set to "1" in the high frequency support mode, the skip completion flag 65e is never set to "1". The process of setting the skip flag 65d to "1" will be described later.

When the skip completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S304 of the opening counter update process (Figure 19), this means that the update of the initial value of the normal electric feature opening counter C4 has already been skipped during the current consecutive winning period.

If the skip completion flag 65e is not set to "1" in step S304, it is determined in step S305 whether the skip flag 65d is set to "1". If the skip flag 65d is set to "1" (step S305: YES), this means that the current initial value update timing is the initial value update timing for the skip target. In this case, the skip flag 65d is cleared to "0" in step S306, and the skip completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S307.

After determining in step S302 that it is not time to update the initial value, or after clearing the pass-through completion flag 65e to "0" in step S307, in step S308 it is determined whether the current numerical information is the maximum value ("65505") of the normal power reel opening counter C4.

If the current numerical information is not the maximum value in step S308, "1" is added to the current numerical information in step S309 to update the numerical information. Also, if the current numerical information is the maximum value in step S308, the current numerical information is cleared to "0" in step S310 to update the numerical information.

If the skip completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S304, this means that after the initial value update was postponed, the normal power feature opening counter C4 has completed one revolution and it is time to update the initial value again. In this case, the skip completion flag 65e is cleared to "0" in step S311.

After determining in step S303 that the high frequency support mode is selected, after determining in step S305 that the skip flag 65d is not set to "1", or after clearing the skip completion flag 65e to "0" in step S311, the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 is updated. Specifically, in step S312, the current numerical value information in the opening initial value counter C5 is acquired. Then, in step S313, the numerical value information acquired in step S312 is overwritten as the new initial value over the current initial value to update the initial value. In this way, the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 is changed, and the winning target period is shifted. This allows a transition from a continuous non-winning period to a continuous winning period to occur at a timing that is not notified to the player. The initial value updated in step S313 is used in step S302 to determine whether or not it is time to update the initial value.

In the following step S314, the initial value updated in step S313 is overwritten to the normal power feature opening counter C4, thereby updating the numerical information of the normal power feature opening counter C4, and the opening counter update process is terminated.

In this way, by postponing the update of the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 at the first initial value update timing after the start of the consecutive winning period, the duration of the consecutive winning period can be extended, making the consecutive winning period even more attractive to players. On the other hand, when the initial value update timing arrives in the high frequency support mode (step S303: YES), the initial value update of the normal power feature opening counter C4 is always executed.

Next, the normal map/normal power control process executed in step S216 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the normal map/normal power control process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the normal map normal power control process, if a winning entry has been made to the through gates 35, 39, a process is executed to obtain reserved information on the normal map side, and if reserved information on the normal map side is stored, a lottery for opening the normal power is executed using the reserved information, and a process is executed to perform a performance for the normal map using the lottery for opening the normal power. Also, a process is executed to open and close the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 based on the result of the lottery for opening the normal power.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, in the normal map normal power control process, first in step S401, the reserved information acquisition process on the normal map side is executed to acquire reserved information corresponding to winnings at the through gates 35 and 39. Here, the reserved information acquisition process on the normal map side will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the reserved information acquisition process on the normal map side executed by the main CPU 63.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the first gate winning flag is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not a winning entry of the game ball B1 into the first through gate 35 has occurred. Here, the first gate winning flag is a flag that the master CPU 63 uses to identify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. Then, if the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the first gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S502.

If the first gate winning flag is not set to "1" in step S501, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the second gate winning flag is set to "1," thereby determining whether or not a winning entry of the game ball B1 into the second through gate 39 has occurred. Here, the second gate winning flag is a flag that allows the master CPU 63 to identify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39.

If the second gate winning flag is not set to "1" in step S503, the pending information acquisition process ends, and if the second gate winning flag is set to "1", the second gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S504.

After the first gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S502, or after the second gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S504, in step S505, it is determined whether the current normal power reserved information in the normal power reserved area HA is less than the upper limit (4 items). If the normal power reserved information is the upper limit (step S505: NO), the reserved information acquisition process ends, and if the normal power reserved information is less than the upper limit (step S505: YES), the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, the numerical information of the normal power role release counter C4 is stored in the normal power reserved area HA1-HA4, which has the highest priority among the empty normal power reserved areas HA1-H4, and the reserved information acquisition process ends.

If a single processing round is configured to obtain both the pending information corresponding to the "1" set in the first gate winning flag and the pending information corresponding to the "1" set in the second gate winning flag, the two pending information obtained in that processing round will be the same pending information.

In contrast, in the pending information acquisition process on the normal side, if both the first gate winning flag and the second gate winning flag are set to "1" in the current processing round, only the pending information corresponding to the first gate winning flag being set to "1" is acquired.Then, the pending information corresponding to the second gate winning flag being set to "1" is acquired in the next processing round.

Therefore, when the period during which the second gate winning flag is set to "1" overlaps with the period during which the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the opening random number obtained in response to the game ball B1 winning the second through gate 39 can be made different from the opening random number obtained in response to the game ball B1 winning the first through gate 35.

Returning to the explanation of the normal map/normal power control process (Figure 20), after executing the normal map pending information acquisition process in step S401, a process is executed in step S402 to read information of the normal map/normal power counter provided in the main RAM 65, and a process is executed in step S403 to read the normal map/normal power address table from the main ROM 64. Then, in step S404, a process is executed to obtain a start address corresponding to the information of the normal map/normal power counter from the normal map/normal power address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S402 to S404 will be explained. As already explained, the normal map normal power control processing includes processing related to the normal map performance and processing related to the opening and closing of the normal power role 34a. In this case, the normal map change start processing, the normal map change processing, and the normal map confirmation processing are set as processing related to the normal map performance. In addition, the normal power open processing and the normal power closed processing are set as processing related to the opening and closing of the normal power role 34a.

In this processing configuration, the GPWD counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine which of the above multiple types of processing should be executed, and the GPWD address table has a starting address set in the program for executing the above multiple types of processing that corresponds to the numerical information of the GPWD counter.

The normal map/normal power counter can be set to a numerical value between "0" and "4", and the normal map/normal power address table has start address information (NSA0 to NSA4) set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value of the normal map/normal power counter. In this case, start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map change start process, start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map change in progress process, start address NSA2 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map confirmation in progress process, start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the normal power open in progress process, and start address NSA4 is the start address of the program for executing the normal power closed in progress process.

When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the GPWD counter is incremented by 1, decremented by 1, or cleared to "0" depending on the processing to be executed in the GPWD control processing in the next processing round, when the condition for updating the numerical information is met. Therefore, in the GPWD control processing in each processing round, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the GPWD counter.

The above configuration enables the main CPU 63 to determine which process should be executed as normal power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. This simplifies the process.

The following describes the processing configuration for executing the normal map change start process, the normal map change in progress process, the normal map confirmation process, the normal power open process, and the normal power closed process using the normal map/normal power counter and the normal map/normal power address table.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 20, after executing the processing of step S404, in step S405, the process of setting the zero flag on the normal side is executed. In the process of setting the zero flag on the normal side, the numerical information of the normal-normal-power timer counter is read, and if the numerical information of the normal-normal-power timer counter is "0", the process of setting the zero flag on the normal side provided in the register of the main CPU 63 to "1" is executed. The normal-normal-power timer counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the timing of updating the normal-normal-power counter according to the passage of time, and the numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time is set in each process of steps S407 to S411, and the update of the numerical information is executed in the timer update process of step S212 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

In the next step S406, a process is executed to jump (transition) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404. Specifically, if the acquired start address is NSA0, a jump is made to the normal map change start process in step S407; if the acquired start address is NSA1, a jump is made to the normal map change in process in step S408; if the acquired start address is NSA2, a jump is made to the normal map confirmation process in step S409; if the acquired start address is NSA3, a jump is made to the normal power open process in step S410; if the acquired start address is NSA4, a jump is made to the normal power closed process in step S411. Then, after executing any of the processes in steps S407 to S411, this normal map normal power control process is terminated. Below, the processes in steps S407 to S411 are explained individually.

First, the normal map change start process (step S407) in the normal map normal power control process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal map change start process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the normal chart change start process, first in step S601, by referencing the high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 65, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the high frequency flag is set to "1" in step S601 and the high frequency support mode is in effect, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the indefinite flag is set to "1". As already explained, if the indefinite flag is set to "1", it means that a low prize high probability jackpot or a most favorable jackpot has been won, and the high frequency support mode has been entered after the opening and closing execution mode has ended.

If the indefinite flag has not been set to "1" in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether the value of the play count counter is "0". If the value of the play count counter is "0" in step S603, this means that the standard number of plays to end the high-frequency support mode has been reached. In this case, in step S604, the high-frequency flag is cleared to "0". This causes the support mode of the normal power device 34a to transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the normal map fluctuation start process is not executed when the numerical information of the normal map normal power counter corresponds to the normal power open process or the normal power closed process, i.e., when the opening and closing operation of the normal power device 34a is being executed when the normal power open is won. Therefore, even if the end reference number of play rounds ends while the opening and closing operation is being executed based on the normal power open being won before the end of the end reference number of play rounds, the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode, and is switched to the low frequency support mode after the opening and closing operation of the normal power device 34a is finished.

In the next step S605, an external output setting process for high-frequency release is executed. In this external output setting process, data is set in the main RAM 65 so that the output of the high-frequency signal from the external terminal board 97 (Fig. 2) to the management computer of the amusement hall is stopped. The output of the high-frequency signal is started when switching to the high-frequency support mode. Incidentally, the output of the high-frequency signal is stopped in the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 18).

After making a negative judgment in step S601, making a positive judgment in step S602, making a negative judgment in step S603, or executing the processing of step S605, in step S606, it is determined whether the total number of reserved information NS on the regular map side is 1 or greater. If the total number of reserved information NS on the regular map side is "0" (step S606: NO), the regular map change start processing ends as is, and if it is 1 or greater (step S606: YES), the processing proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, a normal power release lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a normal power release has been won, which opens and closes the normal power device 34a, and then the normal power change start process is terminated. Here, the normal power release lottery process is explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the normal power release lottery process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the regular power release lottery process, first in step S701, a shift process is executed for the regular power reservation area HA (Fig. 13). In this shift process, the release random numbers stored in the first regular power reservation area HA1 (Fig. 13) of the regular power reservation area HA are shifted to the regular power execution area HB (Fig. 13), and after the shift, the first regular power reservation area HA1 is cleared. In addition, the release random numbers in each area are shifted in the following order: second regular power reservation area HA2 (Fig. 13) → first regular power reservation area HA1, third regular power reservation area HA3 (Fig. 13) → second regular power reservation area HA2, fourth regular power reservation area HA4 (Fig. 13) → third regular power reservation area HA3.

In the next step S702, it is determined whether the high frequency flag is set to "1", and if the high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S702: YES), it is determined in step S703 whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S702, or if a positive determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the low frequency winning judgment value table T1 (Figure 14 (a)) is read from the main ROM 64, and in step S705, a regular winning/losing judgment process (regular power release lottery) is performed. In the regular power release lottery, if the release random number stored in the regular power execution area HB matches any of the winning judgment values stored in the low frequency winning judgment value table T1, the regular power release is won, and if it does not match any of the winning judgment values, the result is a loss.

In the following step S706, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal drawing win/loss determination process in step S705 was a win for normal power release. If the result of the normal drawing win/loss determination process is a win for normal power release (step S706: YES), it is determined in step S707 whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1". If the high frequency flag is not set to "1" and the mode is low frequency support mode (step S707: NO), it is determined in step S708 whether or not the consecutive win flag is set to "1". Here, the consecutive win flag is a flag for identifying a consecutive win period in low frequency support mode, and is provided in the main RAM 65 (Figure 12).

The main RAM 65 is equipped with a consecutive winning counter for counting the number of consecutive regular power release wins during a consecutive non-winning period in the low frequency support mode. When the value of the consecutive winning counter reaches "3", the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) determines that a consecutive winning period has begun and sets the consecutive winning flag to "1".

If the consecutive win flag is not set to "1" in step S708, the consecutive win counter is incremented by "1" in step S709, and it is determined in step S710 whether the value of the consecutive win counter is "3." If the value of the consecutive win counter is "3" (step S710: YES), it is determined that the consecutive win period has begun.

In this case, the consecutive win counter is cleared to "0" in step S711, and the skip flag 65d is set to "1" in step S712. As a result, the update of the initial value of the regular power feature opening counter C4 is postponed at the initial value update timing of the regular power feature opening counter C4 that occurs first after the current consecutive win period has occurred. Then, in step S713, the consecutive win flag is set to "1" to record that this is a consecutive win period.

If the normal winning/losing determination process (normal power release lottery) in step S705 results in a loss (step S706: NO), the consecutive winning counter is cleared to "0" in step S714, and the consecutive winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S715. Therefore, even if a normal power release win occurs only once or by chance twice in a row as a result of game ball B1 entering the second through gate 39 during a consecutive non-winning period in the low frequency support mode, it is not determined that a consecutive winning period has begun.

If a negative judgment is made in step S703, since the mode is high frequency support mode and opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the high frequency winning judgment value table T2 (Figure 14 (b)) is read from the main ROM 64 in step S716, and in step S717, a regular winning/losing judgment process is performed in the same manner as in step S705. In the regular winning/losing judgment process, if the opening random number stored in the regular power execution area HB matches any of the winning judgment values stored in the high frequency winning judgment value table T2, a regular power opening win is determined, and if it does not match any of the winning judgment values, a loss is determined.

After determining in step S707 that the mode is high frequency support mode, after determining in step S708 that the period of consecutive wins has already begun, after determining in step S710 that the value of the consecutive win counter is "2" or less, after setting the consecutive win flag to "1" in step S713, after clearing the consecutive win flag to "0" in step S715, or after executing the normal draw win/loss determination process in step S717, in step S718, the normal draw fluctuation time stored in the main ROM 64 is read out. Information that sets the normal draw fluctuation time to 0.5 sec is prestored in the main ROM 64.

In the following step S719, the information on the normal map fluctuation time read out in step S718 is set in the normal map/normal power timer counter, and in step S720, processing is executed to start the fluctuation display in the normal map display unit 38a (Figure 3). Then, in step S721, "1" is added to the numerical information of the normal map/normal power counter, thereby updating the numerical information of the normal map/normal power counter from "0" to "1", and this normal map fluctuation start processing is terminated.

As already explained, even if three consecutive wins for normal power release occur in the high frequency support mode, the processing of steps S708 to S713 is not executed if it is determined in step S707 that the mode is the high frequency support mode, so that the postponement flag 65d is not set to "1" in response to the three consecutive wins for normal power release.

Next, the normal map change processing (step S408) in the normal map normal power control processing (Figure 20) will be described. In the normal map change processing, first, by referring to the zero flag, it is determined whether it is time to end the display in the normal map display unit 38a. If it is not time to end the change display, the image to be displayed in the normal map display unit 38a is updated to the next image in the order, provided that it is time to update the display contents of the normal map display unit 38a. On the other hand, if it is time to end the change display in the normal map display unit 38a, an image stop processing is executed to display the latest final stop image in the normal map display unit 38a. In the image stop processing, the information on the final stop time is set in the normal map normal power timer counter. After executing the image stop processing, the normal map normal power counter is updated from "1" to "2".

Next, the normal map determination process (step S409) in the normal map normal power control process (Figure 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 24. In the normal map determination process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the final stop time set in the normal map normal power timer counter in the normal map change process has elapsed. Specifically, this determination process determines whether or not the zero flag is set to "1".

If the final stop time has not elapsed (step S801: NO), the process for determining the normal map ends. If the final stop time has elapsed (step S801: YES), step S802 determines whether the result of the normal power release lottery that triggered this variable display was a normal power release win. If the result is a normal power release win (step S802: YES), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, the normal power release counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "5", and in step S804, the normal power winning counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10". The normal power release counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of times the normal power device 34a is to be opened in the current opening and closing operation of the normal power device 34a, and the normal power winning counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to determine whether the upper limit number of winnings have occurred in the second operating port 34 during the current opening and closing operation of the normal power device 34a. After that, in step S805, the support winning counter is cleared to "0", and in step S806, the numerical information of the open duration (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the normal power timer counter.

In the next step S807, the numerical information of the normal map/normal electricity counter is updated from "2" to "3" by adding "1" to the normal map/normal electricity counter, and the normal map change start process is terminated.

In addition, in step S802, if the result of the regular power release lottery that triggered this change display is not a regular power release win, the numerical information of the regular power counter is cleared to "0" in step S808, and then the regular power confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the normal power open process (step S410) in the normal power control process (FIG. 20) will be described. In the normal power open process, first, it is determined whether it is the timing to close the normal power role 34a, and if it is not the timing to close, the open state of the normal power role 34a is maintained. On the other hand, if it is the timing to close the normal power role 34a, a process is executed to close the normal power role 34a. In this case, the value of the normal power open counter is updated to subtract "1", and if the value of the normal power open counter is "0", the numerical information of the normal power counter is cleared to "0" and the opening and closing operation of the normal power role 34a is terminated. In addition, if the support end flag is set to "1", it means that the number of winnings into the second operating port 34 has already reached the upper limit number. In this case, the normal power open counter and the support end flag are cleared to "0", and the numerical information of the normal power counter is cleared to "0", and the opening and closing operation of the normal power role 34a is terminated. In addition, if the numerical information of the normal power feature opening counter is "1" or more and the support end counter is not set to "1", the information of the closing time of the normal power feature 34a is set in the normal power timer counter and the normal power counter is updated from "3" to "4".

When the opening and closing operation of the normal power device 34a reaches the reference number of times, or when the number of winning entries into the second operating port 34 that occurred during the current support execution period reaches the upper limit, the current support execution period ends.

Next, the normal power closed process (step S411) in the normal power control process (Figure 20) will be described. In the normal power closed process, the normal power feature 34a is maintained in a closed state, and when the closed time has elapsed, a process is executed to open the normal power feature 34a again. Specifically, information on the high frequency open duration is set in the normal power timer counter, and the normal power counter is updated from "4" to "3".

Next, the configuration for determining whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, first through gate 35, and second through gate 39 based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a in the main CPU 63 will be described. Figure 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration for inputting the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as a 9-bit parallel interface so that it can handle nine types of signals simultaneously. An area in which information "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, this area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 8th bit D8. Although more than 10 types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the group of signals to be input to the input port 63a is switched through switching control by the driver IC in order to limit the number of signals that can be input simultaneously to nine types.

In the ball entry detection process (step S211) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 18), the group of signals to be input to input port 63a is set to the group of signals from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a. In a situation where such settings have been made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the 1st bit D1 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the 2nd bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the 3rd bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a, the 4th bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, the 5th bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, the 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the 8th bit D8 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second gate detection sensor 50a.

When the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a do not detect the passage of the game ball B1, they output a LOW level signal indicating that they are not being detected as a detection signal, and when they detect the passage of the game ball B1, they output a HI level signal indicating that they are being detected as a detection signal. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, it stores "1" information in the corresponding bit. In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a do not detect the passage of the game ball B1, they store "0" information corresponding to the information indicating that they are not being detected in the corresponding bit, and when they detect the passage of the game ball B1, they store "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that they are being detected in the corresponding bit.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 18).

When it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S901: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S902), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S903). The first output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. The 10-ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls B1 should be executed. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 18), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S904: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S905), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S906). The second output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S907: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S908), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S909). The third output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S910: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S911), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S912), and the value of the 15-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S913). The special electric winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball B1 has entered the special electric winning device 32 during round play in the open/close execution mode. In the special chart special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), by confirming that the special electric winning flag is set to "1", it is determined that one game ball B1 has entered the special electric winning device 32, and the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is reduced by one. When the process of reducing the number of balls that can enter by one is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. The 15-ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 the number of times that the payout of 15 game balls B1 should be executed. If the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 18), and the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 15 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls B1 are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S914: YES). In this case, the first actuation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S915), the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S916), and the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S917). The first actuation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball B1 has entered the first actuation port 33. In the special chart special power control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", a process for newly storing the reserved information is executed on the condition that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number of 4. In the special power control process (step S215), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". The fifth output flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. The one prize ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 the number of times that one game ball B1 should be paid out. If the value of the 1 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 1 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 18), and the value of the 1 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 1 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 1 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball B1 is paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S918: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S919), the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S920), and the value of the one winning ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S921). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball B1 has entered the second operation port 34. In the special chart special power control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), by confirming that the second activation winning flag is set to "1", a process is executed to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit of four. In the special power control process (step S215), it is confirmed that the second activation winning flag is set to "1", and when a process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second activation winning flag is cleared to "0". The sixth output flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second activation port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S922: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S923). The seventh output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a (step S924: YES). In this case, the first gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S925). The first gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. In the normal map normal power control process (step S216) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), as already explained in FIG. 21, by confirming that the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the process of storing the current numerical information of the normal power role release counter C4 as the normal map side reserved information in the normal power reserved storage area 65c is executed, provided that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the normal power reserved storage area 65c is less than the upper limit number of 4. In the normal map/normal power control process (step S216), it is confirmed that the first gate winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the first gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

When it is confirmed that the eighth bit D8 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second gate detection sensor 50a (step S926: YES). In this case, the second gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S927). The second gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39. In the normal map normal power control process (step S216) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), as already explained in FIG. 21, by confirming that the second gate winning flag is set to "1", the process of storing the current numerical information of the normal power role release counter C4 as the normal map side reserved information in the normal power reserved storage area 65c is executed, provided that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the normal power reserved storage area 65c is less than the upper limit number of four. In the normal map normal power control process (step S216), it is confirmed that the second gate winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the second gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

As already explained, the timer interrupt process (Figure 18) is started at a 4 msec cycle, so when one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a starts detecting one game ball B1, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball B1 has been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a while the ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a continues to detect that one game ball B1. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the dispensing control device 77. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the dispensing control device 77 and the various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device 77, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 27.

The payout control device 77 is equipped with an MPU 91. In addition to a payout side CPU 92, which is a calculation processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit, the MPU 91 also includes a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile memory means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is randomly accessible, and when compared with the payout side ROM 93 for the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires less time to read. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of two-way communication with the main CPU 63. By receiving a prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls B1 corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game balls B1 can be paid out normally, and when it is determined that the game balls B1 cannot be paid out normally, it stops the payout device 76 even if the payout side RAM 94 stores information on the number of prize balls not paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout limit command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the game balls B1 cannot be paid out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout limit command, it transmits a notification command to the sound and light emission control device 81 so that a notification indicating that the game balls B1 cannot be paid out normally is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emission unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. The states in which it is not possible to normally dispense game balls B1 include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls B1, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 has not been refilled with game balls B1, an abnormal dispense state in which the dispenser 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is open from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball B1 passageway leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and determines that the full tank state has been released when the state in which the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released.

A no-ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball B1 passageway leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that a no-ball state exists when the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect the game ball B1, and determines that the no-ball state has been released when the state in which the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect the game ball B1 is released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that one game ball B1 has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the payout detection sensor detects the game ball B1. The payout side CPU 92 also determines that an abnormal payout state exists when the payout detection sensor continues to not detect the game ball B1 even though the payout device 76 is being driven and controlled so that the game ball B1 is paid out, and determines that the abnormal payout state has been released when the state in which the payout detection sensor continues to not detect the game ball B1 is released.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front part of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and when the front door frame 14 is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92. When the dispensing side CPU 92 receives a closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, it determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, it determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a front door close command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when it receives a front door open command, and determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when it receives a front door close command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a main body close command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when it receives a main body open command, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a main body close command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 28. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec).

First, the full tank process is executed (step S1001). In the full tank process, as already explained, it is determined whether the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls B1 and a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the full tank state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls B1 and a command is sent to the main CPU 63 indicating that the full tank state has been released.

After that, the no-ball process is executed (step S1002). In the no-ball process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the no-ball state is present based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and if the no-ball state is present, a process is executed to stop the payout of the game ball B1, and a command indicating the no-ball state is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the no-ball state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of the game ball B1, and a command indicating that the no-ball state has been released is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S1003). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not a payout abnormality state exists based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if a payout abnormality state exists, a process is executed to stop the payout of the game ball B1, and a command indicating that a payout abnormality state exists is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the payout abnormality state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of the game ball B1, and a command indicating that the payout abnormality state has been released is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a front door open monitoring process is executed (step S1004). In the front door open monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open or not based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is open, a process is executed to stop the payout of the game ball B1 and a front door open command is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of the game ball B1 and a front door close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, the main body open monitoring process is executed (step S1005). As already explained, the main body open monitoring process determines whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open or not based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is open, a process is executed to stop the payout of the gaming balls B1 and a main body open command is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of the gaming balls B1 and a main body close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a command read process is executed (step S1006). In the command read process, a process of reading the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S1007), a payout control process is executed for controlling the execution of the payout of the game ball B1 by the payout device 76 (step S1008). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and when the payout detection sensor detects one game ball B1, the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step S1009).

Next, we will explain the configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC installed in the gaming hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the payout CPU 92. In this way, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97, so that the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 can externally output information to the hall computer HC, as shown in FIG. 27.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. Regarding the configuration of this electrical connection in detail, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a midpoint of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 that branches from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for front door opening on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is not only input to the dispensing side CPU 92, but also input to the external terminal for front door opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through the control of the dispensing side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in detail, the signal relay board 98 has a branch path SL4 that branches off from the signal path SL3 that runs from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92, but also input to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, we will explain the contents of the information that is externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC. First, we will explain the contents of the information that is externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC.

In the external information setting process (step S220) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, information indicating that one game round has ended, information indicating that a predetermined number (e.g., 100 balls) of game balls B1 have been discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the second operating port 34.

In the external information setting process (step S1009) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28), the payout CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls B1 have been paid out.

The hall computer HC can grasp the manner in which the game balls B1 are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 via the external terminal board 97. For example,
・The ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls B1 paid out until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. ・The ball payout rate in a normal game state other than the open/close execution mode and the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, this ball payout rate will be referred to as "B")
・The ball output rate in the open/close execution mode ・The ball output rate in the high frequency support mode ・The number of times the game is executed until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S")
B-S x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34"
The number of game balls B1 that enter the first operating port 33 until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls B1 that enter the second operating port 34 until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B-(S1 x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33" + S2 x "number of winning balls for winning the second actuation port 34")
The above is calculated. This allows the hall computer HC to manage the ball entry patterns of the game balls B1 in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls refers to the number of game balls B1 paid out when one game ball B1 enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning status of gaming ball B1>
Next, a description will be given of a configuration for managing the winning status of the gaming ball B1 using the management IC 66. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and a read terminal 102.

The I/F 101 is an interface for sending and receiving signals between the MPU 62 and devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as described above based on the input detection results and command contents. In addition, when a signal is output to a device such as the special power drive unit 32b as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the signal output is executed through the output port of the I/F 101, and when a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the sound and light emission control device 81 as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the command output is executed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting the MPU 62 to a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, and is provided so that the terminal portion for connection is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the reading device from being electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in an unauthorized manner. Note that this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which an opening is formed in the board box 60a to expose the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60, and the reading device can be electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 without having to destroy the board box 60a.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected to each other via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to enable two-way communication.

The management side I/F 111 is an interface for receiving various signals from the main CPU 63 via a group of signal paths 118 for one-way communication built into the MPU 62, and for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via a group of signal paths 119 for one-way communication built into the MPU 62. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to an input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from an output port of the management side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a group of signal paths 120 for two-way communication built into the MPU 62.

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management CPU 112. The management RAM 114 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management RAM 114 is randomly accessible, and when compared with the same data capacity, it takes less time to read than the management ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control programs stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and is capable of outputting the measured date and time information in response to instructions from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is equipped with a backup power supply, making it possible to measure date and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is used to store information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p. The contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described in detail later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of the game ball B1 received from the main CPU 63 via the management I/F 111. The contents of the history memory 117 will be described in detail later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a number of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p are provided. Each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p can receive one type of signal via signal paths 118a-118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p stores "0" as the first data when the input signal is at a LOW level, and stores "1" as the second data when the input signal is at a HI level. Note that the relationship between LOW and HI and the first and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when the first winning hole detection sensor 42a does not detect a new game ball B1, and outputs a HI level first signal for a specific period of time when the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one game ball B1. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level first signal has been input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when the second winning hole detection sensor 43a does not detect a new game ball B1, and outputs a HI level second signal for a specific period of time when one game ball B1 is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level second signal has been input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when the third winning hole detection sensor 44a does not detect a new game ball B1, and outputs a HI level third signal for a specific period of time when the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one game ball B1. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level third signal has been input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the master CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when the special electric detection sensor 45a does not detect a new game ball B1, and outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period of time when the special electric detection sensor 45a detects one game ball B1. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fourth signal has been input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the master CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when the first actuation port detection sensor 46a does not detect a new game ball B1, and outputs a HI level fifth signal for a specific period of time when the first actuation port detection sensor 46a detects one game ball B1. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fifth signal has been input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the master CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when the second actuation port detection sensor 47a does not detect a new game ball B1, and outputs a HI level sixth signal for a specific period of time when the second actuation port detection sensor 47a detects one game ball B1. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level sixth signal has been input to the sixth buffer 122f.

The seventh buffer 122g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when the outlet detection sensor 48a does not detect a new game ball B1, and outputs a HI level seventh signal for a specific period of time when the outlet detection sensor 48a detects one game ball B1. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level seventh signal has been input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is not in progress, and continuously outputs a HI level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is in progress.

The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW-level ninth signal when the high-frequency support mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs a HI-level ninth signal when the high-frequency support mode is in effect.

The tenth buffer 122j receives a tenth signal corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open or not. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs a HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open.

An output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output the history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period of time when there is a need to output the history information. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n and the fifteenth buffer 122o are capable of receiving signals from the main CPU 63, but are blank in this pachinko machine 10 and do not receive normal signals. In this way, by providing a greater number of buffers 122a-122p as input ports 121 of the management I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 than the number of types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a-118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p, respectively, but this is not limited thereto, and the signal paths 118k-118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k-122o to be blanked.

It was determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management I/F 111, and the management CPU 112 can determine that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o was not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The type of these signals is identified by the management CPU 112 when the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 start control in response to the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, and the details will be described later. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals when operating power is being supplied, the information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referenced.

Figure 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The first correspondence area 123a stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. The first correspondence area 123a also stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as well as information on the number of game balls B1 (10) that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning port 31. The second correspondence area 123b stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. The second correspondence area 123b also stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as well as information on the number of game balls B1 (10) that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning port 31. The third correspondence area 123c stores information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition to the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is the third correspondence area 123c, information on the number of game balls B1 (10) that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 is also stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the signal is the special electric winning device 32 as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fourth correspondence area 123d also stores information indicating that the signal is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls B1 (15) that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the special electric winning device 32. The fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. The fifth correspondence area 123e also stores information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33, as well as information on the number of game balls B1 (1) that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is the one that is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth correspondence area 123f also stores information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is the one that is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the number of game balls B1 (one) that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the second actuation port 34. The seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that the outlet 24a is the one that is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the mode is the open/close execution mode, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. The ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the mode is the high frequency support mode, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. The tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the type of signal to be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63, making it possible for the management IC 66 to be used in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, information for recognizing the type of signal is output in advance, and information for identifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 each time a signal is output, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

In addition, the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is output when the supply of operating power begins. This allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o when play begins on this pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the information that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is set during the design stage of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to omit the process for identifying the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p for output instruction signals that are reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the process for identifying the type of such signal.

Next, we will explain the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. Figure 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, multiple pieces of pointer information are set in consecutive numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and 1 byte of data capacity is assigned as an area for storing RTC information, and 1 byte of data capacity is assigned as an area for storing correspondence information. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j in this pachinko machine 10), the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are first stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the buffer 122a-122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 that corresponds to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125 is stored in the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, as already explained, because signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry section corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning hole 31, so the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to these first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all store information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31. In addition, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33, the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the outlet 24a. If the buffer 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is any of the first to seventh buffers 122a-122g, information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to that buffer 122a-122g is read from any of the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a-123g, and the read information on the type of ball entry part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

Meanwhile, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating the front door frame 14.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is not in effect, and continues to output the HI level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is in effect. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the open/close execution mode has started when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, and that the open/close execution mode has ended when the 8th signal changes from HI to LOW. In addition, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, or when the HI to LOW signal changes, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In addition, when the eighth signal changes from a high level to a low level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continues to output the ninth signal at a LOW level when the high-frequency support mode is not in effect, and continues to output the ninth signal at a HI level when the high-frequency support mode is in effect. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from a LOW level to a HI level, and that the high-frequency support mode has ended when the ninth signal changes from a HI level to a LOW level. In either case of the ninth signal changing from a LOW level to a HI level, or the HI level to a LOW level, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the ninth signal changes from a LOW level to a HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In addition, when the ninth signal changes from a high level to a low level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the front door frame 14 is open when the tenth signal changes from LOW to HI, and that the front door frame 14 is closed when the tenth signal changes from HI to LOW. In either case, when the tenth signal changes from LOW to HI, or from HI to LOW, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the tenth signal changes from LOW to HI, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In addition, when the 10th signal changes from HI to LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening completion information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

The history information storage area 125 is provided for a sufficient number of times to enable storage of all history information generated during ten consecutive business days during which the firing of game balls B1 in this pachinko machine 10 continues from opening to closing. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This makes it possible to store and hold all history information in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to identify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10, information is set in the pointer area 126 specifying pointer information of "0" as the writing target. Then, every time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the last pointer information is the writing target and history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last pointer information, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that pointer information of "0" is the writing target. As a result, when a storage trigger occurs that exceeds the number of history information that can be stored, the history information is overwritten with new history information in order starting from the history information storage area 125 in which the oldest history information is stored.

In addition, when the reading device reads history information from the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0"s, and the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been read from becoming the read target again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning status of the game ball B1 using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition processing is executed in step S110 in the main processing (Figure 17).

First, the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "15" (step S1101). The recognition output counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of times information output is required to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a-122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 corresponds to. As already explained, the 15 buffers 1 to 15 122a-122o are the targets for signal type recognition, so the recognition output counter is set to "15".

Then, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S1102). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. In other words, the first to eighth signals (i.e., the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information are used to output a command to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. This makes it possible to reduce the number of signal paths and simplify the configuration compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 specifies that a process should be started to store information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116.

Then, a type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S1103). In this case, the first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and then the n+1th buffer is set as the signal type after the nth buffer, and so the signal type recognition setting corresponding to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", a type identification command indicating that it is the general winning port 31 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "12", a type identification command indicating that it is the special winning device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "11", a type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "10", a type identification command indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "9", a type identification command indicating that it is the outlet 24a is read out; if the recognition output counter is "8", a type identification command indicating that it is in the open/close execution mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "7", a type identification command indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "6", a type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read out; and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", a type identification command indicating that it is blank is read out.

Then, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S1104). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits, like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer that is the current setting target among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1105), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is "0" (step S1106). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S1106: NO), processing is executed to output a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement (steps S1103 and S1104).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1106: YES), output processing of the recognition end command is executed (step S1107). The recognition end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the recognition end command output processing, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the recognition end command output is started in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the recognition end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the recognition end command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the recognition end command, the management side CPU 112 determines that the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed.

Next, the management process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 34. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is configured to be faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the combination of processes from step S1206 onwards in the management process is executed 16 or more times from the start of one timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) in the main CPU 63 until the start of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When an identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). The setting target counter is a counter that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of buffer 122a to 122o for which the signal type is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and thereafter the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer are set as the signal type.

After that, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), a correspondence setting process is executed (step S1204). In the correspondence setting process, information on the signal type set in the currently received type identification command is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Then, the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1203, or if the processing of step S1205 is executed, it is judged whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If an identification end command has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 is executed again on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES).

If an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), the processes of steps S1207 and S1208 are repeatedly executed. In step S1207, details will be described later, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117. In step S1208, details will be described later, an external output process is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102.

Figure 35 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Figure 35(a) shows the period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (i.e., the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), Figure 35(b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, Figure 35(c) shows the execution period of the identification state during which processing is executed to identify the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o, and Figure 35(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1204) is executed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 35(a). Also, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). Then, at the timing of t2, when the output of the identification start command is continuing, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). The management CPU 112 identifies that a command has been sent from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 34). After that, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

After that, at the timing of t4, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 35(a). Also, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). After that, at the timing of t5, when the output of the type identification command is continuing, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). The control side CPU 112 identifies that a command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the control side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 35(d) at the timing of t5. In this correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning port 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

After that, from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the master CPU 63, similar to the process from t4 to t6. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from t16 to t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 35(a). Also, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). After that, at the timing of t20, when the output of the identification end command is continuing, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that a command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 35(c). After that, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 35(a).

As described above, the configuration allows the management CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output using the 9th signal, so that the management CPU 112 can clearly recognize that a command is being output even in a configuration in which the command is output using the 1st to 8th signals (i.e., the 1st to 8th signal paths) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 on the timing to store history information.

Next, the process configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S221 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 18).

First, the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10" (step S1301). The managed object counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether there are any managed objects that have not been specified as whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process, and to determine whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which managed object. In one management output process, the managed objects for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, whether the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, whether the high frequency support mode is being executed, and whether the front door frame 14 is being opened or closed, a total of 10 objects. Therefore, the managed object counter is initially set to "10".

Then, it is determined whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current value of the managed object counter is at HI level (step S1302). If it is not at HI level (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more, thereby identifying which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the managed object corresponding to the value of the managed object counter (step S1303).

If the judgment in step S1303 is affirmative, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1304). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning port detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning port detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "8" and corresponds to the third winning port detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", If the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, the fifth output flag is determined to be set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, the sixth output flag is determined to be set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, the seventh output flag is determined to be set to "1". As already explained, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (Figure 26).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1304: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level (step S1305). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1306).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1303, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a HI level (step S1307). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether a transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred; if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether a transition to the high frequency support mode has occurred; and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has been opened. If a positive judgment is made in step S1307, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to a HI level (step S1308).

If a positive judgment is made in step S1302, it is judged whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a LOW level (step S1309). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is 4 or more and the current managed object is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, it is judged whether a HI output duration (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals was switched from a LOW level to a HI level. This HI output duration is set in the management side CPU 112 to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S1007) of the management process (Figure 34), and is a period during which the management side CPU 112 can reliably identify the output state of the signal that has switched from a LOW level to a HI level. In addition, if the value of the managed counter is "3" and the current managed object is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended; if the value of the managed counter is "2" and the current managed object is in the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended; and if the value of the managed counter is "1" and the current managed object is the front door frame 14, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a LOW level has occurred (step S1309: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to a LOW level (step S1310).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1304, if the processing of step S1306 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S1307, if the processing of step S1308 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S1309, or if the processing of step S1310 is executed, the value of the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1311). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter after the decrement is "0" (step S1312). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or greater (step S1312: NO), the processing from step S1302 onwards is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37. The history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1401). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in which information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S1401 the check target counter is set to "10".

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has changed from "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S1402). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the targets for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If the determination in step S1402 is affirmative, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1403). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1404). In the write process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S1403 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be confirmed, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, if the correspondence information is any of information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. If the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading out the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading out the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading out the correspondence information.

By executing the writing process as described above, when the value of the counter to be checked is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the combination of the RTC information and the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, when the value of the counter to be checked is any of the opening and closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the combination of the RTC information, the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is any of the opening and closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1405). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after the increment of one is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as the new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1402, or if the processing of step S1405 is executed, it is judged whether or not the correspondence information for checking whether the signal output has been switched to a LOW level is stored in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked (step S1406). Specifically, if the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j stores any of information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, so a positive judgment is made in step S1406.

If the determination in step S1406 is affirmative, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is checked to see if it has changed from "1" to "0", thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S1407). If the determination in step S1407 is affirmative, the RTC information is read as in step S1403 (step S1408), and a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1409). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S1408 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the current counter value to be checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this manner, when the value of the counter to be checked is either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, a combination of the RTC information, the correspondence information indicating either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S1405 (step S1410).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1406, if a negative judgment is made in step S1407, or if the processing of step S1410 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1411). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S1412). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S1412: NO), the processing of step S1402 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38(a) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, FIG. 38(b) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h, FIG. 38(c) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, FIG. 38(d) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and FIG. 38(e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

At time t1, the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH as shown in FIG. 38(a). Therefore, at time t1, history information is written to the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 38(e). After that, at time t2, the signal that was switched to HIGH at time t1 is switched to LOW as shown in FIG. 38(a). However, since the signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching to LOW is not a target for storing history information, writing of history information is not executed at time t2 as shown in FIG. 38(e).

After that, at times t3, t5, t6, t9, t10, t13, and t14, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH as shown in FIG. 38(a). Therefore, at each of these times, history information is written as shown in FIG. 38(e).

As shown in FIG. 38(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from t4 to t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the occurrence or non-occurrence of the open/close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), history information is written at t4, when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HI level, and at t7, when the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at t4 includes start information, and the history information written at t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to ascertain the execution period of the open/close execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, the history information is written in chronological order to the history memory 117. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening and closing execution mode by comparing the RTC information.

As shown in FIG. 38(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at HI level from t8 to t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the occurrence or nonoccurrence of the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), history information is written at t8, when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to HI level, and at t11, when the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at t8 includes start information, and the history information written at t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to ascertain the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, the history information is written in chronological order to the history memory 117. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the high-frequency support mode. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the high-frequency support mode by comparing the RTC information.

As shown in FIG. 38(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from t12 to t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether the front door frame 14 is open or not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), history information is written at t12, when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HI level, and at t15, when the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at t12 includes start information, and the history information written at t15 includes end information. This makes it possible to know the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, the history information is written in chronological order to the history memory 117. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 was recorded while the front door frame 14 was open. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 was recorded while the front door frame 14 was open by comparing the RTC information.

Next, a process configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 17).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S1501). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and if the connection signal has been received through the reading terminal 102, a positive determination is made in step S1501.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1501, the data output process is terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. In order to output the history information externally, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back of the back pack unit 15, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15 in order to perform these stopping and starting operations. Under these circumstances, by configuring it so that the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in order to output the history information externally, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the gaming hall to read the history information.

If the positive determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether a signal for confirming control information has been received from the reading terminal 102, and whether the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 corresponds to confirmation of the control information (programs and data) of the main ROM 64 (step S1502). The reading device is configured to be able to confirm both the control information and the history information, and when confirmation of the control information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and when confirmation of the history information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the reading device. Note that this is not limited to this, and a reading device for confirming control information and a reading device for confirming history may be configured separately. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and when a reading device for confirming history is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the reading device.

If a positive determination is made in step S1502, an output process for confirming the control information is executed (step S1503). In this output process, the program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information in a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102, and to confirm whether the control information is authentic or normal.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1502, an output instruction signal is sent to the management CPU 112 (step S1504). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. This HIGH level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HIGH level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p. As a result of the output state of the output instruction signal being switched to a HIGH level, a process is executed in the management CPU 112 to output history information. This process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S1503 or step S1504 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is still ongoing (step S1505). If it is still ongoing (step S1505: YES), the process waits in step S1505. This makes it possible to prevent a process set in the execution order after the data output process from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S1505: NO), the data output process is terminated.

Next, the external output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 40. The external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S1601: YES), the process for outputting the history information from step S1602 onwards is executed. Specifically, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the outgoing port 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is counted to calculate the number of balls that enter the outgoing port 24a (step S1602). In addition, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the general winning port 31 is counted in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 to calculate the number of balls that enter the general winning port 31 (step S1603). In addition, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the special winning device 32 is counted in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 to calculate the number of balls that enter the special winning device 32 (step S1604). In addition, the number of balls that have entered the first actuation port 33 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 (step S1605). In addition, the number of balls that have entered the second actuation port 34 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 (step S1606).

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored, the number of balls that entered each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 that occurred when the front door frame 14 was in an open state is calculated (step S1607). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14, the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the results of steps S1602 to S1607 (step S1608). Specifically, the number of balls that entered the gate while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1607, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the gate calculated in steps S1602 to S1606. The following parameters are then calculated using the number of balls that entered the gate after the subtraction. In addition, the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1607 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1602 is designated as the number of balls entering the port 24a, the difference between the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1607 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1602 is designated as the number of balls entering the port 24a, the difference between the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1602 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1607 is designated as the number of balls entering the port 24a, the difference between the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1602 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1602 ....
First parameter: total number of game balls B1 dispensed (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D1")
Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning port 31 K2/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Third parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the special electric winning device 32 K3/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Fourth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 K4/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2")
Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 (K5) to the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + D3 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of paid out game balls B1 (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio. Then, the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are used to calculate the total time required for all the history information that was the subject of the current calculation to be extracted (step S1609). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1610). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is output to the reading terminal 102 in sequence. Moreover, the various parameters calculated in step S1608 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1609 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the first output process is read.

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored, the number of balls entering each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 that occurred in the open/close execution mode is calculated (step S1611). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, all the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored is treated as being in the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, during the period in which the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1611 is in effect, the number of balls that enter each of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 while the front door frame 14 is in the open state is calculated (step S1612). The method for calculating the number of balls that enter is the same as in step S1607, except that the method is based on the period in which the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1611 is in effect.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1611 and S1612 (step S1613). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 while it was open, calculated in step S1612, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1611. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered the out port 24a calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls entered the out port 24a calculated in step S1612 is set as the number of balls entered K11, the difference between the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1612 is set as the number of balls entered K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls entered K13 is set as the number of balls entered K14. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1612 is designated as the number of entering balls K13, the difference between the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1612 is designated as the number of entering balls K14, and the difference between the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1612 is designated as the number of entering balls K15.
11th parameter: total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
・12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning port 31 K12/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・13th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the special winning device 32 K13/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・14th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 K14/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
15th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 (K15) to the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33" + D13 x "number of winning balls for winning the second actuation port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 × “number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32” + K15 × “number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 × “number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31” + K13 × “number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33” + K15 × “number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34”) 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of paid out game balls B1 (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio. Then, the second output process is executed (step S1614). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1613 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information that is to be output in the second output process.

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, the number of balls entering each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 that occurred in the high-frequency support mode situation is calculated (step S1615). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode, the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored is treated as being in the high-frequency support mode.

Then, during the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1615, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1616). The method of calculating these numbers of balls is the same as in step S1607, except that it is based on the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1615.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1615 and S1616 (step S1617). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 while it was open, calculated in step S1616, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1615. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered the out port 24a calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entered the out port 24a calculated in step S1616 is set as the number of balls entered K21, the difference between the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1616 is set as the number of balls entered K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entered K23 is set as the number of balls entered K24. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1616 is designated as the number of entering balls K23, the difference in the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1616 relative to the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1615 is designated as the number of entering balls K24, and the difference in the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1616 relative to the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1615 is designated as the number of entering balls K25.
21st parameter: total number of game balls B1 paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K24 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K25 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning port 31 K22 / Total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio 23rd parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the special winning device 32 K23 / Total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio 24th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 K24 / Total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K25 to the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33" + D23 x "number of winning balls for winning the second actuation port 34")
Then, a third output process is executed (step S1618). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1617 are output in sequence to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information that is the output target in the third output process. Then, a clear process is executed (step S1619). In the clear process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In the normal power release lottery, the winning target period in which the normal power release is won is set to occur at 1 sec intervals. In addition, the opening random number used in the normal power release lottery is numerical information that is added with "1" at each update timing and cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value, and is numerical information whose initial value is updated every time it goes around once. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 180 that discharges the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at 1 sec intervals. For this reason, if the timing at which the first through gate 35 can win is shifted from the winning target period, the normal power release lottery will have a continuous non-winning period in which losing results are consecutive. In addition, if the timing at which the first through gate 35 can win overlaps with the winning target period, the normal power release lottery will have a continuous winning period in which the normal power release is consecutively won. The transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period is performed without prior notice to the player. In this way, by constantly making the player expect a continuous winning period that is not known when it will occur, it is possible to increase the interest of the game and perform innovative performances.

The opening initial value counter C5 for updating the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 is a loop counter in which the numerical information is updated by adding "1" each time an update timing occurs, and the numerical information is cleared to "0" when the numerical information reaches a maximum value. The random number initial value update process for updating the numerical information in the opening initial value counter C5 is executed within the remaining process of the main process, which is executed non-periodically, and is also executed within the timer interrupt process, which is executed periodically. Therefore, it is possible to avoid bias in the numerical information obtained from the opening initial value counter C5 in the periodic update of the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4. This makes it possible to generate a transition from a consecutive non-winning period to a consecutive winning period at a timing that is difficult for a player to guess and at an appropriate frequency in the low frequency support mode.

When a transition occurs from a consecutive non-winning period to a consecutive winning period, the initial value update of the normal power device opening counter C4 is postponed once during the consecutive winning period. As a result, the initial value update interval during the consecutive winning period is longer than the initial value update interval during the consecutive non-winning period. By lengthening the duration of the consecutive winning period without reducing the frequency with which the consecutive winning periods occur, the consecutive winning period can be made to be advantageous and attractive to the player. This can increase the player's expectations for the consecutive winning period, making the game more enjoyable.

The possibility of a normal power release winning occurring in the low-frequency support mode, which combines consecutive non-winning periods with consecutive winning periods, is lower than the possibility of a normal power release winning occurring in the high-frequency support mode. However, when a transition occurs from a consecutive non-winning period to a consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the possibility of a normal power release winning occurring is higher than the possibility of a normal power release winning occurring in the high-frequency support mode. By configuring the low-frequency support mode not to notify the player of the timing of the transition from a consecutive non-winning period to a consecutive winning period, the possibility of a normal power release winning occurring in the low-frequency support mode, which combines consecutive non-winning periods with consecutive winning periods, remains lower than the possibility of a normal power release winning occurring in the high-frequency support mode, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for a normal power release winning in the low-frequency support mode, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The rotating body 183 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is configured to generate multiple timings during one rotation of the rotating body 183 at which the captured game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35. By reducing the angle through which the rotating body 183 must rotate before discharging the game ball B1, the state in which the rotating body 183 can capture the game ball B1 can be maintained for a long time. This increases the probability that the game ball B1 flowing downstream near the upstream of the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be captured by the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183. This prevents the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from being lost, and avoids the situation of missing the timing to win the normal power release during the consecutive winning period.

The recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 have a shape that widens toward the outer edge. In addition, only the fourth recess 183e has a size that is slightly smaller than the other recesses 183b to 183d. The distance from the discharge position in the adjustment mechanism 180 to the first through gate 35 is a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, the discharge start position and discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the recesses 183b to 183e may shift to the left and fall outside the first through gate 35. If all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 enter the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player will only pay attention to the intake of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 and not pay attention to the discharge. In response to this, by configuring the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to partly miss the first through gate 35, it is possible to attract the player's attention until the ball enters the first through gate 35, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

By setting the starting position for the game ball B1 to be discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to a position shifted to the right from directly below the center of the adjustment mechanism 180, the time from when the game ball B1 is taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180 to when it is discharged is shortened. By shortening the time required for the series of steps of taking in, transporting, and discharging the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player's attention shifting to something else in the middle of this series of steps.

The game ball B1 that is taken into one of the recesses 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 and transported from the top to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 comes into contact with the right discharge side 181g of the discharge protrusion 181e. Because the discharge protrusion 181e is fixed to the storage section 181, the game ball B1 that is taken into one of the recesses 183b-183e and transported cannot move to the left of the right discharge side 181g at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180. The game ball B1 is discharged downward from a certain discharge position. In this way, the game ball B1 that has failed to be discharged at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 and has not been discharged is not transported back to the top of the adjustment mechanism 180. As a result, the game ball B1 continues to fail to be discharged from the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, and the same game ball B1 continues to rotate inside the adjustment mechanism 180, so that the intake and discharge of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 is not interrupted.

The game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and entering the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and missing the first through gate 35, and the game ball B1 that is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 and enters the escape passage 172 can then enter either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Therefore, even if the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, there will be no shortage of game balls B1 heading toward the second operating port 34 when a period of consecutive wins occurs in the low-frequency support mode.

The peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of the blades 188-191 located at the top of the rotating body 183 are configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. Therefore, the game balls B1 that are not taken in around the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 are guided by the inclination of the peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of the blades 188-191 and move to the passage entrance 171 of the escape passage 172 provided behind the intake port 185. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls B1 that are not taken in from staying near the intake port 185 or disrupting the flow of game balls B1 upstream of the intake port 185, which would reduce the number of game balls B1 taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180. It is possible to prevent the frequency at which game balls B1 are taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180 from decreasing and the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 from waning.

The acrylic plate 172a fixed to the front of the escape passage 172 and the adjustment mechanism 180 located in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent. This allows the player to see the fate of the game ball B1 after it enters the passage entrance 171. This prevents the flow of the game ball B1 that the player can grasp from being interrupted midway.

At the passage exit 173 of the escape passage 172, an exit roof 174 is provided to prevent a game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173 forward of the surface of the game board 24 from colliding with a game ball B1 flowing down in front of the surface of the game board 24 at the exit of the escape passage 172. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball B1 that was about to be discharged forward from the escape passage 172 collides with the passage exit 173 and returns to the inside of the escape passage 172 again.

The front faces 188b-191b of the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 and the upright wall side end face 182 of the intake port 185 are each configured with an inclination to utilize the force of the rotor 183's rotation to cause the game ball B1 to enter the rear passage entrance 171 when the game ball B1 is pinched in the intermediate state. This makes it possible to prevent the rotor 183 from becoming unable to rotate when the game ball B1 is pinched. This reduces the possibility that a malfunction will occur during play, requiring play to be interrupted in order to resolve the malfunction.

In addition, at the intake port 185, the force applied from the front faces 188b-191b to the game ball B1 that is in contact with both the front faces 188b-191b and the upright wall side end face 182 has a downward component. This prevents the game ball B1 that is in contact with both the front faces 188b-191b and the upright wall side end face 182 from being ejected upward, and prevents the flow of the game ball B1 at the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 from being disturbed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 cannot be taken in and the periodic supply of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is hindered.

The storage section 181 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is formed with an ejection protrusion 181e for ejecting the game ball B1 that has been taken into the recesses 183b-183e. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 that has been transported downward as the rotor 183 rotates is not properly ejected, causing the same game ball B1 to continue spinning. By preventing a decrease in the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and the frequency with which the game ball B1 is ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180, the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 can be maintained.

In addition, by reliably discharging the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent a slowdown in the pace at which new game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 180. By preventing a decrease in the frequency at which game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 180, it is possible to avoid a situation in which players lose interest in the adjustment mechanism 180.

When the game ball B1 enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball B1 is paid out, so the player plays the game while hoping that the game ball B1 will enter any of these ball entry sections. In this configuration, when the game ball B1 enters any of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entry section), the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of game balls B1 entering each history target ball entry section in the pachinko machine 10, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to properly manage the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target ball entry section. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the history information within the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All ball entry points that eject game balls B1 from the game area PA are subject to the execution of the history information storage process and are also subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry for any history target ball entry point using the history information. It also makes it possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls B1 that enter each history target ball entry point to the number of game balls B1 that are ejected from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball B1 entered the history target entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. This makes it possible to use the history information to grasp in detail the entry history of the game ball B1 into the history target entry section.

The history memory 117 stores not only history information corresponding to the game ball B1 entering the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether the opening and closing execution mode is in effect, history information indicating whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the entry patterns of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry section.

The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device, which is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and use the read history information to analyze the manner in which the game ball B1 enters the history target entry portion.

The MPU 62 is provided with a read terminal 102, and a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102 can read the program from the main ROM 64. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the read terminal 102 for externally outputting the program is used to externally output the history information stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

It is determined whether the information to be output from the read terminal 102 is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the determination result is output to the outside through the read terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is output to the outside using the read terminal 102 for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be output to the outside is a program or history information, and outputs the determined information to the outside. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the read terminal 102 is used for both purposes, it is possible to read out only the necessary information.

Based on information received from a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is determined whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting the information to be output externally from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62, which has a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, has a management IC 66 and a read terminal 102. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal path to the read terminal 102 within the MPU 62. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal path to the read terminal 102.

A management CPU 112 is provided in addition to the main CPU 63, which executes processing to have the game ball B1 paid out based on the game ball B1 entering either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, and the management CPU 112 executes processing to have history information stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the entry state of the game ball B1 into each history target entry part while preventing an excessive increase in the processing load of the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a to each of the buffers 122a-122g of the input port 121 of the management IC 66, using the signal paths corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a. This allows the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to correspond to each of the buffers 122a-122g (i.e., each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to whether the system is in the open/close execution mode, information corresponding to whether the system is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open to each of the buffers 122h-122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. This allows the type of information corresponding to each of these situations to correspond to each of the buffers 122h-122j (i.e., each signal path), making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information each of the buffers 122a to 122j (i.e., each of the signal paths 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information to the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the management IC 66 to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry section in a situation where a game ball B1 may enter the history target ball entry section.

The correspondence information is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the history target entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the management IC 66 to identify the historical target goal location that corresponds to the information to be transmitted each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 regarding the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a to 48a.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 switches from LOW level to HIGH level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the read terminal 102. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a-122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that need to be sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to accommodate an increase or decrease in the number of types of information depending on the model of pachinko machine 10 without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a-122p. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is sent from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, the history information contains correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry part that corresponds to the history information. This makes it possible to use the read history information to identify the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target ball entry part.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (parameters 1 to 8, 11 to 18, and 21 to 26) corresponding to the entry state of the game ball B1 in the game area PA during a specified period are calculated. This makes it possible to output various parameters that are the results of calculations using the history information to the outside.

Various parameters are calculated with the historical information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is open excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in the normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is closed. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation in the opening and closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode are calculated. This makes it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to grasp the entry behavior of the game ball B1 according to each situation.

When various parameters have been calculated, a process for clearing the history memory 117 is executed, thereby initializing the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which history information that would normally be stored and held is erased by overwriting, as a result of the history information being stored in the history memory 117 to the extent that it exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117.

When various parameters are output to the read terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to refer to not only the various parameters but also the history information that is the basis for the calculation of the various parameters when reading out various parameters to analyze the ball entry manner of the game ball B1 in the game area PA.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which various parameters are calculated.

When the main CPU 63 determines that a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 transmits output instruction information, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66, and the various parameters resulting from the calculation are output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is determined in the process executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operating power is started, and when it is determined that the reading device is electrically connected, output instruction information is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where the process when the supply of operating power is started is being executed by the main CPU 63, etc., that is, in a situation before the normal process for progressing the game is started by the main CPU 63, the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results from being performed in a situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history target ball entry part, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the management IC 66.

In a configuration in which an external output corresponding to the entry of a game ball B1 into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 is made through the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number and frequency of game balls B1 entering the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 by using the information outputted externally through the external terminal board 97, while accurately grasping the number and frequency of game balls B1 entering the history target entry portion by using the history information stored in the history memory 117.

<Alternative to the First Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 is updated, and the driving mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 may be changed at a predetermined timing. If the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 is not updated, the winning target period always occurs in a 1 sec cycle. In contrast, for example, the adjustment drive unit 184 may be configured to have a first rotation mode in which the rotating body 183 is rotated at a first rotation speed, a second rotation mode in which the rotating body 183 is rotated at a second rotation speed, and a third rotation mode in which the rotating body 183 is rotated at a third rotation speed. Here, the first rotation speed is a rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 at a 0.8 sec cycle, and the second rotation speed is a rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 at a 1 sec cycle. Also, the third rotation speed is a rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 at a 1.2 sec cycle.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5 instead of the opening initial value counter C5 (Figure 13). When a winning entry into the first through gate 35 occurs in the low frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 stores the numerical information updated by the switching random number counter as normal power reserve information in one of the normal power reserve areas HA1 to HA4. The main CPU 63 executes a switching determination process to determine whether the numerical information acquired from the switching random number counter is the numerical information to be switched stored in the main ROM 64, thereby determining the timing to switch the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184.

The switching judgment process is executed when a winning entry occurs in the first through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode. By using this switching judgment process, the timing at which the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched can be made random. In the switching judgment process, the main CPU 63 sequentially switches the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 from the first rotation mode → second rotation mode → third rotation mode → first rotation mode each time a switching timing occurs.

The relationship between the timing at which the first through gate 35 can win and the target winning period changes each time the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched. For example, in the first rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 in a 0.8 sec cycle, if the winning timing of the 0.8 sec cycle does not overlap with the target winning period of the 1 sec cycle, the normal power release lottery will have consecutive losing results. Also, in the first rotation mode, if the winning timing of the 0.8 sec cycle overlaps with the target winning period of the 1 sec cycle, the normal power release will be won once in five times. Because the length of the cycle of the winning timing is different from the length of the target winning period, the normal power release will be won in a 4 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

In the second rotation mode in which the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 at 1-second intervals, if the winning timing of the 1-second interval does not overlap with the winning period of the 1-second interval, it becomes a continuous non-winning period as already described in the first embodiment above, and if the winning timing of the 1-second interval overlaps with the winning period of the 1-second interval, it becomes a continuous winning period as already described in the first embodiment above.

In the third rotation mode, in which the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 in a 1.2 sec cycle, if the winning timing of the 1.2 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, the normal power release lottery will result in consecutive losers. Also, in the third rotation mode, if the winning timing of the 1.2 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, the normal power release will be won once every five times. Because the length of the cycle of the winning timing is different from the length of the winning target period, the normal power release will be won at a cycle of 6 sec, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

The rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is visible from the outside, so the player can check the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 while playing and know when the rotation mode has changed. In a configuration in which the player is not notified of the timing when a consecutive winning period occurs, by making it possible to know the timing when the rotation mode changes, the player's anticipation of the consecutive winning period can be increased each time the rotation mode changes, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition to the consecutive winning periods in which regular power release winnings occur at 1-second intervals in each regular power release lottery, it is possible to generate periods where regular power release winnings occur at 5-time intervals and 4-second intervals, and periods where regular power release winnings occur at 5-time intervals and 6-second intervals. By increasing the variety of ways in which regular power release winnings occur, it is possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In the first embodiment described above, instead of updating the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4, a configuration may be used in which multiple types of winning determination value tables are prepared for the normal power opening lottery. For example, in addition to the low frequency winning determination value table T1 in which the winning target period of 24 msec starts at a 1 sec cycle, the main ROM 64 may be configured to pre-store a first winning determination value table in which the winning target period of 24 msec starts at a 0.8 sec cycle and a second winning determination value table in which the winning target period of 24 msec starts at a 1.2 sec cycle. In the first exchange table, the winning determination value is set to (200 x n-5) to (200 x n), and in the second exchange table, the winning determination value is set to (300 x n-5) to (300 x n). Here, the variable n in the first exchange table is a natural number between 1 and 327, and the variable n in the second exchange table is a natural number between 1 and 218.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) instead of the opening initial value counter C5. When a winning entry into the first through gate 35 occurs in the low frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 obtains the numerical information updated by the switching random number counter and executes the above-mentioned switching judgment process using the numerical information. The switching judgment process determines the timing for switching the winning judgment value table used in the normal power opening lottery.

By utilizing the switching judgment process, the timing of switching the winning judgment value table used in the regular power release lottery can be made random. In the switching judgment process, the main CPU 63 switches the winning judgment value table used in the regular power release lottery in the following order each time the switching timing occurs: low frequency winning judgment value table T1 → first winning judgment value table → second winning judgment value table → low frequency winning judgment value table T1.

The relationship between the timing at which a prize can be won at the first through gate 35 and the target winning period changes each time the winning determination value table used in the regular power release lottery is switched. For example, if the first winning determination value table is used in the regular power release lottery and the target winning period occurs in a 0.8 sec cycle, if the winning timing in the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the target winning period in the 0.8 sec cycle, the regular power release lottery will have consecutive losing results. Also, if the first winning determination value table is used and the winning timing in the 1 sec cycle overlaps with the target winning period in the 0.8 sec cycle, a regular power release win will occur once every five times. Because the length of the cycle of the winning timing is different from the length of the target winning period, a regular power release win occurs in a 4 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

When the low frequency winning judgment value table T1 is used for the regular power open lottery and the winning target period occurs in 1 second cycles, if the winning possible timing in the 1 second cycle does not overlap with the winning target period in the 1 second cycle, it becomes a consecutive non-winning period as already explained in the first embodiment above, and if the winning possible timing in the 1 second cycle overlaps with the winning target period in the 1 second cycle, it becomes a consecutive winning period as already explained in the first embodiment above.

When the second winning determination value table is used in the regular power release lottery and the winning target period occurs in a 1.2 sec cycle, if the winning possible timing in the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period in the 1.2 sec cycle, there will be consecutive losing results in the regular power release lottery. Also, when the second winning determination value table is used and the winning possible timing in the 1 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period in the 1.2 sec cycle, a regular power release win will occur once in five times. Because the length of the cycle of the winning possible timing differs from the length of the winning target period, a regular power release win will occur in a 6 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

In addition to the consecutive winning periods in which regular power release winnings occur at 1-second intervals in each regular power release lottery, it is possible to generate periods where regular power release winnings occur at 5-time intervals and 4-second intervals, and periods where regular power release winnings occur at 5-time intervals and 6-second intervals. By increasing the variety of ways in which regular power release winnings occur, it is possible to increase the excitement of the game.

Also, for example, the main ROM 64 may be configured to store in advance a third exchange table in which the winning judgment value is set to (250 x n-105) to (250 x n-100) and a fourth exchange table in which the winning judgment value is set to (250 x n-205) to (250 x n-200). Each time the numerical information in the normal power role opening counter C4 is updated once, the winning judgment value table used in the normal power opening lottery is switched in the order of low frequency winning judgment value table T1 → third exchange table → fourth exchange table. This makes it possible to shift the winning target period and create consecutive winning periods and consecutive non-winning periods without changing the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4.

- In the first embodiment described above, the frequency of the normal power open state per unit time during the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode may be configured to be lower than the frequency of the normal power open state per unit time in the high-frequency support mode. The frequency of consecutive winning periods occurring in the low-frequency support mode may be increased. For example, the total time of the open state may be reduced in a series of opening and closing operations of the normal power device 34a executed upon winning the normal power open during a consecutive winning period. Specifically, the frequency of the normal power open state per unit time during the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode can be reduced by using, alone or in combination, a method of reducing the number of openings in a series of opening and closing operations, a method of shortening the opening time of one opening, and a method of lengthening the closed state during a series of opening and closing operations.

In addition, when consecutive normal power release wins occur during a consecutive winning period, by using a method of lengthening the time between a series of opening and closing operations based on one normal power release win and a series of opening and closing operations based on the next normal power release win, the frequency of normal power release state per unit time during consecutive winning periods in low frequency support mode can be reduced.

In addition, for example, by increasing the frequency with which the initial value of the normal power reel opening counter C4 is updated, the frequency with which consecutive winning periods occur in the low frequency support mode can be increased. Specifically, by configuring the normal power reel opening counter C4 to update its initial value when it completes a half rotation, the frequency with which the winning target period occurs can be increased. By configuring the normal power reel opening counter C4 to not update its initial value three times when the winning target period occurs, the frequency with which the winning target period occurs can be increased without changing the length of the winning target period.

It is possible to reduce the frequency of normal power release per unit time during one consecutive winning period, while increasing the frequency with which consecutive winning periods occur in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, which combines consecutive non-winning periods with consecutive winning periods, it is possible to give the player the impression that consecutive winning periods can easily occur without changing the frequency with which normal power release occurs per unit time. This can increase the player's expectations that consecutive winning periods may occur in the low-frequency support mode.

- In the first embodiment described above, the relationship between the consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode is not limited to a relationship in which winning in the second operating port 34 is more likely to occur during the consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. During the consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode, consecutive wins in the normal power release lottery occur in the normal power release lottery, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, a win in the normal power release lottery occurs with a probability of approximately 3/5. In the high-frequency support mode, a single win in the normal power release triggers a series of opening and closing operations in which the normal power role 34a is open for 1 sec and then closed for 1 sec, which are repeated five times. In contrast, for example, during the consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode, the normal power device 34a is configured to open for 0.8 sec and close for 1 sec, and this series of opening and closing operations is repeated three times, thereby making it possible to increase the possibility of winning at the second operating port 34 in the high-frequency support mode compared to the possibility of winning at the second operating port 34 during the consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode. This makes it possible to avoid an extremely low expectation of winning at the second operating port 34 in the low-frequency support mode, while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

In addition, for example, during a consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the normal power device 34a is configured to open for 1 second and close for 1 second, and this series of opening and closing operations is repeated three times, so that the possibility of winning at the second operating port 34 in the high-frequency support mode can be made the same as the possibility of winning at the second operating port 34 in the low-frequency support mode. As a result, even during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the player can perform the launch operation of the game ball B1 while hoping that the situation will result in a winning at the second operating port 34 to the same extent as in the high-frequency support mode.

The parameters for adjusting the relationship between the possibility of winning the second operating port 34 during the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode and the possibility of winning the second operating port 34 in the high-frequency support mode are not limited to the opening time of the normal power device 34a and the number of times it is in the open state. For example, the parameters may be adjusted to include the probability of winning the normal power release in the normal power release lottery in the low-frequency support mode and the probability of winning the normal power release in the high-frequency support mode.

- In the first embodiment described above, the configuration may be such that there is only one support mode in which the normal power device 34a supports the entry of the game ball B1 into the second operating port 34. Specifically, the main ROM 64 stores only one winning judgment value table in which the winning judgment value that is the target of winning the normal power release in the normal power release lottery is set. In the winning judgment value table, (250 x n-9) to (250 x n) are set as the winning judgment value that is the target of winning the normal power release. Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 262. In this configuration, the probability of winning the normal power release in the normal power release lottery is approximately 1/25. The winning target period during which the winning judgment value that is the target of winning the normal power release continues occurs in 1 sec cycles and continues for 40 msec. In this configuration, two states are possible: a consecutive non-winning period in which the regular power release lottery does not result in a regular power release win, and a consecutive winning period in which regular power release lotteries result in consecutive regular power release wins. By limiting the period that is advantageous to the player in terms of support by the regular power device 34a to only the consecutive winning periods that occur without warning, the player's expectations for the consecutive winning periods are heightened and the player can be constantly aware of the consecutive winning periods. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

- In the first embodiment described above, the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 may also be configured to have a discharge guard section that surrounds the outer edge of the rotating body 183. Also, the adjustment mechanism 180 may be configured to have a discharge escape passage that allows the game ball B1 that is pinched when the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged to escape to the rear of the game board 24. Specifically, the discharge guard section formed along the outer edge of the rotating body 183 at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 has a discharge port through which the game ball B1 can pass. The game ball B1 that is taken into the recesses 183b to 183e at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard section at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180.

The game board 24 is provided with an escape passage for discharge behind the front surface of the game board 24, for allowing the game ball B1 that is pinched between the side of the discharge port and any of the blades 188-191 of the rotor 183 when it is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to escape. In addition, on the surface of the game board 24 around the discharge port, an escape passage entrance is formed as an opening that allows the game ball B1 that is pinched when it is discharged to enter the escape passage for discharge.

The discharge escape passage is connected to the escape passage 172. The left end face of the discharge port in the discharge guard section is inclined leftward toward the rear. Therefore, if the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the discharge guard section when it is discharged from the discharge port, the rotating body 183 rotates, pushing the sandwiched game ball B1 backward. The pushed-out game ball B1 passes through the discharge passage entrance and enters the discharge escape passage. The game ball B1 passes through the escape passage 172 and is discharged from the passage exit 173.

By using the discharge escape passage, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from being pinched between the rotor 183 and the discharge guard section and becoming immobile, even if a discharge guard section is provided at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180. By configuring the game ball B1 to be discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard section, the game ball B1 can be discharged in a direction toward the first through gate 35.

- In the first embodiment described above, a gap may be provided between the rotating body 183 and the standing walls 181c, 181d so that the game ball B1 cannot enter, and the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 may be visible through the gap. In this case, it is possible to use an opaque material for the rotating body 183 and the standing walls 181c, 181d. Increasing the freedom of material selection makes it possible to select materials that suit costs and design.

- In the first embodiment described above, the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 may be updated during the consecutive winning period in the same manner as during the consecutive non-winning period. Specifically, even if the normal power opening win occurs three times in a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the skip flag 65d is not set to "1". Therefore, at the first initial value update timing after the consecutive winning period, the initial value of the normal power role opening counter C4 is updated and the consecutive winning period ends. By setting the consecutive winning period to be shorter than the configuration in which the initial value update of the normal power role opening counter C4 is skipped during the consecutive winning period, the expectation of winning the second operating port 34 in the low-frequency support mode can be increased while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

- In the first embodiment described above, the update of the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 that is skipped when the skip flag 65d is set to "1" is not limited to one time. When the skip flag 65d is set to "1", the update of the initial value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 may be skipped multiple times. When a consecutive winning period occurs, a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery, and by increasing the possibility of moving to a jackpot state, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the consecutive winning period.

When the skip flag 65d is set to "1", the lottery results in a jackpot, and the update of the initial value of the normal power device opening counter C4 may be postponed until the jackpot state is transitioned to. When a normal power opening win occurs three times in succession in low-frequency support mode, the skip flag 65d is set to "1", and when the jackpot state is transitioned to, the skip flag 65d is cleared to "0". This allows the player to be confident of transitioning to the jackpot state when a consecutive winning period occurs. By making the consecutive winning period attractive to the player, it is possible to anticipate a transition to the jackpot state even in low-frequency support mode, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The total number of wins at the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 during the period in which the pass-by flag 65d is set to "1" may be counted, and the pass-by flag 65d may be cleared to "0" if the total number exceeds a reference value. This ensures that the reference number or more wins will occur at the actuation ports 33 and 34 when a consecutive winning period begins. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the consecutive winning period ends with a low number of wins at the actuation ports 33 and 34 despite the start of the consecutive winning period, making the consecutive winning period more appealing to players.

The number of times the initial value update of the normal power feature opening counter C4 is postponed based on the fact that the postpone flag 65d is set to "1" may be random. For example, when the timing for updating the initial value arrives with the postpone flag 65d set to "1", a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to continue the consecutive winning period. By making the player aware of the possibility that the consecutive winning period may continue for a long time, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the consecutive winning period.

In the first embodiment described above, the main CPU 63 may be configured to recognize that a consecutive winning period has begun when a winning entry into the first through gate 35 occurs once during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode. As already described in the first embodiment above, during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning entry into the first through gate 35 does not occur. On the other hand, the probability of winning the regular power release lottery based on a winning entry into the second through gate 39 is approximately 1/42. When the main CPU 63 detects a winning entry into the first through gate 35 by the first gate detection sensor 49a during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it sets the skip flag 65d to "1" even based on that one winning entry, and does not set the skip flag 65d to "1" when it detects a winning entry into the second through gate 39 by the second gate detection sensor 50a. Therefore, even if consecutive wins at the second through gate 39 occur by chance, it is possible to avoid setting the pass-by flag 65d to "1" based on the wins.

- In the first embodiment described above, the configuration may be such that the player is instructed to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35, and the player is instructed to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the second through gate 39. For example, in the low frequency support mode, when the second gate detection sensor 50a detects a winning entry into the second through gate 39, a left hit instruction command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. The sound and light emission control device 81 that receives the left hit support command sends a command to the display control device 82 to display on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 content that encourages the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35. The sound and light emission control device 81 also controls the speaker unit 54 to execute sound output that encourages the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35.

When in high frequency support mode, if the first gate detection sensor 49a detects a winning entry into the first through gate 35, a right hit instruction command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 81. Upon receiving the right hit support command, the audio and light emitting control device 81 sends a command to the display control device 82 to display on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 content urging the player to operate the game ball launcher while aiming at the second through gate 39. The audio and light emitting control device 81 also controls the speaker unit 54 to execute sound output urging the player to operate the game ball launcher while aiming at the second through gate 39.

When the main CPU 63 transitions from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, it prompts the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the second through gate 39 by sending the above-mentioned right-hit instruction command to the audio and light-emitting control device 81, and when the main CPU 63 transitions from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, it prompts the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35 by sending the above-mentioned left-hit support command to the audio and light-emitting control device 81. In this way, by notifying the player of the operation mode of the game ball launcher that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to configure the game so that even if an inexperienced player operates the game ball launcher, the player can enjoy game content such as the consecutive winning period and the high-frequency support mode.

In the first embodiment described above, when the main CPU 63 grasps the consecutive winning period, it may be configured to notify the player that it is a consecutive winning period. As already explained in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 grasps that it is a consecutive winning period when three consecutive normal power open wins occur during a consecutive non-winning period in the low frequency support mode. In this case, the main CPU 63 transmits a consecutive notification command to the sound and light emission control device 81. The sound and light emission control device 81 that receives the consecutive notification command controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and transmits a command to the display control device 82 to notify the player that it is a consecutive winning period. For example, it may be configured to directly notify the player that it is a consecutive winning period by clearly indicating that it is a consecutive winning period and encouraging the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35. It may also be configured to indirectly notify the player by changing the background on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

Also, when the continuous winning period begins, the main CPU 63 may send a continuous performance command to the sound and light emission control device 81, so that the sound and light emission control device 81 becomes aware that the continuous winning period is in progress. When the continuous winning period ends, the main CPU 63 sends a continuous end command to the sound and light emission control device 81. When the sound and light emission control device 81 receives the continuous end command, it becomes aware that the continuous winning period has ended. If the sound and light emission control device 81 receives a variation command and a type command from the main CPU 63 between receiving the continuous performance command and receiving the continuous end command, it changes the performance for the game round to that for the continuous winning period.

In this way, the consecutive winning period can be emphasized and impressed on the player not only by the movement of the normal power device 34a but also by notifications or effects using the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display unit 41. By making the player aware of the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored in the low-frequency support mode and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

- In the first embodiment described above, the winning lottery triggered by a win at the second actuation port 34 may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the winning lottery triggered by a win at the first actuation port 33. The reserved information acquired by a win at the second actuation port 34 may be consumed with priority over the reserved information acquired by a win at the first actuation port 33. This configuration will be described in detail below.

When a winning entry into the first operating port 33 occurs, a combination of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired as the first lottery reserved information for use in the first winning lottery. When a winning entry into the second operating port 34 occurs, a combination of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired as the second lottery reserved information for use in the second winning lottery. In the reserved storage area 65a, the second lottery reserved information is stored in an area different from the first lottery reserved information. Then, when one or more pieces of the first lottery reserved information and the second lottery reserved information are stored at the time of the winning lottery execution, the second winning lottery based on the second lottery reserved information is executed in priority to the first winning lottery. When a winning lottery based on the winning entry into the first operating port 33 is won, the mode transitions to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 is possible. Similarly, if a winning lottery based on winning the second operating port 34 is won, the mode transitions to an open/close execution mode in which winning is possible in the special electric winning device 32. The types of jackpot results set in the distribution table used in the second winning lottery are more advantageous to the player than the types of jackpot results set in the distribution table used in the first winning lottery.

In this configuration, as already explained in the first embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, and in the low-frequency support mode, a continuous non-winning period or a continuous winning period occurs. In the low-frequency support mode, which combines the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period, the possibility of winning at the operating ports 33 and 34 is lower than the possibility of winning at the operating ports 33 and 34 in the high-frequency support mode, so the player's expectations for winning at the operating ports 33 and 34 are also low. However, in the continuous winning period, support by the normal power role 34a is more likely to be performed, so the possibility of winning at the second operating port 34 increases. And this configuration is one in which the player is more likely to get a favorable result when the second operating port 34 wins than when the first operating port 33 wins. For this reason, even in the low-frequency support mode, the player may be able to enjoy a large profit when a continuous winning period occurs. By increasing the player's expectations regarding the consecutive winning period, the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 in the low-frequency support mode can be increased, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 210 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board 210 showing an enlarged view of the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 41, in the game board 210 of this embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 220 is provided above the first through gate 35 instead of the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment. The adjustment mechanism 220 adjusts the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 41, the adjustment mechanism 220 includes a rotating body 230 that transports the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the top to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 220, an adjustment drive unit 184 that provides the driving force for rotating the rotating body 230 and has already been described in the first embodiment, and a housing 250 that contains the rotating body 230 and prevents the game ball B1 transported by the rotating body 230 to the discharge position from being released outward due to the centrifugal force of the rotation before it reaches the discharge position.

The adjustment mechanism 220 discharges the game ball B1 taken in at the top of the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35 located below the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 41, the distance from the bottom end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 220 is provided at a distance from the first through gate 35 to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. In addition, a sorting nail 271 is provided in the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35 to prevent some of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 from entering the first through gate 35.

The sorting nail 271 is provided so as to protrude 6 mm forward from the front surface of the game board 210. Therefore, of the game balls B1 with a diameter of 11 mm flowing down the game area PA (FIG. 3) having a length dimension of 18 mm in the front-to-rear direction, the game balls B1 flowing down the side of the game board 24 collide with the sorting nail 271 and miss the first through gate 35, while the game balls B1 flowing down the side of the window panel 52 enter the first through gate 35 without colliding with the sorting nail 271.

The configuration of the adjustment mechanism 220 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 has a plate-shaped base body 251 used to fix the housing 250 to the game board 210. FIG. 42(a) is a plan view of the housing 250 cut directly above the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the game board 210 has a fixing recess 211 that can accommodate the base body 251 without any gaps. When the base body 251 is accommodated in the fixing recess 211, the adjustment mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210 by nailing the four corners of the base body 251 as shown in FIG. 41 when the base body 251 is accommodated in the fixing recess 211. When the adjustment mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210, the front surface of the base body 251 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 210.

As shown in FIG. 41, a storage space for storing the rotating body 230 is formed in the housing 250, and the rotating body 230 is disposed in the center of the storage space. The adjustment drive unit 184 already described in the first embodiment is disposed behind the base body 251. The output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 extends forward from the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 210.

A through hole (not shown) is formed in the base body 251 for inserting the output shaft 184a. The rotating body 230 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body 230 is aligned on the same line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184. When the adjustment drive unit 184 is in a driven state, the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° per second.

In the adjustment mechanism 220, the rotation of the rotating body 230 transports the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 at the top of the storage space to the bottom of the storage space. The adjustment mechanism 220 is in a state where it can discharge one game ball B1 every time the rotating body 230 rotates 1/4 of a turn. In other words, the adjustment mechanism 220 can supply game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 at a 1-second cycle, similar to the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment.

By generating the winning timing already described in the first embodiment at 1-second intervals, it is possible to generate consecutive non-winning periods when the winning timing does not overlap with the winning period of the regular power release lottery, and to generate consecutive winning periods when the winning timing overlaps with the winning period.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 has upright walls 252, 253, and 261 for partitioning the storage space in which the rotating body 230 is housed. The upright walls 252, 253, and 261 are formed on the base body 251 in a manner that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 251. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 exist from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52. The upright walls 252, 253, and 261 are formed in a manner that surrounds the rotating body 230 with a space therebetween from the outside of the peripheral surface of the rotating body 230. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each upright wall 252, 253, and 261 is constant, and the storage space is partitioned into a circular shape by the upright walls 252, 253, and 261.

Figure 43 is a front view of the rotor 230, which is shown separately from the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in Figure 43, the rotor 230 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member, and the rotor 230 has four stepped portions on its circumferential surface that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. Here, the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the four stepped portions are arranged in the order of the first step surface 241a → the second step surface 242a → the third step surface 243a → the fourth step surface 244a in the rotation direction of the rotor 230. The four step surfaces 241a to 244a protrude in the radial direction of the rotor 230, and the protruding dimension of the four step surfaces 241a to 244a is approximately the same as the radius of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 43, the rotating body 230 has a first support surface 241 that connects the inner side (the side closer to the center of the rotating body 230) of the first step surface 241a to the outer side (the side farther from the center of the rotating body 230) of the second step surface 242a, and a second support surface 242 that connects the inner side of the second step surface 242a to the outer side of the third step surface 243a. The rotating body 230 also has a third support surface 243 that connects the inner side of the third step surface 243a to the outer side of the fourth step surface 244a, and a fourth support surface 244 that connects the inner side of the fourth step surface 244a to the outer side of the first support surface 241.

As shown in FIG. 43, each of the support surfaces 241-244 is a curved surface formed by bulging outward. In each of the support surfaces 241-244, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the corresponding support surface 241-244 gradually decreases as one moves from the front side to the rear side in the rotation direction (clockwise). For example, taking the first support surface 241 as an example, as shown in FIG. 43, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 is long on the side of the second step surface 242a, which is the front side in the rotation direction, and gradually decreases toward the first step surface 241a, which is the rear side in the rotation direction.

As shown in FIG. 41, the space defined by any one of the support surfaces 241-244 of the rotating body 230, the step surfaces 241a-244a located at the rear end in the rotational direction of the support surfaces 241-244, and the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 that define the storage space in which the rotating body 230 is housed, has a shape and size capable of containing a game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left side of the circular storage space is partitioned by a left standing wall 261, and the lower right side of the storage space is partitioned by a lower right standing wall 253. The left standing wall 261 and the lower right standing wall 253 are integrally formed with the base body 251. The lower right standing wall 253 has a pivot shaft 254 at its upper end. The pivot shaft 254 extends forward perpendicular to the front surface of the base body 251. The upper right side of the storage space is partitioned by an upper right standing wall 252, which is an independent member that is not fixed to the base body 251. The upper right standing wall 252 is connected to the lower right standing wall 253 in a manner that allows it to pivot around the pivot shaft 254 to a certain angle.

Figure 42 (b) is a front view of the housing 250 with an enlarged view of the area around the pivot shaft 254. As shown in Figure 42 (b), in the portion where the lower right standing wall 253 and the upper right standing wall 252 are connected, a gap is provided on the right side of the pivot shaft 254 that allows the upper right standing wall 252 to rotate clockwise around the pivot shaft 254. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the upper right standing wall 252 in the right direction, the upper right standing wall 252 can rotate clockwise around the pivot shaft 254. On the other hand, there is no gap provided on the left side of the pivot shaft 254 that allows the upper right standing wall 252 to rotate counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 254.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the initial state is a state in which the upper right upright wall 252 cannot rotate any further counterclockwise (leftward in FIG. 42(b)). The upper right upright wall 252 rotates clockwise up to a displacement position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41, with an upper limit of approximately 15°. As the upper right upright wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the displacement position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper right upright wall 252 increases.

The upper right standing wall 252 is located in the initial position when no external force is applied, and when an external force is applied in the rightward direction, it rotates around the rotation axis 254 to the displaced position. When the external force is removed, the upper right standing wall 252 that has rotated to the deformed position due to the external force rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 254 due to its own weight and returns to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 41, the upper side of the storage space is partitioned by a left standing wall 261 and an upper right standing wall 252. Directly above the rotating body 230, the left standing wall 261 and the upper right standing wall 252 are spaced apart, and the space between the two standing walls 252, 261 forms an intake port 262 for taking in game balls B1 into the storage space. The width of the intake port 262 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 so that it can take in the game balls B1 flowing down from above one by one.

The upper right upright wall 252 that defines the right end of the intake port 262 can rotate around the pivot shaft 254 from an initial position to a displaced position, so that the intake port 262 can be deformed as necessary to make it easier for the adjustment mechanism 220 to take in the game ball B1. The manner in which the adjustment mechanism 220 takes in the game ball B1 from the intake port 262 will be described later.

The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 is transported from the top to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 220 while contacting one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. The support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 are described below.

As shown in FIG. 43, the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are inclined toward the axis as they move forward. Therefore, a game ball B1 that is transported while in contact with any of these three support surfaces 241-243 will be located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the play area PA (FIG. 3). In contrast, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined toward the axis as they move backward. Therefore, a game ball B1 that is transported while in contact with the fourth support surface 244 will be located on the rear side (base body 251 side) of the play area PA.

In this way, by varying the forward/rearward position of the game ball B1 being transported depending on the support surfaces 241-244 it comes into contact with within the adjustment mechanism 220, the forward/rearward position of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 can be varied. As already explained, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and midway along the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35, a sorting nail 271 is provided that protrudes midway in the forward/rearward direction of the game area PA.

The game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 through the intake port 262, moves in the rotational direction while in contact with the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 (Figure 41), and is discharged. It flows down the front side of the game area PA toward the first through gate 35.

Figures 44(a) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the window panel 52 and the game board 210 when cut directly above the sorting nail 271 by a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 210, and Figures 44(b) and (d) are front views of the game board 210 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 220 and its periphery. As shown in Figure 44(a), the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA flows down in front of the sorting nail 271 without colliding with it. Then, as shown in Figure 44(b), the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35.

On the other hand, as already explained in FIG. 41, the fourth support surface 244 has an inclination such that when the fourth support surface 244 is located at the top, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined downward toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262 and discharged while moving in the rotational direction while in contact with the fourth support surface 244 flows down the back side of the game area PA toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 44(c), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the right side of the sorting nail 271. As shown in FIG. 44(d), the game ball B1 is bounced to the right by the sorting nail 271 and does not enter the first through gate 35.

The probability that the game ball B1 taken in through the intake port 262 will be transported to the discharge passage 264 while coming into contact with the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 is 3/4, and the probability that the taken in game ball B1 will be transported to the discharge passage 264 while coming into contact with the fourth support surface 244 is 1/4. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 has a probability of approximately 3/4 entering the first through gate 35, and a probability of approximately 1/4 colliding with the sorting nail 271 and being removed from the first through gate 35.

Next, the configuration of the vicinity of the intake port 262 in the adjustment mechanism 220 will be described with reference to Figures 45(a) to (d). Figures 45(a) to (d) are front views of the game board 210 showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in Figure 45(a), the left standing wall 261 extends to the upper left of the rotating body 230 and has an end face 261a at its upper end. The end face 261a has a gentle downward slope toward the left, and the right end of the end face 261a is located below the upper end of the game ball B1 that has entered the intake port 262 and is in contact with one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), on the game board 210, a plurality of left guide nails 291 and right guide nails 292 are provided above the adjustment mechanism 220 to guide the game ball B1 to the intake port 262. Here, the left guide nails 291 and right guide nails 292 are the same members as the nails 24b (FIG. 3) provided in large numbers on the game board 210.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), on the game board 210, a row of left guide nails 291 is lined up above the left standing wall 261, and the direction of the row is inclined downward toward the right. The row of left guide nails 291 guides the game ball B1 flowing down from above the left standing wall 261 toward the intake port 262. Also, a row of right guide nails 292 is lined up above the upper right standing wall 252, and the direction of the row is inclined downward toward the left. The row of right guide nails 292 guides the game ball B1 flowing down from above the upper right standing wall 252 toward the intake port 262.

As already explained, the upper right standing wall 252 is configured to rotate rightward from the initial position to the displaced position when an external force is applied to the right. In this configuration, the row of right side guide nails 292 aligned above the upper right standing wall 252 prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from above from colliding with the upper right standing wall 252. Therefore, the rotational state of the upper right standing wall 252 does not change when the game ball B1 flowing down from above collides with the upper right standing wall 252 in the displaced position.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the distance from the right guide nail 292 located at the bottom of the row of right guide nails 292 to the upper right standing wall 252 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 does not get into the gap between the row of right guide nails 292 and the upper right standing wall 252. On the other hand, the distance from the left guide nail 291 located at the bottom of the row of left guide nails 291 to the left standing wall 261 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is guided leftward by the row of right guide nails 292 and is not taken into the intake port 262 passes through the space between the row of left guide nails 291 and the left standing wall 261 and escapes to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220.

In addition, game ball B1 that is guided to the right by the row of left guide nails 291 and is not taken into the intake port 262 collides with the right guide nail 292 and the upper right upright wall 252, bounces off to the left, and then passes through the space between the row of left guide nails 291 and the left upright wall 261 to escape to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220. In this way, by configuring game ball B1 that is guided near the intake port 262 but is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262 to escape to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220, it is possible to prevent game ball B1 from accumulating near the intake port 262.

The game ball B1 flows down into the intake 262 of the adjustment mechanism 220 regardless of the rotation state of the rotor 230. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 that flows down into the intake 262 will come into contact with the front position of the support surface 241-244 located above, or the rear position of the support surface 241-244. Here, the front position of the support surface 241-244 is the front part of the support surface 241-244 in the rotation direction, and the rear position of the support surface 241-244 is the rear part of the support surface 241-244 in the rotation direction.

The behavior of the game ball B1 at the intake port 262 is the same regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 with which the game ball B1 comes into contact. For this reason, the behavior of the game ball B1 that flows down into the intake port 262 and comes into contact with the first support surface 241 will be described below as an example.

First, the case where the game ball B1 that has flowed down into the intake port 262 comes into contact with the rear position of the first support surface 241 located above will be described with reference to FIG. 45(b). As shown in FIG. 45(b), when the game ball B1 comes into contact with the rear position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is shorter than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright walls 252, 253, and 261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is transported toward the bottom of the storage space while being pushed by the first step surface 241a that exists at the rear end of the first support surface 241 with which it is in contact.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 that has flowed down into the intake port 262 comes into contact with the front position of the first support surface 241 located above will be described with reference to Figures 45(b) and (c). As shown in Figure 45(c), when the game ball B1 comes into contact with the front position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright walls 252, 253, and 261. Therefore, at the intake port 262, the game ball B1 that attempts to move to the right in response to the rotation of the rotating body 230 comes into contact with the upper right upright wall 252.

When the rotor 230 rotates while the game ball B1 is prevented from moving to the right by the upper right upright wall 252, the game ball B1 cannot move to the right from the intake port 262, and the contact point between the game ball B1 and the first support surface 241 moves from the front to the rear of the first support surface 241.

As already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 gradually becomes shorter from the front position to the rear position of the first support surface 241. Therefore, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 gradually becomes shorter. In this case, the game ball B1, which remains in contact with the first support surface 241, gradually sinks downward as the rotating body 230 rotates.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the game ball B1 is in a state where it is in a position behind the first support surface 241. As already explained, when it is in a position behind the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is shorter than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright walls 252, 253, 261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is pushed by the first step surface 241a at the rear end of the first support surface 241 and transported toward the bottom of the storage space.

When the rotating body 230 rotates from a state in which the game ball B1 is in the front position of the first support surface 241 to a state in which the game ball B1 is in the rear position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the contact point between the game ball B1 and the first support surface 241 decreases continuously. Therefore, even when the game ball B1 is waiting at the intake port 262, it is not stationary in one place but is constantly moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the game area PA (FIG. 3), a space is provided to the left of the left upright wall 261, through which the game ball B1 can flow downward. No nails 24b are arranged in this space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is not taken in by the adjustment mechanism 220 at the intake port 262 can pass through this space and proceed downstream of the game area PA.

The game ball B1, which has flowed down to a position shifted to the left of the intake port 262, comes into contact with the end face 261a of the left standing wall 261. As already explained, the end face 261a is inclined downward toward the left. Therefore, the game ball B1 is guided by the end face 261a of the left standing wall 261 and flows down through the space provided to the left of the left standing wall 261.

The game ball B1 that flows down to a position shifted to the right of the intake port 262 is guided by the right guide nail 292 and moves toward the intake port 262. Since the game ball B1 does not collide with the upper right standing wall 252 from above, the game ball B1 flowing down from above does not cause the upper right standing wall 252 to rotate from the initial position to the displaced position, or vice versa.

As shown in FIG. 45(c), when a first game ball B1 enters the intake port 262 and comes into contact with one of the support surfaces 241-244 of the rotor 230, if a second game ball B1 attempts to enter the intake port 262, the second game ball B1 comes into contact with the first game ball B1. Because the right guide nail 292 and the upper right upright wall 252 are present to the right of the second game ball B1, the second game ball B1 moves to the left instead of to the right.

As already explained, the right end of the end face 261a of the left standing wall 261 is located below the second game ball B1, and the end face 261a is inclined downward toward the left. Also, there is a space to the left of the left standing wall 261 through which the game ball B1 can pass. Therefore, the second game ball B1 that is not taken in by the intake port 262 flows down the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220.

Since the game balls B1 that are not taken into the intake port 262 do not stop or stagnate near the intake port 262, the intake port 262 can maintain a state in which the game balls B1 are smoothly taken in.

Next, the manner in which the game ball B1 taken in through the intake port 262 is transported to the bottom of the storage space as the rotor 230 rotates will be described with reference to FIG. 45(d). As already described, the game ball B1 transported while contacting any of the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 is present on the front side in the front-to-rear direction (the window panel 52 side), while the game ball B1 transported while contacting the fourth support surface 244 is present on the rear side in the front-to-rear direction (the base body 251 side).

Except for its position in the forward and backward directions, the movement of the game ball B1 during transport is the same regardless of the support surfaces 241-244 that the game ball B1 is in contact with during transport. For this reason, the following description will be given as an example of a case in which the game ball B1 is transported while in contact with the first support surface 241.

As shown in FIG. 45(d), the game ball B1 is transported while being in contact with the first support surface 241 and the first step surface 241a. During transport, the game ball B1 is subjected to a force in the rotational direction from the first step surface 241a, which protrudes in the radial direction of the rotating body 230.

As already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the support surfaces 241-244 is long at the front of the rotating direction (clockwise) for each of the support surfaces 241-244, and gradually becomes shorter toward the rear of the rotating direction. Also, as already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 that define the storage space of the rotating body 230 is constant.

For this reason, as shown in FIG. 45(d), the distance from any one of the support surfaces 241-244 to the standing walls 252, 253, 261 is short on the front side of the support surface 241-244 in the rotational direction, and gradually becomes longer toward the rear side in the rotational direction. Specifically, the width of the space sandwiched between any one of the support surfaces 241-244 and the standing walls 252, 253, 261 is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1 on the front side of the support surface 241-244 in the rotational direction, and gradually becomes wider toward the rear side in the rotational direction. The width of the space located in approximately the rear half of the space is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Also, the distance from the front surface of the base body 251 to the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 45(d), in the space between the first support surface 241 and the upper right upright wall 252, the space on the rear side in the direction of rotation has a shape and size that can accommodate the game ball B1, while the space on the front side in the direction of rotation is a space of a size that cannot accommodate the game ball B1. When the game ball B1 is being transported in contact with the first support surface 241, the space large enough for the game ball B1 to exist is limited to the rear position of the first support surface 241.

If there is a large space large enough for the game ball B1 to exist during transportation, the game ball B1 can exist in different positions even if the rotation state of the rotating body 230 is the same. In this case, even if the rotation speed of the rotating body 230 is constant and one of the step surfaces 241a to 244a is in the discharge position each time the discharge timing occurs, the position of the game ball B1 at the discharge timing will be different each time, and the timing at which it can enter the first through gate 35 will be shifted.

In response to this, the space in which the game ball B1 can exist during transport is limited, and the game ball B1 is transported to a predetermined position each time at the discharge timing when the step surfaces 241a-244a transporting the game ball B1 reach the discharge position, so that the timing at which the game ball can enter the first through gate 35 does not shift.

When the game ball B1 is in a rear position of one of the support surfaces 241 to 244, there is a space around the game ball B1 that is larger than the size of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the first step surface 241a, the first support surface 241, or any of the upright walls 252, 253 located on the right side during transportation, the game ball B1 is not forcibly pushed and dragged by the first step surface 241a while being transported.

Next, the configuration for the adjustment mechanism 220 to discharge the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 is connected to the storage space in which the rotating body 230 is stored, and a discharge passage 264 is formed for discharging the game ball B1 transported to the bottom of the storage space toward the first through gate 35 located below the adjustment mechanism 220. The discharge passage 264 has a passage cross section through which the game balls B1 can pass one by one, and is provided with a discharge port 256 at the lower end of the discharge passage 264. The discharge passage 264 guides the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 so that the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 flows down toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 44(b), the discharge passage 264 shifts the position of the game ball B1 to the left upstream, and directs the discharge direction of the game ball B1 downward toward the first through gate 35 downstream.

The discharge passage 264 is connected to the right of the center of the storage space. Therefore, the game ball B1 transported clockwise from the top to the bottom of the storage space advances to the discharge passage 264 before the game ball B1 completes half a revolution around the rotating body 230.

The game ball B1 being transported by the rotor 230 has a downward velocity component from when it is taken in at the top of the storage space until it makes half a revolution, and after it makes half a revolution, it has an upward velocity component. By configuring the game ball B1 to move into the discharge passage 264 before the game ball B1 being transported changes from a state in which it has a downward velocity component to a state in which it has an upward velocity component, the movement of the game ball B1 from the storage space to the discharge passage 264 can be made smooth.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 has discharge upright walls 263, 266 that divide the discharge passage 264. The discharge upright walls 263, 266 are formed on both the left and right sides of the discharge passage 264 in a manner that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Of these, the right discharge upright wall 266 that defines the passage shape on the right side of the discharge passage 264 is continuous with the lower right upright wall 253 and extends diagonally downward to the left. As shown in FIG. 41, the passage wall surface of the discharge passage 264 defined by the right discharge upright wall 266 is a curve that bulges diagonally upward to the left.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left side discharge upright wall 263, which defines the passage shape on the left side of the discharge passage 264, is formed at a distance from the right side discharge upright wall 266 so that the passage width of the discharge passage 264 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. The passage width of the discharge passage 264 is set to become slightly narrower from the upstream to the downstream, and is approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball B1 at the downstream.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 is guided by the right-side discharge upright wall 266, and moves leftward while proceeding downward. In detail, the game ball B1 is mainly guided leftward upstream of the discharge passage 264, and is mainly guided downward toward the first through gate 35 downstream of the discharge passage 264. This prevents the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 from deviating from the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left discharge upright wall 263 has at its upper end a discharge protruding end 263a that protrudes into the storage space in which the rotating body 230 is stored. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the discharge protruding end 263a is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the outer ends of the step surfaces 241a to 244a, and the difference between these two distances is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. In other words, the discharge protruding end 263a protrudes to a position where, when the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 are closest to each other, the distance from the discharge protruding end 263a to the step surfaces 241a to 244a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The protruding dimension of the ejection protruding end 263a is such that the ejection protruding end 263a does not come into contact with the step surfaces 241a to 244a even when the step surfaces 241a to 244a are closest to each other. Therefore, the rotation of the rotating body 230 is not hindered by the step surfaces 241a to 244a coming into contact with the ejection protruding end 263a.

The discharge protrusion 263a comes into contact with the upper part of the game ball B1 that has been transported to the bottom of the storage space by the rotating body 230, and guides the game ball B1 toward the discharge passage 264. As shown in FIG. 44(b), gravity acts on the game ball B1 that has been transported to the bottom of the storage space, causing it to fall downward. At the bottom of the storage space, there is a space that is slightly larger than the game ball B1. For this reason, the game ball B1 moves downward due to its own weight, lower than the state in which it is in contact with the support surfaces 241-244 of the rotating body 230.

As already explained, the discharge passage 264 is connected to the lower part of the storage space, closer to the right than the center. Therefore, when the game ball B1 moves from the storage space to the discharge passage 264, the game ball B1 has a leftward velocity component and a downward velocity component. The game ball B1 then tries to move downward due to its own weight, and tries to move leftward due to being pushed by the step surfaces 241a to 244a with which it is in contact.

When the downward velocity component of the game ball B1 is sufficiently greater than the leftward velocity component at the bottom of the storage space, the game ball B1 moves along the right-side discharge upright wall 266 to the discharge passage 264. On the other hand, when the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 is greater at the bottom of the storage space, the game ball B1 tries to move leftward away from the right-side discharge upright wall 266.

In response to this, as already explained, the discharge protruding end 263a of the left discharge upright wall 263 protrudes into the storage space. The distance from the step surfaces 241a-244a, which are pushing the game ball B1 to the left, to the discharge protruding end 263a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, even if the game ball B1 has a large velocity component to the left, it cannot move further left than the discharge protruding end 263a.

Also, as shown in FIG. 44(b), even if the game ball B1 does not move downward and is in contact with the support surfaces 241-244, the protruding position of the discharge protruding end 263a is set so that the straight line connecting the discharge protruding end 263a and the step surfaces 241a-244a passes above the center of gravity of the game ball B1. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 is pinched while in contact with the discharge protruding end 263a and the step surfaces 241a-244a, the force that causes the rotating body 230 to rotate clockwise acts in a direction that pushes the game ball B1 toward the discharge passage 264.

Even if the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 is large in the lower part of the storage space, the game ball B1, which is in contact with the discharge protrusion end 263a and the step surfaces 241a to 244a, moves toward the discharge passage 264 as the rotor 230 rotates. The game ball B1 is tightly sandwiched between the discharge protrusion end 263a and the step surfaces 241a to 244a, and the rotation of the rotor 230 does not stop.

Next, a case will be described where the game ball B1 comes into contact with both one of the step surfaces 241a-244a and the end face 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 at the intake port 262. As shown in FIG. 41, the upper right standing wall 252 in the initial position has an end face 252a at the free end of the upper right standing wall 252 that slopes downward and to the right. As the rotating body 230 rotates, the distance between the step surfaces 241a-244a located around the intake port 262 and the end face 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 becomes longer or shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1.

When the game ball B1 enters the intake port 262 at the timing when the distance between the step surfaces 241a-244a located near the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 changes from longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 to shorter, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the step surfaces 241a-244a and the end surface 252a.

The behavior of the trapped game ball B1 is the same regardless of which of the step surfaces 241a to 244a traps the game ball B1. Therefore, below, the case where the game ball B1 is trapped between the second step surface 242a and the upper right standing wall 252 will be described with reference to Figures 46(a) to (c). Figures 46(a) to (c) are front views of the game board 210 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 220 and its periphery.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second step surface 242a and the upper right standing wall 252, as the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise, a rightward force is applied from the second step surface 242a to the game ball B1. As a result, a rightward force is applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252. As already explained, when a rightward force is applied from the outside, the upper right standing wall 252 can rotate about the pivot shaft 254 from the initial position to a deformed position shown by shading in FIG. 46(a).

As shown in FIG. 46(b), as the upper right standing wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the deformed position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the end face 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 increases, and the sandwiched game ball B1 moves downward and to the right, guided by the inclination of the end face 252a. Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the game ball B1 goes from being in contact with the end face 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 to being in contact with the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252. Here, the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252 is the surface of the upper right standing wall 252 that faces the rotating body 230 and defines the storage space of the rotating body 230.

Then, the game ball B1 moves along the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252 while being pushed by the second step surface 242a. As a result, the game ball B1 that is momentarily caught in the intake port 262 can be transported to the discharge position at the same discharge timing as the game ball B1 that is not caught in the intake port 262.

In this way, the adjustment mechanism 220 has a configuration that, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the step surfaces 241a-244a and the upper right standing wall 252, eliminates the sandwiched state of the game ball B1 and takes in the game ball B1. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B1 will become sandwiched between the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252, causing the rotating body 230 to be unable to rotate.

When the game ball B1 moves from a state in which it is in contact with the upper right standing wall 252 to a state in which it is in contact with the lower right standing wall 253, the rightward force applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252 is removed. As a result, the upper right standing wall 252, which has rotated to the displaced position, returns to its initial position due to its own weight.

When a force is applied to the upper right standing wall 252 using a spring or the like to return it to its initial position, the force required to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 from its initial position to its displaced position increases. In contrast, by configuring the upper right standing wall 252 to return to its initial position by its own weight, the force required to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 is reduced, the state in which the game ball B1 is trapped is made momentary, and no load is placed on the adjustment drive unit 184 (Figure 41) in the process of eliminating this state.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In the intake 262 of the adjustment mechanism 220, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 is configured to be taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 by the upper right standing wall 252 rotating from the initial position to the deformed position around the rotation axis 254. This prevents the sandwiched game ball B1 from being bounced upward and disrupting the flow of the game ball B1 around the intake 262. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the sandwiched game ball B1 escapes outside the adjustment mechanism 220, more game balls B1 can be taken into the adjustment mechanism 220. This prevents the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from being lost. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing for a normal power release win is missed during a consecutive winning period.

When the game ball B1 is located in front of the support surfaces 241-244 (in front of the rotation direction) at the intake port 262, the game ball B1 moves downward and waits at the intake port 262 until it is located behind the support surfaces 241-244 (in rear of the rotation direction). By keeping the game ball B1 waiting at the intake port 262 in a constantly moving state, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from stopping and becoming an opportunity for the player to shift his or her interest to something else. By preventing the player from losing interest in the process of the adjustment mechanism 220 taking in the game ball B1, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The adjustment mechanism 220 is configured to take in game balls B1 one by one from the intake port 262. When two game balls B1 are taken in at the same time, one game ball B1 may affect the timing of the entry of the other game ball B1, so that the timing at which the game ball can enter the first through gate 35 may fall outside the target winning period, even during a consecutive winning period. In response to this, by limiting the number of game balls B1 taken in at one time to one, the possibility of the game ball B1 entering the first through gate 35 at a time that does not result in a winning normal power release during the consecutive winning period is reduced, and the probability of winning a normal power release during the consecutive winning period can be increased. This increases the player's expectations for the consecutive winning period, making the game more enjoyable.

In the game board 210, a right guide nail 292 for guiding the game ball B1 to the intake port 262 is provided above the upper right standing wall 252, and a gap is provided above the left standing wall 261 to allow the game ball B1 to move leftward. Therefore, if a game ball B1 is already present in the intake port 262, the other game balls B1 can escape to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220. This prevents the game balls B1 that have not been taken in from remaining near the intake port 262 or from disrupting the flow of the game balls B1 upstream of the intake port 262, which would reduce the number of game balls B1 taken in by the adjustment mechanism 220. In this way, by suppressing the lack of game balls B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35, it is possible to avoid missing the timing of the normal power opening win during the consecutive winning period.

The adjustment mechanism 220 has a discharge protruding end 263a, and the game ball B1 is prevented from rising without being discharged at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 220. This prevents the game ball B1 transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 220 by the rotating body 230 from being properly discharged, causing the same game ball B1 to continue rotating and reducing the number of game balls B1 discharged toward the first through gate 35. This prevents the frequency at which game balls B1 are discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 from decreasing, which in turn prevents the player from losing interest in the adjustment mechanism 220. In addition, by configuring the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 to be discharged within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the pace at which new game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from slowing down. This prevents the frequency at which game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from decreasing, which in turn prevents the player from losing interest in the adjustment mechanism 220.

The first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are inclined so that the game ball B1 is discharged in a manner that it flows down the front side, and the fourth support surface 244 is inclined so that the game ball B1 is discharged in a manner that it flows down the back side. As already explained, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, only the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and flowing down the back side collides with the sorting nail 271 and is removed from the first through gate 35. As a result, all of the game balls B1 taken in by the adjustment mechanism 220 enter the first through gate 35, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player focuses only on the intake of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 220 and does not pay attention to the discharge. By attracting the player's attention until the moment the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

By changing the number and inclination of the support surfaces 241-244, it is possible to set the frequency of occurrence of game balls B1 being discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and entering the first through gate 35, and game balls B1 missing the first through gate 35, at the design stage. Therefore, the probability that game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 will enter the first through gate 35 can be set to a high value other than 100%. This can increase the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 and improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Alternatives to the Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of game balls B1 wait while moving downward at the intake port 262. For example, a single nail 24b may be disposed above the left end of the intake port 262, and when a second game ball B1 flows down while a first game ball B1 has already entered the intake port 262, the second game ball B1 may be held above the intake port 262. The second game ball B1 waits above the first game ball B1, but since the first game ball B1 continues to move downward until it is taken in, the second game ball B1 waiting in contact with the first game ball B1 also continues to move downward.

In this way, by moving and stocking the game balls B1 at the intake port 262, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is a shortage of game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220, resulting in a low frequency of game balls B1 entering the first through gate 35 even during a period of consecutive wins.

- In the second embodiment described above, a nail may be used instead of the housing 250 as a configuration for guiding the game ball B1 that moves while being pushed by the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230. The nail to be placed near the intake port 262 may be a movable nail that, when an external force in the right direction is applied, causes a compression coil spring to deform and moves to the right from its initial position, and when the external force is removed, returns to its initial position due to the restoring force of the compression coil spring. By using this movable nail, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 230 and the movable nail, the rightward movement of the movable nail can be used to increase the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the movable nail, making it possible to take in the sandwiched game ball B1.

In this way, by using nails to guide the game ball B1, which moves in the rotational direction while being pushed by the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230, the area of the game board 210 occupied by the means for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 can be reduced. This increases the options for the location of the means for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 on the game board 210, and increases the freedom of design.

- In the second embodiment described above, the support surfaces 241-244 of the rotating body 230 may be configured not to have a slope in the front-rear direction. In this case, the four support surfaces 241-244 of the rotating body 230 have a common shape. Therefore, the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge passage 264 in the same manner regardless of which of the support surfaces 241-244 it is transported while in contact with. The probability that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA and the probability that it is located on the rear side (game board 210 side) are constant regardless of the support surfaces 241-244 that were in contact with the game ball B1.

All of the support surfaces 241-244 can be configured so that the game ball B1 transported while in contact can either be located at the front of the play area PA and enter the first through gate 35 without coming into contact with the sorting nails 271, or be located at the rear of the play area PA and come into contact with the sorting nails 271, thereby missing the first through gate 35. This can increase the player's interest in the behavior of the game ball B1 around the sorting nails 271, making the game more interesting.

Also, in a configuration in which the support surfaces 241-244 of the rotating body 230 do not have a slope in the front-rear direction, the game board 210 may not be provided with a sorting nail 271. In this case, the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 is not affected by the front-rear position of the game ball B1. There is a high probability that the discharged game ball B1 will enter the first through gate 35. However, the distance from the discharge passage 264 to the first through gate 35 is set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, if the passage width at the bottom end of the discharge passage 264 is one size or more wider than the game ball B1, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 may deviate to either the left or right, and it may not enter the first through gate 35.

In this way, instead of providing a distribution nail 271 on the game board 210, the relationship with the first through gate 35 in the discharge passage 264 may be adjusted to avoid a situation in which all of the discharged game balls B1 enter the first through gate 35.

- In the second embodiment described above, the sorting nail 271 may not be present on the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is provided at a location that is at least the diameter of the game ball B1 away from the discharge port 256 in the adjustment mechanism 220. Therefore, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 at the discharge port 256, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 may miss the first through gate 35. By configuring the positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 220 and the first through gate 35 to be adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 misses the first through gate 35, the player's interest can also be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 after it is discharged.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

The configuration of the first through gate 35 and its surroundings on the game board 320 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 47. Figure 47 is a front view of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 47, the game board 320 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 330 above the first through gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 330 discharges the game ball B1 while guiding the game ball B1 so that it falls toward the first through gate 35. In the adjustment mechanism 330, the timing at which the game ball B1 can be discharged occurs in a 1-second cycle.

By generating the winning timing already described in the first embodiment at 1-second intervals, it is possible to generate consecutive non-winning periods when the winning timing does not overlap with the winning period of the regular power release lottery, and to generate consecutive winning periods when the winning timing overlaps with the winning period. The detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the distance between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the distance between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. On the game board 320, above the left side of the first through gate 35 and below the adjustment mechanism 330, an adjustment nail 376 is provided to move some of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 away from the path toward the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 47, the adjustment nail 376 is located to the left of the path of the game ball B1 that flows straight down from the adjustment mechanism 330 and enters the first through gate 35. The adjustment nail 376 also protrudes from the front of the game board 320 to near the rear of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Therefore, the game ball B1 that flows down a path that is shifted to the left will collide with the adjustment nail 376 regardless of its front-to-rear position in the game area PA (FIG. 3).

If the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 is straight down, the discharged game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 without coming into contact with the adjustment nail 376. In contrast, if the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is shifted to the left of straight down, the discharged game ball B1 comes into contact with the adjustment nail 376. As described above, since there is a gap between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 that is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the adjustment nail 376 will miss the first through gate 35.

By preventing all game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 from entering the first through gate 35, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 from becoming monotonous and boring the player.

The adjustment mechanism 330 takes in the game ball B1 inside the adjustment mechanism 330 and guides it toward the first through gate 35, and the range in which the game ball B1 can be taken in is located at the top of the adjustment mechanism 330. As shown in FIG. 47, on the game board 320, upstream of the adjustment mechanism 330, multiple downstream guide nails 371 are provided to guide the game ball B1 flowing down from above to the adjustment mechanism 330.

By arranging downstream guide nails 371 on the game board 320, a row is provided for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper right side of the adjustment mechanism 330 into the range in which the adjustment mechanism 330 can receive it, and a row is provided for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side of the adjustment mechanism 330 into the range in which the adjustment mechanism 330 can receive it. Here, as shown in FIG. 47, the area on the game board 320 between the two rows is the downstream guide area 371a. The two rows of downstream guide nails 371 guide the game ball B1 flowing down the downstream guide area 371a toward the top of the adjustment mechanism 330.

As shown in FIG. 47, an electric nail 361 that can move left and right is provided near the top of the right row of downstream guide nails 371. In addition, above the electric nail 361, a plurality of upstream guide nails 372 are provided to guide most of the game ball B1 that flows down the area of the game board 320 to the left of the center frame 57 (FIG. 3) to the electric nail 361.

In the area to the left of the center frame 57 on the game board 320, upstream guide nails 372 are lined up, providing a row at the top of the area for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the right side of the area toward the electric nail 361 located below, and a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the area toward the electric nail 361 located below. As shown in FIG. 47, the area sandwiched between the two rows is referred to as the upstream guide area 372a.

The width of the upstream guidance area 372a is wide at the top of the upstream guidance area 372a and gradually narrows toward the bottom, and at the bottom of the upstream guidance area 372a (near the electric nail 361), the spacing is such that the game balls B1 can pass through in a single line.

As shown in FIG. 47, the electric nail 361 is connected to a nail drive unit 361a, which is an electric actuator such as a solenoid, via a link mechanism (not shown), and takes an allowance position that allows the game ball B1 guided by the row of upstream guide nails 372 to enter between the two rows of downstream guide nails 371, and a prohibition position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering between the two rows of downstream guide nails 371. Here, the relationship between the position of the electric nail 361 and the path of the game ball B1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 48(a) and (b).

Figure 48(a) is a front view of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the electric nail 361 in the permitted position and its surroundings, and Figure 48(b) is a front view of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position and its surroundings. As shown in Figure 48(a), when the drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is at a LOW level, the electric nail 361 is in the permitted position. The electric nail 361 in the permitted position is located to the upper right of the downstream guide nail 371 located at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a, and is located to the lower left of the upstream guide nail 372 located at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a.

First, we will explain the case where the electric nail 361 is in the permitted position. As shown in FIG. 48(a), the right-hand region of the downstream guidance region 371a exists below the left-hand region of the upstream guidance region 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that flows downward from the left-hand region of the upstream guidance region 372a enters the right-hand region of the downstream guidance region 371a. Also, the electric nail 361 that is in the permitted position exists below the right-hand region of the upstream guidance region 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that flows downward from the right-hand region of the upstream guidance region 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and enters the downstream guidance region 371a.

Next, we will explain the case where the electric nail 361 is in the prohibited position. As shown in FIG. 48(b), the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position is present below the left area of the upstream guidance area 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that flows downward from the left area of the upstream guidance area 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and flows down to the right of the downstream guide nail 371. In addition, the bottom of the right area of the upstream guidance area 372a hits the right of the downstream guidance area 371a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that flows downward from the right area of the upstream guidance area 372a flows down to the right of the downstream guidance area 371a.

As shown in FIG. 48(a) and (b), the distance between the motorized nail 361 in the permitted position and the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a, and the distance between the motorized nail 361 in the prohibited position and the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower left end of the upstream guide area 372a are set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the motorized nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not sandwiched between the motorized nail 361 and the upstream guide nail 372. In addition, the distance between the motorized nail 361 in the permitted position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a, and the distance between the motorized nail 361 in the prohibited position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a are narrow enough that the game ball B1 cannot get in. Therefore, when the motorized nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not sandwiched between the motorized nail 361 and the downstream guide nail 371.

As shown in FIG. 47, a nail 24b is provided above the left side area of the downstream guidance area 371a to prevent the game ball B1 flowing down to the left of the upstream guidance area 372a from entering the downstream guidance area 371a. For this reason, the game ball B1 that can enter the downstream guidance area 371a is limited to the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guidance area 372a. In this way, the game ball B1 that enters the downstream guidance area 371a is limited to the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guidance area 372a, and the electric nail 361 is moved to the prohibited position to guide the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guidance area 372a to the right of the downstream guidance area 371a. This makes it possible to control the frequency with which the game ball B1 enters the downstream guidance area 371a and is taken into the adjustment mechanism 330.

The drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is a periodic signal in which a HIGH level is repeated for 0.2 seconds at intervals of 0.8 seconds. Therefore, the electric nail 361 is in the prohibited position for only 0.2 seconds out of 1 second. If two or more game balls B1 that can be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) at 0.6 second intervals attempt to enter the downstream guide area 371a in a line, there is a high probability that one of the two game balls B1 will collide with the electric nail 361 that has moved to the prohibited position and flow down to the right of the downstream guide area 371a. By using the electric nail 361, it is possible to prevent a number of game balls B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a in a line and being taken in by the adjustment mechanism 330.

Next, the detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described below. As shown in FIG. 47, the adjustment mechanism 330 includes a rotating body 340 that transports the game ball B1 from the top to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 330, and rotates the rotating body 340 clockwise. The adjustment drive unit 184 is already described in the first embodiment, and is provided to the right of the rotating body 340. The guide member 350 is provided to the right of the rotating body 340 and guides the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 in the discharge direction before discharge so that the game ball B1 is directed toward the first through gate 35. The adjustment drive unit 184 provides the rotating body 340 with a driving force for rotating the rotating body 340 once every 6 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 47, the rotor 340 comprises a roughly disk-shaped rotor main body 342 and six plate-shaped blade members 343 protruding radially from the outer periphery of the rotor main body 342. The rotor main body 342 and the blade members 343 are made of resin. The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 is transported to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 330 while being supported from below by one of the blade members 343 that make up the rotor 340.

First, the configuration of the rotating body 340 in the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 47, the rotating body main body 342 has six rotation shafts 344 on its outer periphery. The rotation shafts 344 are provided at angles perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 320. The blade members 343 are fixed to the outer periphery of the rotating body main body 342 in such a manner that they can rotate counterclockwise around the rotation shafts 344. The six blade members 343 are the same member with the same shape and size, and are lined up on the outer periphery of the rotating body main body 342 at equal intervals in the rotational direction.

As shown in FIG. 47, the adjustment drive unit 184 is disposed behind the rotating body main body 342. The front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 is parallel to the front surface of the game board 320, and the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 extends forward perpendicular to the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184. The rotating body main body 342 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body main body 342 is positioned on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184. When the adjustment drive unit 184 is in a driving state, the rotating body main body 342 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60° per second. When the rotating body 340 is attached to the game board 320, the rotating body main body 342 exists from near the front surface of the game board 320 to near the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

Here, the manner in which the blade member 343 is fixed to the rotor main body 342 will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, the initial state of the blade member 343 is a state in which the blade member 343 protrudes radially from the outer edge of the rotor main body 342. A recess (not shown) is formed around the rotation shaft 344 to prevent the blade member 343 in the initial state from rotating clockwise around the rotation shaft 344. Even if an external force acts on the blade member 343 in the initial state to rotate the blade member 343 clockwise, the blade member 343 does not rotate because it is in contact with the wall of the recess.

A biasing member (e.g., a torsion coil spring) (not shown) is attached around the pivot shaft 344. The biasing member is in an undeformed natural state when the blade member 343 is in its initial state, and is in a deformed state when the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 344 and is in a displaced state. A restoring force of the biasing member acts on the displaced blade member 343, which tries to return it from the deformed state to its natural state. When an external force is applied to the blade member 343, it rotates counterclockwise and is in a displaced state, and when the external force is removed, it rotates clockwise due to the restoring force and returns to its initial state.

Next, the configuration of the guide member 350 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 has a plate-shaped base body 351. A fixing recess (not shown) capable of housing the base body 351 without any gaps is formed on the right side of the rotating body 340 on the game board 320. The guide member 350 is fixed by nailing the base body 351 to the game board when the base body 351 is housed in the fixing recess. When the guide member 350 is attached to the game board 320, the front surface of the base body 351 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 320.

As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 has an upright wall 352 that protrudes vertically forward from the front surface of the base body 351. The upright wall 352 extends to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52. The upper end of the upright wall 352 is located above the upper end of the rotating body 340, and the lower end of the upright wall 352 is located at approximately the same height as the lower end of the rotating body main body 342.

As shown in FIG. 47, the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352, which faces the rotating body main body 342 at a distance, is a gently arched curved surface that is concave toward the right. The distance from the rotating body main body 342 to the standing wall 352 is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. In addition, the distance from the upper end of the standing wall 352 to the vane member 343 located closest to the upper end is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 regardless of the rotation state of the rotating body 340.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the adjustment mechanism 330, the area sandwiched between the rotating body main body 342 and the standing wall 352 is the adjustment area 330a. In the lower area of the adjustment area 330a, the distance from the blade member 343 to the standing wall 352 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. As already explained, the blade member 343 protrudes from the peripheral surface of the rotating body 340 in the radial direction of the rotating body 340 at 60° intervals.

For this reason, one of the blade members 343 of the rotating body 340 is always present in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a. The game ball B1 flowing down the adjustment region 330a always comes into contact with a blade member 343 present in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a. By using a configuration that prevents the game ball B1 that enters the adjustment region 330a from passing through without coming into contact with the blade member 343, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 from being discharged toward the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the discharge timing.

Here, the manner in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment area 330a will be explained with reference to Figures 49(a) to (c). Figures 49(a) to (c) are front views of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 330 and its periphery.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), in the lower region of the adjustment area 330a, the game ball B1 is supported from below by the wing members present in that region. Then, as the rotor 340 rotates, the game ball B1 is transported to a discharge position below. The game ball B1 is transported in contact with the upright wall 352, and the path of the game ball B1 in the adjustment area 330a is guided.

When the game ball B1 is supported by the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352 above the first through gate 35, the rotor 340 rotates and, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 that was supporting the game ball B1 and the lower end of the upright wall 352 becomes wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. In this state, the game ball B1 falls from the gap downward toward the first through gate 35.

As already explained, the adjustment drive unit 184 (Figure 47) rotates the rotor 340 at a rotational speed of one rotation every 6 seconds. Therefore, at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 330, the discharge timing at which the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 and the bottom end of the standing wall 352 changes from a state shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 occurs in a 1 second cycle. In this way, the adjustment mechanism 330 is capable of discharging the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 in a 1 second cycle.

The game ball B1 that enters the adjustment area 330a comes into contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 while having a downward velocity. Therefore, when the game ball B1 collides with the blade member 343 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily out of contact with the blade member 343. Also, when the game ball B1 collides with the standing wall 352 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily out of contact with the standing wall 352. As shown in FIG. 49(c), when the discharge timing arrives while the game ball B1 is not in contact with the blade member 343 or the standing wall 352, the game ball B1 is discharged at a timing slightly delayed from the discharge timing.

In this case, the rotating body 340 continues to rotate between the time when the game ball B1 is discharged and the time when the game ball B1 is actually discharged, so the path of the game ball B1 after being discharged is shifted to the left. As already explained, a gap of at least the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35. For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down the path that is shifted to the left may collide with the upper right side of the adjustment nail 376 provided on the upper left side of the first through gate 35 and bounce off to the right, causing it to miss the first through gate 35.

Next, the case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 will be described with reference to Figures 50(a) to (c). Figures 50(a) to (c) are front views of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 330 and its periphery.

When the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a at a time when the distance from the free end of the blade member 343 to the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352, as shown in Figure 50 (a).

As shown in FIG. 50(a), even when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352, the rotating body 340 continues to rotate clockwise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(b), as the rotating body 340 rotates, a force is applied to the blade member 343 that tends to rotate the blade member 343 counterclockwise. As a result, the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 344 and enters a displaced state.

A restoring force acts on the displaced blade member 343 from a biasing member (not shown) to return the blade member 343 to its initial state. However, the restoring force of the biasing member acting on the displaced blade member 343 is a weak force that enables the blade member 343 to return to its initial state when no external force is being applied to the blade member 343. For this reason, the force that pushes the game ball B1 to the right as the displaced blade member 343 attempts to return to its initial state is not strong enough to completely stop the movement of the game ball B1.

As the rotation of the rotating body 340 progresses, the displacement of the blade member 343 increases. During this time, the game ball B1 slowly falls downward due to its own weight. The falling speed of the game ball B1 in contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 is slower than the speed at which the blade member 343 advances in the rotation direction as the rotating body 340 rotates. Therefore, as the rotation of the rotating body 340 progresses, the free end of the blade member 343 is positioned lower than the game ball B1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the force applied from the game ball B1 to the blade member 343 is released, and the blade member 343 returns from the displaced state to its initial state. The game ball B1 is transported while being supported on the upper surface of the blade member 343 that has returned to its initial state, and can be discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35 without deviating from the discharge timing of the 1 sec period.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The adjustment mechanism 330 discharges one game ball B1 guided to the adjustment area 330a toward the first through gate 35 at a discharge timing of 1 sec cycle, regardless of the timing at which the game ball B1 is guided to the adjustment area 330a. Therefore, upstream of the adjustment area 330a, the game ball B1 can be discharged at a discharge timing of 1 sec cycle, without adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a. Therefore, compared to a configuration that adjusts the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a, it is possible to generate a consecutive winning period in the low frequency support mode while reducing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

When the game ball B1 is caught between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 when the adjustment mechanism 330 takes in the game ball B1, the rotating body 340 deforms, thereby eliminating the state in which the game ball B1 is caught. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 becomes stuck in a state where it is caught between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352, or the rotating body 340 becomes unable to rotate, and the adjustment mechanism 330 is unable to discharge the game ball B1. This reduces the possibility of a malfunction occurring during play, requiring play to be interrupted in order to resolve the malfunction.

The deformation of the rotating body 340, which is performed to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is trapped, is performed by the rotation of the rotating body 340. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated member in advance to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is trapped. This prevents an increase in the number of members that make up the adjustment mechanism 330, simplifies the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330, and reduces the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330.

The deformation of the rotating body 340 to eliminate the trapped state of the game ball B1 is automatically performed in the same state as the control of the rotating body 340 when the game ball B1 is not trapped. Therefore, the control means of this pachinko machine 10 does not require a means for determining that the game ball B1 is trapped. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of components constituting the adjustment mechanism 330, simplify the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330, compared to a configuration in which the control state of the rotating body 340 is changed to eliminate the trapped state of the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 is trapped.

A gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35. In addition, the game board 320 is provided with an adjustment nail 376 that prevents the game ball B1 from winning the first through gate 35 if the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 deviates from the specified path. As a result, all game balls B1 that enter the adjustment area 330a will win the first through gate 35, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player does not pay attention to the discharge of the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 330. This can increase the player's interest in the game by attracting the player's attention until the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35.

The game board 320 is provided with an electric nail 361 that prevents one of the game balls B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a when two game balls B1 are in a row and attempt to enter the downstream guide area 371a. This reduces the possibility that multiple game balls B1 will be guided into the adjustment area 330a at once.

One game ball B1 can be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 every 0.6 seconds, and one game ball B1 can be discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 every second. Therefore, if the number of game balls B1 entering the adjustment area 330a continues to be greater than the number of game balls B1 moving from the adjustment area 330a to the adjustment area 330a, there is a possibility that the game balls B1 will become stuck in the adjustment area 330a. In response to this, the electric nail 361 is used to limit the game balls B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a located upstream of the adjustment area 330a, thereby reducing the possibility that the game balls B1 will become stuck in the adjustment area 330a.

The electric nail 361 has a width that allows one game ball B1 to pass through, and is provided upstream of the downstream guide area 371a that guides the game ball B1 to the adjustment area 330a. The electric nail 361 is configured to move between an allowance position that allows the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide area 371a and a prohibition position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a. The electric nail 361 that moves to the prohibition position is configured to move the game ball B1 that is prevented from entering the downstream guide area 371a to the right of the downstream guide area 371a. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 takes the prohibition position, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from accumulating around the electric nail 361. In this way, by appropriately dispersing the game ball B1 upstream of the adjustment area 330a, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls B1 from entering the adjustment area 330a in a line.

<Alternatives to the Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment described above, the configuration for limiting the number of game balls B1 entering the downstream guide area 371a is not limited to the electric nail 361. For example, an adjustment rotor having a protrusion may be used as the configuration. Depending on the rotation state of the adjustment rotor, the protrusion of the adjustment rotor may take an allowance position that allows the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide area 371a, or a prohibition position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a. Therefore, the number of game balls B1 entering the downstream guide area 371a can be limited by using the adjustment rotor that rotates at a constant speed.

- In the third embodiment described above, the adjustment nail 376 may not be present on the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is located at a distance from the adjustment mechanism 330 that is greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330, the discharged game ball B1 may miss the first through gate 35. By configuring the positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 to be adjusted so that a portion of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 misses the first through gate 35, the player's interest can also be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 after it is discharged.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configurations different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, the game board 420 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 430 for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. The configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described with reference to Figures 51 and 52. Figure 51 is a front view of the game board 420 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 430 and its periphery.

As shown in FIG. 51, an adjustment mechanism 430 is provided above the first through gate 35 on the game board 420. The adjustment mechanism 430 is provided at a position that is at least the diameter of the game ball B1 away from the first through gate 35. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 430 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. The detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 is described below.

As shown in FIG. 51, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes a rotating body 440 that takes in and discharges the game ball B1, and a guide member 450 that adjusts the timing at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the rotating body 440. As shown in FIG. 52, the adjustment mechanism 430 also includes the adjustment drive unit 184 already described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotating body 440 once every 6 seconds.

First, the configuration of the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to Figures 51 and 52. Figure 52 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the rotating body 440 and the adjustment drive unit 184 when the rotating body 440 is cut by a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420. As shown in Figure 51, the rotating body 440 has a substantially disk-shaped passage forming portion 443, and the passage forming portion 443 has three adjustment passages 444-446 formed therein, each having a passage width that allows the game ball B1 to pass through. The rotating body 440 takes in the game ball B1 into one of the adjustment passages 444-446, and ejects the game ball B1 from an adjustment passage 444-446 different from the adjustment passage 444-446 that took in the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 52, the rotating body 440 is provided with a rotating base body 441 behind the passage forming portion 443, which prevents the game ball B1 in the adjustment passages 444-446 from moving rearward beyond the front surface of the game board 420. The rotating base body 441 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member having a predetermined thickness, and is formed integrally with the passage forming portion 443.

As shown in FIG. 52, a recess 421 is formed in the game board 420 to accommodate the rotating base body 441 in a rotatable manner, and the rotating body 440 is rotatably fixed with the rotating base body 441 accommodated in the recess 421. The passage forming portion 443 exists from the front surface of the rotating base body 441 to near the rear surface of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 52, an adjustment drive unit 184 having an output shaft 184a is disposed behind the rotation base body 441. The rotating body 440 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotation base body 441 is aligned on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184.

The axis of the rotating base body 441 of the rotating body 440 is perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420, and the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60° per second when the adjustment drive unit 184 is driven. The adjustment drive unit 184 in this embodiment uses the same stepping motor as the adjustment drive unit 184 in the first embodiment. The adjustment drive unit 184 is configured so that the output shaft 184a makes one revolution when 500 pulses of excitation signal are sent from the main control device 60, and the angle change based on one pulse of the excitation signal, i.e., the angle change per step, is 0.72°.

As shown in FIG. 51, three entrances 444a to 446a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 as openings that are open outward. The three entrances 444a to 446a are formed so that the centers of the entrances 444a to 446a are equidistantly spaced in the circumferential direction of the passage forming portion 443. The three entrances 444a to 446a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 in the order of the first entrance 444a, second entrance 445a, and third entrance 446a.

The first entrance 444a and the second entrance 445a have a width of 14 mm, which is larger than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball B1. In contrast, the third entrance 446a is smaller than the first entrance 444a and the second entrance 445a and has a width of 11.5 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The first adjustment passage 444 is formed from the first entrance 444a toward the central region of the rotating body 440, and the second adjustment passage 445 is formed from the second entrance 445a toward the central region of the rotating body 440. The third adjustment passage 446 is formed from the third entrance 446a toward the central region of the rotating body 440.

The first adjustment passage 444 has a passage width of 12 mm, which gradually widens near the first entrance 444a toward the first entrance 444a. Similarly, the second adjustment passage 445 has a passage width of 12 mm, which gradually widens near the second entrance 445a toward the second entrance 445a. On the other hand, the third adjustment passage 446 has a passage width of 12 mm, which gradually narrows near the third entrance 446a toward the third entrance 446a.

If the shapes around the three entrances 444a to 446a were all the same, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 would be monotonous. In contrast, by making the shape around the third entrance 446a different from the shapes around the first entrance 444a and the second entrance 445a, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440.

As shown in FIG. 51, the first adjustment passage 444, the second adjustment passage 445, and the third adjustment passage 446 formed in the passage forming portion 443 are straight passages that are open toward the front. As shown in FIG. 52, the rear sides of the three adjustment passages 444 to 446 are defined by the front surface of the rotating base body 441, and the front sides are defined by the rear surface of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 51, an intersection space 443a that is slightly larger than the game ball B1 is provided at the center of the passage forming portion 443. The first adjustment passage 444 is a passage that connects the first entrance/exit 444a and the intersection space 443a, and the second adjustment passage 445 is a passage that connects the second entrance/exit 445a and the intersection space 443a. In addition, the third adjustment passage 446 is a passage that connects the third entrance/exit 446a and the intersection space 443a.

The game ball B1 can move from each of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 to the intersection space 443a, and can also move from the intersection space 443a to each of the adjustment passages 444 to 446. Furthermore, each of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 has a passage length that can accommodate two game balls B1.

As shown in FIG. 51, the passage width of each adjustment passage 444-446 is constant, except near each entrance/exit 444a-446a. Here, the reference line passing through the center of the first adjustment passage 444 is defined as the first center line 444b, and the reference line passing through the center of the second adjustment passage 445 is defined as the second center line 445b. In addition, the reference line passing through the center of the third adjustment passage 446 is defined as the third center line 446b.

The first adjustment passage 444 extends in a direction in which the first center line 444b intersects with the inner wall of the second adjustment passage 445, and the second adjustment passage 445 extends in a direction in which the second center line 445b intersects with the inner wall of the third adjustment passage 446. And the third adjustment passage 446 extends in a direction in which the third center line 446b intersects with the inner wall of the first adjustment passage 444.

In other words, the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the first adjustment passage 444 is the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445, and the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the second adjustment passage 445 is the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446. Also, the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the third adjustment passage 446 is the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444. Here, as shown in FIG. 51, each of the center lines 444b to 446b passes near the center of the passage forming portion 443.

Next, the guide member 450 that is provided on the game board 420 close to the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 is provided at the lower right of the rotating body 440.

As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 has a plate-shaped guide base body 451 having a predetermined thickness. A guide recess (not shown) capable of housing the guide base body 451 without any gaps is formed in the game board 420. The guide member 450 is fixed by nailing the guide base body 451 to the game board 420 with the guide base body 451 housed in the guide recess. When the guide member 450 is fixed to the game board 420, the front surface of the guide base body 451 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 420.

The guide member 450 also has an upright wall 452 that protrudes vertically forward from the front surface of the guide base body 451. The upright wall 452 is formed integrally with the guide base body 451 and extends to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 51, the upright wall 452 is formed in a manner that follows the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 from the right of the rotation center 440a of the rotating body 440 to the lower right.

Therefore, the upright wall 452 blocks one of the entrances 444a to 446a from the rotation state in which the rotating body 440 rotates from one of the entrances 444a to 446a open to the right until the entrance 444a to 446a opens diagonally downward to the right. This prevents the game ball B1 present in the entrance 444a to 446a from falling downward.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 around the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, multiple guide nails 472 are provided near the top of the rotating body 440 to guide the game ball B1 flowing down from above to one of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440.

The multiple guide nails 472 form a left guide nail row 473 that guides the game ball B1 that is above the rotating body 440 and flows down to the left of the center of the rotating body 440 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440, and a right guide nail row 474 that guides the game ball B1 that is above the rotating body 440 and flows down to the right of the center of the rotating body 440 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440.

The distance between the guide nail 472 located at the lowest position in the left guide nail row 473 and the guide nail 472 located at the lowest position in the right guide nail row 474 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when any of the entrances 444a to 446a in the rotating body 440 is open facing upward, the game ball B1 guided by the guide nail 472 enters through that entrance 444a to 446a.

As shown in FIG. 51, the distance from the lowest guide nails 472 in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 to the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. In a rotating state in which none of the entrances 444a to 446a in the rotating body 440 are open upward, the game ball B1 guided to the top of the rotating body 440 by the guide nails 472 cannot enter the entrances 444a to 446a.

In this case, a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is provided between the guide nails 472 located at the lowest position in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 and the outer periphery of the rotating body 440, so that the game ball B1 that is not taken into the inside of the rotating body 440 from the entrances and exits 444a to 446a can escape to the game areas PA on the left and right sides of the rotating body 440. Therefore, the game ball B1 that does not enter the upper part of the rotating body 440 does not become stuck.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, a left guard nail 475 is provided on the upper left side of the rotating body 440 to prevent the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the diagonally upper left of the rotating body 440 from entering through the entrances 444a to 446a that are open toward the upper left, and a right guard nail 476 is provided on the upper right side of the rotating body 440 to prevent the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the diagonally upper right of the rotating body 440 from entering through the entrances 444a to 446a that are open toward the upper right.

The left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476 limit the entrances 444a to 446a through which the game ball B1 can be taken in to those that are open upward. This prevents multiple game balls B1 from being taken into the rotor 440 through multiple entrances 444a to 446a at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 51, a space wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476 and the rotating body 440. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is not guided to the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430 by the left guide nail row 473 or the right guide nail row 474 and not taken in can flow downstream through the space between the rotating body 440 and the left guard nail 475, or the space between the rotating body 440 and the right guard nail 476.

As shown in FIG. 51, a guard nail 471 is provided to the upper right of the first through gate 35 and to the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 430 to prevent game balls B1 other than the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 from entering between the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 and entering the first through gate 35.

By limiting the game balls B1 that can enter the first through gate 35 to those discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35 at any timing other than the target winning timing during the consecutive winning period. This allows for a configuration in which regular power release wins occur consecutively in the regular power release lottery held during the consecutive winning period.

On the other hand, at the top left of the first through gate 35 and at the bottom left of the adjustment mechanism 430, a guard nail 471 is provided at a distance to allow the game ball B1 that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 toward the bottom left and misses the first through gate 35 without winning to escape to the left of the first through gate 35.

The guard nail 471 prevents game balls B1 other than the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 from flowing down from the upper left of the first through gate 35 and entering the first through gate 35. In addition, game ball B1 that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 and misses the first through gate 35 to the left does not collide with the guard nail 471 and bounce back toward the first through gate 35 again.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that enters through one of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotor 440 above the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described. First, the movement of the game ball B1 that enters through the first entrance 444a will be described with reference to Figures 53(a) to (d). Figures 53(a) to (d) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged view.

Figure 53 (a) shows a rotating state in which the first entrance/exit 444a is open facing upward. As shown in Figure 53 (a), in a rotating state in which the first entrance/exit 444a is open facing upward, the game ball B1 is guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (Figure 51), and is thereby able to enter the first entrance/exit 444a. The game ball B1 that enters through the first entrance/exit 444a moves within the first adjustment passage 444.

When the first entrance/exit 444a is open facing upward, the first adjustment passage 444 is inclined downward, and guides the game ball B1 from the upper first entrance/exit 444a toward the lower intersecting space 443a. As already explained in FIG. 51, the first center line 444b of the first adjustment passage 444 intersects with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445. Therefore, the movement direction of the game ball B1 moving inside the first adjustment passage 444 is the direction in which it comes into contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445.

Figure 53(b) shows the movement of the game ball B1 after it has been guided into the intersection space 443a. As shown in Figure 53(b), the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise while the game ball B1, which has entered through the first entrance/exit 444a, passes through the first adjustment passage 444, which has a passage length approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and reaches the intersection space 443a.

Even when the rotating body 440 rotates, the positional relationship in which the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists on the extension line of the first adjustment passage 444 remains unchanged. Also, as already explained, the second entrance/exit 445a exists at a position rotated 120° from the first entrance/exit 444a around the center of the rotating body 440. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(b), at the timing when the game ball B1 exists in the intersection space 443a, the second adjustment passage 445 has an inclination that faces diagonally downward to the right from the intersection space 443a.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), after entering the intersection space 443a from the first adjustment passage 444, the game ball B1 comes into contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 and is guided into the second adjustment passage 445 toward the second entrance/exit 445a.

Figure 53 (c) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the second entrance/exit 445a. As shown in Figure 53 (c), at the time when the game ball B1 is guided to the second entrance/exit 445a by the second adjustment passage 445, at least a portion of the second entrance/exit 445a is blocked by the upright wall 452. At that time, there is no gap in the second entrance/exit 445a through which the game ball B1 can pass.

As a result, the game ball B1 moves in the rotational direction as the rotating body 440 rotates, and waits until a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass appears at the second entrance/exit 445a. As already explained, the rotational speed of the rotating body 440 is constant. Furthermore, the position of the standing wall 452 does not change. As a result, while the game ball B1 is waiting at the second entrance/exit 445a, there are also regular intervals when a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass appears at the second entrance/exit 445a.

As shown in Figures 53(a) and (b), when the first entrance 444a is open facing upward, the second entrance 445a is already blocked by the standing wall 452. When each of the entrances 444a to 446a is open facing right, the standing wall 452 blocks at least a portion of the entrances 444a to 446a, preventing the game ball B1 from being discharged to the right. Therefore, the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 440 will not be discharged from above the standing wall 452.

Figure 53 (d) shows the movement of game ball B1 after a gap through which game ball B1 can pass appears in second entrance 445a. As shown in Figure 53 (d), when a gap through which game ball B1 can pass appears in second entrance 445a, game ball B1 loses support and falls downward due to its own weight.

The timing at which a gap appears in the second entrance 445a through which the game ball B1 can pass and the position at that timing are constant. The adjustment mechanism 430 is set so that the position is directly above the first through gate 35. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(d), the game ball B1 discharged from the position at the timing at which it is discharged from the second entrance 445a falls downward and enters the first through gate 35.

However, at the time of discharge, the distance from the second entrance 445a to the first through gate 35 is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance 445a has a high probability of winning at the first through gate 35, but the winning probability is not 100%.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that enters through the third entrance 446a will be described. When the third entrance 446a is open facing upward, the game ball B1 is guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (Figure 51) and enters the third adjustment passage 446 through the third entrance 446a.

When the third entrance/exit 446a is open upward, the inclination of the third adjustment passage 446 is the same as the inclination of the first adjustment passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53(a). Therefore, the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 exists in the direction of movement of the game ball B1 moving through the third adjustment passage 446.

The positional relationship between the third adjustment passage 446 and the first adjustment passage 444 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445 already described with reference to FIG. 53(b). Therefore, the game ball B1 that passes through the third adjustment passage 446 and enters the intersection space 443a comes into contact with the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 and is guided toward the first entrance/exit 444a.

As already explained, the shape of the first entrance 444a is the same as the shape of the second entrance 445a. Therefore, the timing and position of the game ball B1 discharged from the first entrance 444a are the same as the timing and position of the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance 445a already explained with reference to FIG. 53(d). The game ball B1 discharged from the first entrance 444a has a high probability of winning in the first through gate 35.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that enters through the second entrance 445a will be described. When the second entrance 445a is open facing upward, the game ball B1 is guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (Figure 51) and enters the second adjustment passage 445 through the second entrance 445a.

When the second entrance/exit 445a is open upward, the inclination of the second adjustment passage 445 is the same as the inclination of the first adjustment passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53(a). In addition, the positional relationship between the second adjustment passage 445 and the third adjustment passage 446 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445 already described with reference to FIG. 53(b). Therefore, the game ball B1 that passes through the second adjustment passage 445 and enters the intersection space 443a comes into contact with the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446 and is guided toward the third entrance/exit 446a.

Here, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance 446a will be explained with reference to Figures 54(a) and (b). Figures 54(a) and (b) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged view.

Figure 54 (a) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the third entrance/exit 446a. As shown in Figure 54 (a), the game ball B1 is guided to the third entrance/exit 446a by the third adjustment passage 446. At the time when the game ball B1 reaches the third entrance/exit 446a, at least a portion of the third entrance/exit 446a is blocked by the upright wall 452. There is no gap in the third entrance/exit 446a through which the game ball B1 can pass. Therefore, the game ball B1 will wait at the third entrance/exit 446a until a gap through which it can pass is created.

Figure 54 (b) shows the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance 446a. As already explained, the third entrance 446a is narrower than the first entrance 444a and the second entrance 445a. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the third entrance 446a, the game ball B1 is easily affected by the passage wall that is located on the rear side of the rotation direction in the third adjustment passage 446.

As already explained, there is a gap of at least the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 54(b), at the timing of the discharge of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is pushed leftward from the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446, so that the course of the game ball B1 after discharge may shift leftward and miss the first through gate 35. For this reason, the probability of the game ball B1 entering from the second entrance 445a and discharged from the third entrance 446a entering the first through gate 35 is lower than the probability of the game ball B1 entering from the first entrance 444a and discharged from the second entrance 445a entering the first through gate 35, and the probability of the game ball B1 entering from the third entrance 446a and discharged from the first entrance 444a entering the first through gate 35.

Here, if the game balls B1 flow down in a line, there is a possibility that both the first game ball B1 and the second game ball B1 will enter the same entrance 444a-446a that faces upward. In this case, the two game balls B1 are guided to the same entrance 444a-446a and are discharged from the same entrance 444a-446a. The timing and direction in which the first game ball B1 is discharged are as already explained in Figures 53(d) and 54(b), and the game ball B1 discharged from the first entrance 444a or the second entrance 445a has a high probability of winning the first through gate 35, while the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance 446a has a high probability of missing the first through gate 35.

On the other hand, the second game ball B1 is located further inside the rotating body 440 than the first game ball B1 at the time the first game ball B1 is discharged. Therefore, the discharge timing of the second game ball B1 is delayed from the discharge timing of the first game ball B1. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 440 is ahead of the discharge timing of the first game ball B1, and the second game ball B1 is discharged in a state in which the discharge direction has moved to the left. Therefore, regardless of which of the entrances 444a to 446a it is discharged from, there is a high probability that the second game ball B1 will miss the left of the first through gate 35.

In this way, even if two game balls B1 flow down the game area PA in a connected state, the possibility of the game ball B1 entering the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the target winning period in the consecutive winning period is set to be low. For this reason, even when the adjustment mechanism 430 in this embodiment is used, when a consecutive winning period occurs, normal power release wins will occur consecutively.

The adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotor 440 so that the timing at which the game ball B1 can be discharged from the rotor 440 occurs once every 2 seconds. By configuring the adjustment drive unit 184 to rotate the rotor 440 slowly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 that collides with the entrances 444a-446a moving in the rotational direction at the top of the adjustment mechanism 430 is strongly rebounded to the right, causing a strange feeling to the player.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The game ball B1 is taken in by one of the adjustment passages 444-446 and is discharged from an entrance 444a-446a that is different from the adjustment passage 444-446 that took in the game ball B1. In a configuration in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held in the entrance 444a-446a that took in the game ball B1, a fall prevention means is required to be provided around the rotating body 440 to prevent the game ball B1 from falling from the entrance 444a-446a during rotation. In this case, the game ball B1 may become caught between the rotating body 440 and the fall prevention means, hindering the rotation of the rotating body 440.

In response to this, by configuring the game ball B1 to pass through the inside of the passage forming portion 443 and be discharged from an entrance/exit 444a-446a different from the entrance/exit 444a-446a through which it was taken in, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction will occur during play, requiring the game to be interrupted to resolve the malfunction. In addition, by preventing an increase in the number of components that make up the adjustment mechanism 430, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 and reduce the manufacturing costs of the adjustment mechanism 430.

The rotating body 440 is configured to discharge the game ball B1 before the entrances 444a-446a that took in the game ball B1 facing upwards are oriented in a direction that allows the game ball B1 to be discharged. This reduces the time it takes from taking in the game ball B1 to discharging it, compared to a configuration in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held in the entrances 444a-446a that took in the game ball B1. This reduces the possibility that the player's attention will shift to another location between the time the game ball B1 is taken in and the time it is discharged, causing the player to lose focus on the adjustment mechanism 430.

The adjustment mechanism 430 is provided with an upright wall 452 that prevents the game ball B1 guided to the entrances 444a to 446a from falling downward until the discharge timing at which the game ball B1 can enter the first through gate 35. By using the upright wall 452, the number of game balls B1 that are discharged downward earlier than the discharge timing and miss the first through gate 35 can be reduced. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B1 will enter the first through gate 35 outside of the target winning period during the consecutive winning period, and increases the probability of an open win if a win occurs during the consecutive winning period. This increases the player's expectations for the consecutive winning period, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Since the distance between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430, the discharged game ball B1 may miss the first through gate 35. The width of the third entrance 446a is set narrower than the width of the first entrance 444a and the width of the second entrance 445a. For this reason, the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance 446a will miss the first through gate 35 is higher than the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance 445a will miss the first through gate 35, and the possibility that the game ball B1 taken in from the third entrance 446a will miss the first through gate 35. This allows all game balls B1 taken in by the adjustment mechanism 430 to enter the first through gate 35, and prevents the player from focusing only on the intake of the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 430 and not on the discharge. By keeping the player's attention focused until the moment the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The game ball B1 taken into the first adjustment passage 444 from the first entrance 444a is guided to the second adjustment passage 445 and discharged from the second entrance 445a, and the game ball B1 taken into the second adjustment passage 445 from the second entrance 445a is guided to the third adjustment passage 446 and discharged from the third entrance 446a. Also, the game ball B1 taken into the third adjustment passage 446 from the third entrance 446a is guided to the first adjustment passage 444 and discharged from the first entrance 444a. In this way, since the game ball B1 taken in from the entrances 444a to 446a moves through the combination of adjustment passages 444 to 446 that can discharge the game ball B1 in the shortest distance, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 taken in with the rotation of the rotating body 440 is not easily discharged and repeatedly rises and falls within the adjustment passages 444 to 446. This prevents a decrease in the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 toward the first through gate 35, and prevents the player from losing interest in the adjustment mechanism 430.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

The game board 520 of this embodiment is provided with an adjustment device 540 for adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35. The configuration of the adjustment device 540 and the periphery of the adjustment device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board 520 showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first through gate 35 and the adjustment device 540.

As shown in FIG. 55, on the game board 520, an adjustment mechanism 530 is provided above the first through gate 35, which is composed of an adjustment device 540 and an electric nail 560 that prevents a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 and heading toward the first through gate 35 from entering the first through gate 35. Here, the electric nail 560 is the same member as the electric nail 361 already described in FIG. 47 of the third embodiment above.

First, the adjustment device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. As shown in FIG. 55, the adjustment device 540 includes an adjustment unit 546 that allows the game ball B1 to enter the adjustment device 540 by opening the adjustment unit 540 and prohibits the game ball B1 from entering the adjustment device 540 by closing the adjustment unit 540, an adjustment drive unit 547 that executes the transition from the closed state to the open state and the transition from the open state to the closed state in the adjustment unit 546, and a guide member 541 that guides the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment device 540 toward the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 55, the adjustment device 540 has a plate-shaped base body 542 having a predetermined thickness. The game board 520 is provided with a base recess (not shown) capable of accommodating the base body 542 without any gaps. The adjustment device 540 is fixed to the game board 520 by nailing the base body 542 to the game board 520 when the base body 542 is accommodated in the base recess. When the guide member 541 is fixed to the game board 520, the front surface of the base body 542 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 520.

As shown in FIG. 55, the guide member 541 has a passage forming portion 543 formed in a manner that protrudes vertically forward from the front surface of the base body 542. The passage forming portion 543 exists from the center to the lower portion in the vertical direction of the front surface of the base body 542, and also exists from the front surface of the base body 542 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). A guide passage 545 is formed in the passage forming portion 543 to guide the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35.

The guide passage 545 is formed by providing a through hole that passes through the passage forming portion 543 in the vertical direction, and has a passage cross-section that allows one game ball B1 to pass through but does not allow multiple game balls B1 to pass through at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 55, the guide passage 545 is a straight passage leading to the first through gate 35. The guide passage 545 has a passage length of approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and is capable of directing the game ball B1 being discharged. The distance from the lower end of the guide passage 525 to the upper end of the first through gate 35 is set to approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 545 may or may not enter the first through gate 35 depending on the position of the electric nail 560.

As shown in FIG. 55, the adjustment unit 546 is located at the top of the base body 542, and is located forward of the front surface of the base body 542. The adjustment drive unit 547 is located behind the adjustment unit 546, at the rear of the base body 542. The adjustment unit 546 is connected to the adjustment drive unit 547 mounted on the rear side of the game board 520, and is driven by the adjustment drive unit 547 to take either a closed state or an open state. When the adjustment unit 546 is in the closed state, the game ball B1 cannot enter the guide passage 545, and when the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state, the game ball B1 can enter the guide passage 545.

The adjustment drive unit 547 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and receives the drive signal output from the MPU 62. The adjustment drive unit 547 keeps the adjustment unit 546 in a closed state when the drive signal is in a LOW state, and opens the adjustment unit 546 when the drive signal becomes a HIGH state.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) executed at a cycle of 4 msec, the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) raises the drive signal output to the adjustment drive unit 547 from a LOW state to a HIGH state when it is the timing to switch the adjustment unit 546 from a closed state to an open state, and lowers the drive signal output to the adjustment drive unit 547 from a HIGH state to a LOW state when it is the timing to switch the adjustment unit 546 from an open state to a closed state.

Based on the drive signal input from the main CPU 63, the adjustment drive unit 547 repeats the opening and closing operation of the adjustment unit 546, closing the adjustment unit 546 for 0.95 seconds and opening the adjustment unit 546 for 0.05 seconds. As a result, the guide passage 545 is in a state in which it can take in the game ball B1 in a 1 second cycle, and can discharge the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 in approximately a 1 second cycle.

The closed and open states of the adjustment unit 546 will now be described with reference to Figures 56(a) and (b). Figure 56(a) is a front view of the adjustment device 540 in the closed state, and Figure 56(b) is a front view of the adjustment device 540 in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the adjustment unit 546 is located at the upper left of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and includes a left-side pivot shaft 548 extending in the front-to-rear direction, and a left-side adjustment member 549 of a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape that is rotatably fixed to the left-side pivot shaft 548. The left-side adjustment member 549 is present from the front of the game board 520 (FIG. 55) to near the rear of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the left adjustment member 549 has a right side surface 549a located on the inside and a left side surface 549b located on the outside of the adjustment unit 546 in the closed state. In the adjustment unit 546 in the closed state, the right side surface 549a and the left side surface 549b are inclined downward and to the left.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), when the adjustment unit 546 transitions from a closed state to an open state, the left adjustment member 549 rotates counterclockwise around the left pivot shaft 548. When the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state, the left adjustment member 549 is in a state in which its right side surface 549a is inclined downward and to the right, and its left side surface 549b is inclined downward and to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the adjustment unit 546 is located at the upper right of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and includes a right-side pivot shaft 551 extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side adjustment member 552 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that is fixed in a rotatable manner to the right-side pivot shaft 551. The right-side adjustment member 552 is located from the front of the game board 520 to near the rear of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the right adjustment member 552 has a left side surface 552a located on the inside and a right side surface 552b located on the outside of the adjustment unit 546 in the closed state. In the adjustment unit 546 in the closed state, the left side surface 552a and the right side surface 552b are inclined downward and to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), when the adjustment unit 546 transitions from a closed state to an open state, the right adjustment member 552 rotates clockwise around the right rotation shaft 551. When the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state, the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward and to the left, and the right side surface 552b is inclined downward and to the left.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), when the adjustment unit 546 is in the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 is narrow enough that a game ball B1 cannot fit in the gap. As already explained, when the adjustment unit 546 is in the closed state, the left side surface 549b of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined downward to the left, allowing a game ball B1 that comes into contact with the left side surface 549b to escape to the lower left. In addition, the right side surface 552b of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward to the right, allowing a game ball B1 that comes into contact with the right side surface 552b to escape to the lower right.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the open state of the adjustment unit 546, a space wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552. As already explained, in the open state of the adjustment unit 546, the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined downward to the right, so that the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the right side surface 549a is bounced downward and to the right and enters the guide passage 545. In addition, the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward to the left, so that the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the left side surface 552a is bounced downward and to the left and enters the guide passage 545.

In addition, as the adjustment unit 546 transitions from the open state to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 gradually narrows. The adjustment unit 546 has a shape such that, before the distance between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 becomes narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1, the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined downward and to the left, and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward and to the right.

As shown in FIG. 55, the electric nail 560 is connected to a nail drive unit 560a, and takes a prohibited position where it comes into contact with the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 to change the course of the game ball B1 and prevent the game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35, and a permitted position where it deviates from the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 and allows the game ball B1 to enter the first through gate 35.

The nail drive unit 560a receives a nail drive signal output from an output port of the MPU 62. When the nail drive signal is in a LOW state, the nail drive unit 560a keeps the electric nail 560 in a prohibited position, and when the nail drive signal is in a HI state, moves the electric nail 560 to an allowed position. The switching of the electric nail 560 between the prohibited position and the allowed position in the nail drive unit 560a is performed in conjunction with the switching of the adjustment unit 546 in the adjustment drive unit 547 between the closed state and the open state.

Specifically, in the main CPU 63, the nail drive signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state in synchronization with the drive signal being raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state. Therefore, the electric nail 560 moves from the prohibited position to the permitted position in synchronization with the timing at which the adjustment unit 546 transitions from a closed state to an open state. The electric nail 560 is always in the permitted position while the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state. Therefore, while the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 is in a state in which it can enter the first through gate 35.

In the main CPU 63, the nail drive signal falls from a HIGH state to a LOW state at a later time than the drive signal falls from a HIGH state to a LOW state. Therefore, the electric nail 560 returns from the permitted position to the prohibited position slightly later than the timing at which the adjustment unit 546 returns from the open state to the closed state. The timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is the timing at which, in the open state of the adjustment unit 546 that lasts for 0.05 sec, the game ball B1 that entered the guide passage 525 within 0.04 sec from the start of the open state passes to the left of the electric nail 560 in the permitted position and enters the first through gate 35.

The timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is when the electric nail 560 is temporarily sandwiched between the adjustment unit 546, which is in the open state, and returns to the closed state, thereby preventing the game ball B1 that is then taken into the guide passage 525 from entering the first through gate 35.

Now, with reference to Figures 57(a) to (d), we will explain the situation in which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 is prevented from entering the first through gate 35 by the electric nail 560. Figures 57(a) to (d) are front views of the game board 520, showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 530 and its periphery.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), when a game ball B1 enters the adjustment unit 546 in an intermediate state transitioning from an open state to a closed state, the game ball B1 may become sandwiched between the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552. In this state, if the following conditions are met: the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 is tilted downward and to the left, and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is tilted downward and to the right, and the contact position with the adjustment unit 546 is above the center of gravity of the game ball B1, the sandwiched game ball B1 is pushed downward by the force of the adjustment unit 546 returning to the closed state, and enters the guide passage 525.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the motorized nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the game ball B1 held by the adjustment part 546 passes the position of the motorized nail 560. Therefore, the game ball B1 held by the adjustment part 546 in the intermediate state collides with the motorized nail 560 that has returned to the prohibited position downstream of the guide passage 525 and falls off to the left of the first through gate 35.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the interval between launches of the game ball B1 in the game ball launching mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is at least 0.6 sec. A number of game balls B1 may flow down toward the adjustment section 546 of the adjustment device 540 in a line. As already explained, the duration of the open state of the adjustment section 546 is set to 0.05 sec. Therefore, when two game balls B1 are trying to enter the adjustment section 546 in a line within 0.05 sec, as shown in FIG. 57(c), after the first game ball B1 enters the guide passage 525 with the adjustment section 546 in the open state, the second game ball B1 may be caught in the adjustment section 546 that is trying to return from the open state to the closed state.

In this case, when the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment section 546 enters the guide passage 525, the electric nail 560 is in the permitted position at the time when the first game ball B1 reaches the position of the electric nail 560. Therefore, the first game ball B1 can pass to the left of the electric nail 560 and enter the first through gate 35.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the motorized nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment unit 546 reaches the position of the motorized nail 560. As a result, the second game ball B1 collides with the motorized nail 560. In this way, the motorized nail 560 prevents the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment unit 546 from entering the first through gate 35. This prevents the second game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35 at a timing that is shifted from the target winning period during the consecutive winning period, resulting in a losing result in the normal power opening lottery.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The adjustment mechanism 530 is configured not to allow the game ball B1 to enter the guide passage 525 when the adjustment section 546 is in a closed state. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B1 will enter the first through gate 35 at a time that does not result in a normal power release win during the consecutive winning period. This increases the probability of a normal power release win occurring during the consecutive winning period. In this way, by increasing the player's expectations for the consecutive winning period, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The distance between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, and an electric nail 560 is provided in the middle of the path along which the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 flows down toward the first through gate 35, and moves between a prohibited position that blocks the path and an allowed position that allows the game ball B1 to pass through the path. The electric nail 560 is configured to prevent the game ball B1, which enters the guide passage 525 at the end of the period during which the adjustment unit 546 remains open, from entering the first through gate 35.

If all game balls B1 taken into the guide passage 525 enter the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player will only pay attention to the intake of game balls B1 by the adjustment mechanism 530 and not to the discharge. In contrast, by configuring the guide passage 525 to prevent some of the game balls B1 from entering the first through gate 35, the player's interest in the area around the adjustment mechanism 530 can be maintained until the moment they enter the first through gate 35, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

When the adjustment unit 546 is in an open state, after the first game ball B1 is taken into the guide passage 525, if the second game ball B1 connected to the first game ball B1 is sandwiched between the adjustment unit 546 in the intermediate state, the adjustment mechanism 530 is configured such that the motorized nail 560 in the prohibited position prevents the second game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B1 will enter the first through gate 35 at a timing that does not result in a normal power release win during the consecutive winning period. This increases the probability of a normal power release win occurring during the consecutive winning period. In this way, the player's expectations for the consecutive winning period are increased, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Alternatives to the Fifth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the adjustment drive unit 547 may not be provided, and the adjustment unit 546 may remain in an open state and not move. In this case, since the adjustment unit 546 does not take a closed state, the game ball B1 can always enter the guide passage 525. When the electric nail 560 is in a prohibited position, the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 collides with the electric nail 560, and deviates from the path toward the first through gate 35. On the other hand, when the electric nail 560 is in a permitted position, the game ball B1 passes to the left of the electric nail 560 and can enter the first through gate 35. For example, the nail drive unit 560a is configured to cause the electric nail 560 to repeatedly move between a prohibited position for 0.95 sec and a permitted position for 0.05 sec, so that the adjustment mechanism 530 can provide the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 in a 1 sec cycle.

- In the fifth embodiment described above, an escape passage may be formed behind the game board 520, and the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment unit 546 may be allowed to escape to the rear of the game board 520. Specifically, a passage entrance is formed as an opening facing forward in an area of the game board 520 located behind the adjustment unit 546. The game board 520 is provided with an escape passage that guides the game ball B1 taken in from the passage entrance downward, and a passage exit that discharges the game ball B1 guided to the escape passage to the front of the game board 520.

When the adjustment unit 546 is clamping the game ball B1, the right side of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined leftward toward the rear, and the left side of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined rightward toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 clamped between the adjustment units 546 is guided to the passage entrance formed behind the adjustment unit 546 as the adjustment unit 546 transitions to a closed state. The game ball B1 that enters the escape passage from the passage entrance is guided downward by the escape passage. The game ball B1 is discharged from the passage exit and is again positioned in front of the game board 520.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the relationship between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35 may be adjusted to allow the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 to enter the first through gate 35 or not to enter the first through gate 35. Specifically, the guide passage 525 is provided diagonally above the left of the first through gate 35, and a gap is provided between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35 that is greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball B1. In this case, even if there is no electric nail 560 between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, the discharged game ball B1 can enter the first through gate 35 or not to enter the first through gate 35 depending on the speed at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the guide passage 525. By leaving the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 may miss the first through gate 35, the player's interest can also be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 after it is discharged.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, a second operating port 582 is provided in the right area PA3 of the play area PA, and a prize distribution device 583 is provided below the second operating port 582. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 580 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board 580. As shown in FIG. 58, the game area PA is composed of an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located to the left of the variable display unit 36, a right area PA3 located to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36.

As explained in the first embodiment above, a first through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2, and an adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35. The winning timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 can enter the first through gate 35 occurs in 1-second cycles. In addition, the winning target period during which the normal power release is won in the normal power release lottery, which is held in response to the entry into the first through gate 35, also occurs in 1-second cycles. For this reason, if the winning timing overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes a consecutive winning period, and if the winning timing does not overlap with the target period, it becomes a consecutive non-winning period.

As shown in FIG. 58, the game board 580, like the game board 24 in the first embodiment, has a passage entrance 171, an escape passage 172, a passage exit 173, and an exit roof 174 around the adjustment mechanism 180. Therefore, a game ball B1 that flows down toward the adjustment mechanism 180 but is not taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171. The game ball B1 is then guided by the escape passage 172 to the passage exit 173, and is discharged from the passage exit 173 toward the front of the game board 580.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first operating port 581 is provided in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 581 does not have a member for opening and closing the first operating port 581, and is open upward. As shown in FIG. 58, the variable display unit 36 has a stage 36a through which the game ball B1 can pass and from which the game ball B1 can be discharged. The variable display unit 36 has a guide passage formed to allow the game ball B1 to flow into the stage 36a. The game ball B1 that flows onto the stage 36a and is discharged from the center of the stage 36a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 falls from directly above the first operating port 581 toward the first operating port 581. For this reason, the game ball B1 that is discharged from the center of the stage 36a is more likely to enter the first operating port 581.

Because the first operating port 581 is provided in the lower area PA4, the game ball B1 can enter the first operating port 581 in both cases where the launching operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and where the launching operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. However, since the entrance to the guide passage to the stage 36a is provided in the left area PA2 and not in the right area PA3, it is easier for the game ball B1 to enter the first operating port 581 by flowing down the left area PA2 than by flowing down the right area PA3. In addition, the arrangement of the game parts and nails 24b in the left area PA2 and right area PA3 is set so that it is easier for the game ball B1 to enter the first operating port 581 by flowing down the left area PA2 than by flowing down the right area PA3. And, the game ball B1 that flows down the right area PA3 rarely enters the first operating port 581.

As shown in FIG. 58, a second operating port 582 is provided in the right area PA3. The second operating port 582 is provided so that if the launch operating device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, a winning is not possible, but if the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3, a winning is possible.

The configuration of the second operating port 582 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIGS. 59(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second operating port 582. The second operating port 582 is provided with a normal power attachment 582a that serves as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right.

The normal power device 582a is connected to a drive unit 582b for normal power mounted on the back side of the game board 580, and is driven by the drive unit 582b for normal power to be placed in either the closed state shown in FIG. 59(a) or the open state shown in FIG. 59(b). When the normal power device 582a is in the closed state, the game ball B1 cannot enter the second operating port 582, and when the normal power device 582a is in the open state, it becomes possible for the game ball B1 to enter the second operating port 582. Incidentally, when in the open state, the normal power device 582a protrudes toward the game area PA side and guides the game ball B1 to enter the second operating port 582. The second operating port 582 is provided with a detection sensor 582c for detecting the game ball B1 that has entered the second operating port 582. The detection sensor 582c is connected to an input port of the MPU 62 (Figure 12), and the main CPU 63 (Figure 12) detects a winning entry into the second operating port 582 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 582c.

As shown in FIG. 58, the second through gate 39 is provided above the second operating port 582 in the right area PA3. The second through gate 39 is provided at a position where it is not possible to win when the launch operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and is possible to win when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and the game ball B1 that has won at the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after winning. This allows the game ball B1 that has won at the second through gate 39 to win at the second operating port 582. The second through gate 39 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 that has won at the second through gate 39. The detection sensor is connected to an input port of the MPU 62 (Figure 12), and the main CPU 63 (Figure 12) detects the entry of a prize into the second through gate 39 based on the detection information from the detection sensor.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the normal power release lottery is executed when the game ball B1 enters either the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39. If the normal power release lottery is won, the normal power device 582a of the second operating port 582 is switched from the closed state to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special symbol display section 584 and a second special symbol display section 585 are provided at the bottom right of the game board 580. In the first special symbol display section 584, a winning lottery is held in response to a win in the first operating port 581, and a varying or predetermined display of the pattern is performed, and a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, in the second special symbol display section 585, a winning lottery is held in response to a win in the second operating port 582, and a varying or predetermined display of the pattern is performed, and a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special chart reserve display section 586 is provided adjacent to the first special chart display section 584, and a second special chart reserve display section 587 is provided adjacent to the second special chart display section 585. The first special chart reserve display section 586 displays the number of game balls B1 that have entered the first operating port 581, up to a maximum of four, and the second special chart reserve display section 587 displays the number of game balls B1 that have entered the second operating port 582, up to a maximum of four.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the lower area PA4, below the first operating port 581 and above the outlet 24a, the special electric winning device 32 already described in the first embodiment is provided. The special electric winning device 32 can win a prize both when the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2 and when the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the right area PA3, a distribution winning device 583 is provided below the second operating port 582. The distribution winning device 583 is unable to win a prize when the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, but is able to win a prize when the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3.

A winning lottery is executed in response to a winning entry into either the first operating port 581 or the second operating port 582. If the winning lottery results in a big win, the system transitions to the open/close execution mode already described in the first embodiment. This causes the special electric winning device 32 to open, allowing the game ball B1 to win into the special electric winning device 32. In addition, the winning lottery executed in response to a winning entry into the second operating port 582 has a small win result in addition to a big win result. If the winning lottery executed in response to a winning entry into the second operating port 582 results in a small win result, the system transitions to a branching execution mode in which a winning entry into the distribution winning device 583 is possible.

Here, the prize-winning device 583 will be described with reference to Figs. 60(a) and (b). Fig. 60(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device 583 as seen from the side, and Fig. 60(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device 583 as seen from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the sorting and winning device 583 is formed with a sorting inlet 591 large enough for the game ball B1 to pass through, and is provided with a sorting-side opening and closing member 592 that switches the sorting inlet 591 between a closed state where the game ball B1 cannot pass through and an open state where the game ball B1 can pass through. The sorting-side opening and closing member 592 is opened by being driven by a sorting inlet drive unit 593 through a link mechanism (not shown). The sorting inlet 591 forms the entrance to a guide passage 594, and the game ball B1 that flows in from the sorting inlet 591 flows downstream through the guide passage 594.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), the guide passage 594 branches into two at a midway position, and includes an upstream region 595 that constitutes the upstream side of the branch position, a V winning region 596 that constitutes one of the downstream sides of the branch position, and a discharge region 597 that constitutes the other downstream side of the branch position. In addition, a shutter 598 is provided at the branch position as a distribution means for distributing the game ball B1 that reaches the branch position from the upstream region 595 to either the V winning region 596 or the discharge region 597. When the shutter 598 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 599, the game ball B1 that reaches the branch position flows into the discharge region 597, and when the shutter 598 is driven by the shutter drive unit 599, the game ball B1 that reaches the branch position flows into the V winning region 596.

The counting detection sensor 595a is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where the game ball B1 that has flowed into the upstream area 595 must pass through. Based on the detection of the game ball B1 by the counting detection sensor 595a, the prize ball corresponding to the winning of the distribution winning device 583 is paid out. In addition, the V winning detection sensor 596a is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where the game ball B1 that has flowed into the V winning area 596 must pass through. Based on the detection of the game ball B1 by the V winning detection sensor 596a, the special electric winning device 32 transitions to an opening and closing execution mode in which it is opened and closed. In addition, the discharge detection sensor 597a is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where the game ball B1 that has flowed into the discharge area 597 must pass through. Based on the detection results from the discharge detection sensor 597a and the V winning detection sensor 596a, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 remains in the distribution winning device 583.

The timing of driving the shutter driver 599 is set so that the game ball B1 that has won the distribution winning device 583 is guided to the V winning area 596 with a probability of 80%, but the specific probability is arbitrary, and the configuration may be such that the probability of being guided to the discharge area 597 is higher. However, in order to increase the advantage of winning the jackpot lottery based on winning the second operating port 582, it is preferable that the distribution probability of the shutter 598 is set so that the product of the probability of transitioning to the branch execution mode based on winning the second operating port 582 and the probability of the game ball B1 that has won the distribution winning device 583 flowing into the V winning area 596 is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot lottery based on winning the first operating port 581. For example, it is preferable that the probability of being guided to the V winning area 596 is set higher, and it is more preferable that the probability of being guided to the V winning area 596 is 75% or more but less than 100%.

In addition, it is preferable that the prize distribution device 583 is formed so that it is possible to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the winning game ball B1 is distributed to the V prize area 596 or the discharge area 597, and specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the prize distribution device 583 is formed to be colored and transparent or colorless and transparent.

In the branch execution mode, if the game ball B1 enters the distribution winning device 583, flows into the V winning area 596, and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 597a, a V winning occurs. On the other hand, in the branch execution mode, if the game ball B1 is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 597a, a V winning does not occur.

Next, we will explain the winning lottery in this embodiment. First, we will explain the electrical configuration for performing the winning lottery by the main CPU 63 (Figure 13).

The reserved storage area 65a (Figure 13) of this embodiment includes a first reserved area and a second reserved area. The first reserved area is an area in which a combination of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 (Figure 13), the jackpot type counter C2 (Figure 13), and the reach random number counter C3 (Figure 13) is stored as reserved information in accordance with the winning history of the first actuation port 581, while the second reserved area is an area in which a combination of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in accordance with the winning history of the second actuation port 582.

Up to four winning histories are reserved and stored in each of the first and second reserved areas. The numerical information stored in the first and second reserved areas is moved to the execution area AE (Figure 13). At the start of one game round, the master CPU 63 executes a winning lottery based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Next, we will explain the various tables used in the winning lottery. The main ROM 64 (Figure 12) stores a low-frequency left-side table, a regular right-side table, and an irregular right-side table as tables used in the winning lottery.

The probability of a jackpot result is set to be the same for each table used for the winning lottery. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have the high probability mode and low probability mode described in the first embodiment above, and the main ROM 64 stores one type each of a low frequency left side table, a regular right side table, and an irregular right side table.

First, the low frequency left side table will be explained. When the support mode of the second actuation port 582 is the low frequency support mode, the reserved information stored in the first reserved area when a winning entry occurs at the first actuation port 581 is set as low frequency left side reserved information. The low frequency left side reserved information contains information indicating that it is reserved information stored in the low frequency support mode, and that it is reserved information stored based on a winning entry at the first actuation port 581. The low frequency left side table is a table that is read out when the reserved information stored in the execution area AE is low frequency left side reserved information.

Only the big win result is set in the low frequency left table, and no small win result is set. The low frequency left table is set with the big win result of high frequency results that become high frequency support mode after open/close execution mode, and low frequency results that become low frequency support mode after open/close execution mode.

In the low-frequency support mode, when a winning entry into the first operating port 581 occurs and a winning lottery based on the winning entry results in a jackpot, if the current jackpot result is a high-frequency result and the high-frequency flag described in the first embodiment above is not set to "1", the high-frequency flag is set to "1". Also, if the current jackpot result is a low-frequency result and the high-frequency flag is set to "1", the high-frequency flag is cleared to "0". If the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the mode transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the high-frequency flag is set to "1", the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the high-frequency support mode, and if the value of the high-frequency flag is "0", the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the regular right side table will be described. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 582 occurs in the high frequency support mode, the reserved information stored in the second reserved area is referred to as regular right side reserved information. The regular right side reserved information includes information indicating that it is reserved information stored based on a winning entry into the second actuation port 582, and that the winning entry into the second actuation port 582 occurred in a regular manner. The regular right side reserved information is also stored in the second reserved area when a winning entry into the second actuation port 582 occurs during a consecutive winning period in the low frequency support mode. The regular right side table is a table that is read out when the reserved information stored in the execution area AE is regular right side reserved information.

Here, the normal flow is a game flow in which an operation to shoot the game ball B1 toward the right area PA3 is performed when the game mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode or when a consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode is entered. In contrast, the game flow in which an operation to shoot the game ball B1 toward the right area PA3 is performed during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode is considered to be an irregular flow.

The regular right side table has the jackpot results and the small jackpot results set. The regular right side table has the high frequency results and the low frequency results described above set as the jackpot results.

In the regular right-side table, the probability of a small win result is set so that if a big win result is not obtained, there is a nearly 100% probability of a small win result. Note that the probability of a small win result occurring if a big win result is not obtained may also be set to 100%. In the regular right-side table, a high frequency small win result and a low frequency small win result, which will be described later, are set as small win results.

If a winning entry into the second operating port 582 occurs during either the consecutive winning period in the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and a winning lottery based on that winning entry results in a jackpot, and if the current jackpot result is a high frequency result and the high frequency flag is not set to "1", the high frequency flag is set to "1". Also, if the current jackpot result is a low frequency result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". If the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the mode will transition to the open/close execution mode.

In addition, if the current small win result is a small win result, and if the current small win result is a high frequency small win result and the high frequency flag is not set to "1", the high frequency flag will be set to "1". In addition, if the current small win result is a low frequency small win result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag will be cleared to "0". If the current small win result is a small win result, the system will transition to the branch execution mode described above, and if a V win occurs in the branch execution mode, the system will transition to the open/close execution mode.

After the open/close execution mode ends, if the high frequency flag is set to "1", the support mode of the second actuation port 582 becomes the high frequency support mode, and if the value of the high frequency flag is "0", the support mode of the second actuation port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode. Also, if the branching execution mode ends without a V win, the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". Therefore, after the branching execution mode, the support mode of the second actuation port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, a period of consecutive wins in low-frequency support mode results in a state in which regular power opening wins occur consecutively, opening the second operating port 582. In this case, the winning lottery that is executed in response to a winning entry into the second operating port 582 is the same as the winning lottery that is executed in response to a winning entry into the second operating port 582 in high-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the probability of a jackpot result occurring in a winning lottery using the low-frequency left-hand table is the same as the probability of a jackpot result occurring in a winning lottery using the regular right-hand table. Also, if a winning lottery using the low-frequency left-hand table does not result in a jackpot result, it will result in a miss, whereas if a winning lottery using the regular right-hand table does not result in a jackpot result, there is a nearly 100% probability of transitioning to the branch execution mode. For this reason, the low-frequency support mode is a support mode that is less favorable to the player than the high-frequency support mode.

Even in the low-frequency support mode, which is less favorable to the player than the high-frequency support mode, if a consecutive winning period occurs, the same winning lottery as in the high-frequency support mode is executed. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the timing of the occurrence of the consecutive winning period is not notified to the player. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, a favorable state for the player may occur at a time that is unexpected by the player. In this way, by making the player feel a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Next, the irregular right side table will be described. The reserved information stored in the second reserved area triggered by a winning entry into the second actuation port 582 during a continuous non-winning period in the low frequency support mode is called irregular right side reserved information. The irregular right side reserved information contains information indicating that it is reserved information stored triggered by a winning entry into the second actuation port 582, and that the winning entry into the second actuation port 582 occurred through an irregular flow. The irregular right side table is a table that is read out when the reserved information stored in the execution area AE is irregular right side reserved information.

The non-regular right-side table has a jackpot result and a small jackpot result set. The jackpot result set in the non-regular right-side table is the low-frequency result described above, and the small jackpot result set in the non-regular right-side table is the low-frequency small jackpot result described above. The non-regular right-side table has a probability of a small jackpot result set so that if a jackpot result is not obtained, there is a nearly 100% probability of a small jackpot result. Note that the probability of a small jackpot result occurring if a jackpot result is not obtained may be set to 100%.

If a winning entry into the second operating port 582 occurs during a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a big win or a small win, and the system transitions to the branch execution mode and a V winning occurs, the high-frequency flag value remains at "0" and the system transitions to the open/close execution mode. Therefore, after the open/close execution mode, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode. Also, if the branch execution mode ends without a V winning, the high-frequency flag value remains at "0" and the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode.

A player who does not accurately understand the flow of the game may unintentionally execute the above-mentioned irregular flow. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the possibility of winning the regular power release lottery in the low-frequency support mode is set lower than the possibility of winning the regular power release lottery in the high-frequency support mode. For this reason, a situation in which the game is played in an irregular flow is more disadvantageous to the player than a situation in which the game is played in a regular flow, and a player who does not accurately understand the game flow will suffer a loss.

In contrast, by configuring the system to transition to the branch execution mode with a high probability if the game ball B1 enters the second operating port 582 during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to provide rescue measures to players who do not accurately grasp the flow of the game. However, the system is configured to always transition to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in an irregular flow. This makes it possible to configure the system so that playing in an irregular flow after understanding the flow of the game will not lead to advantageous results for the player.

The present embodiment described above provides the following advantages:

During the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the winning lottery that is executed in response to an entry into the second operating port 582, and the winning lottery that is executed in response to an entry into the second operating port 582 in the high-frequency support mode are executed based on a common regular right-side table. In the low-frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high-frequency support mode, a configuration is created in which a state advantageous to the player occurs at a timing that the player does not expect, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation for the opening/closing execution mode and for the high-frequency support mode to follow the opening/closing execution mode.

In a situation where there is a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2 than to operate the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. Even if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 during a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, if a winning ball enters the second operating port 582, there is a high probability that the opening/closing execution mode will be entered. This makes it possible to provide rescue measures to inexperienced players who do not accurately grasp the flow of the game.

During the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the winning lottery triggered by winning the second actuation port 582 may result in a high-frequency big win result and a high-frequency small win result. During the consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the winning lottery triggered by winning the second actuation port 582 is more likely to result in a favorable result for the player than the winning lottery triggered by winning the second actuation port 582. This configuration makes the consecutive winning period attractive, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, when a player who understands the flow of regular play deliberately plays in a non-regular way, the non-regular way is prevented from leading to a favorable result for the player.

<Alternative to the sixth embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment described above, if the branch execution mode ends without a V winning, the support mode of the second actuation port 582 may be configured not to change before and after the branch execution mode. If a winning occurs in the second actuation port 582 and a small winning result is obtained in the winning lottery based on the winning, the value of the high frequency flag is maintained and the mode transitions to the branch execution mode. If no V winning occurs in the branch execution mode, the current value of the high frequency flag is maintained as it is.

When a winning entry into the second actuation port 582 occurs in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency flag is set to "1" when the winning entry occurs. The value of the high frequency flag is maintained as is if a small winning result is obtained in the winning lottery and the branch execution mode ends without a V winning entry. In this case, the support mode of the second actuation port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained as the high frequency support mode.

In addition, if a winning entry into the second actuation port 582 occurs in the low-frequency support mode, the value of the high-frequency flag is "0" at the time of the winning entry. The value of the high-frequency flag is maintained as is if the winning lottery results in a small winning entry and the branch execution mode ends without a V winning entry. In this case, the support mode of the second actuation port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained as the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, if the branch execution mode ends without a V winning, the support mode before the transition to the branch execution mode is maintained after the branch execution mode is entered. This makes it possible to make the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode more advantageous to the player than the consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, but less advantageous to the player than the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to set the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode as an advantageous state for the player, while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

- During the consecutive winning period in the low frequency support mode in the sixth embodiment described above, a consecutive winning table with the same contents as the irregular right side table may be used for the winning lottery that is executed in response to the occurrence of a winning entry into the second operating port 582. The big win results set in the consecutive winning table are only low frequency results, and the small win results set in the consecutive winning table are only low frequency small win results. Therefore, even if the opening/closing execution mode is transitioned to in response to a winning lottery based on the consecutive winning table, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode will not become the high frequency support mode.

During the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the winning lottery executed in response to a winning entry into the second actuation port 582 is a winning lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, compared to the winning lottery executed in response to a winning entry into the second actuation port 582 in the high-frequency support mode. This makes it possible to maintain the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

In the low-frequency support mode, when playing in a normal flow, it is expected that the opening and closing execution mode will be triggered by a winning entry into the first actuation port 581, and when a period of consecutive wins has begun, it is expected that the opening and closing execution mode will be triggered by a winning entry into the second actuation port 582. In contrast, when playing in an irregular flow, it is only expected that the opening and closing execution mode will be triggered by a winning entry into the second actuation port 582. And the probability of winning the normal power release, which is a condition for winning the second actuation port 582, is low. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, the advantage of playing in a normal flow over playing in an irregular flow is maintained, and the possibility that a player who understands the flow of the game will intentionally play in an irregular flow is reduced.

In the sixth embodiment described above, if a winning entry into the second through gate 39 occurs in an irregular flow, the player may be warned to play in the regular flow. The warning to the player is given when a winning entry into the second through gate 39 occurs during a consecutive non-winning period in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, when the master CPU 63 detects a winning entry into the second through gate 39, it executes a process to send a warning command to the sound and light emission control device 81, provided that the value of the consecutive winning flag already described in the first embodiment is "0" and the value of the high frequency flag is "0". The sound and light emission control device 81 that has received the warning command sends a command to the display control device 82 to display on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 the content of the warning to the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to execute sound output of the content of the warning to the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35. This reduces the possibility that a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game will cause a win in the second operating port 582 in an irregular manner. Here, as already explained in the first embodiment above, when a period of consecutive non-wins is transitioned to a period of consecutive wins in the low frequency support mode, the consecutive win flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the operation mode of the game ball launching device is switched so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 as a result of entering a consecutive winning period, no warning is given to the player.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode performed in the irregular flow may be configured to be different from the opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode performed in the regular flow. When a winning occurs in the second operating port 582, the main CPU 63 sets the irregular flag to "1" indicating that the current winning is a winning that occurred in the irregular flow, provided that the value of the consecutive winning flag is "0" and the value of the high frequency flag is "0". In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, if the irregular flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 performs the opening/closing operation of the special electric winning device 32 in the irregular mode, and if the irregular flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 63 performs the opening/closing operation of the special electric winning device 32 in the regular mode. In the irregular mode, the closing time from the end of the opening state of the special electric winning device 32 to the next opening state is set to be longer than in the regular mode. For this reason, in the irregular mode, the amount of game balls B1 consumed during the opening/closing execution mode is greater than in the regular mode. During the consecutive non-winning periods in the low-frequency support mode, the normal flow of performing a firing operation so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and switching the firing operation to have the game ball B1 flow down the right area PA3 when a consecutive winning period occurs, is more advantageous to the player than the irregular flow of performing a firing operation so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 during the consecutive non-winning periods in the low-frequency support mode, thereby preventing a player who understands the game flow from intentionally playing in the irregular flow.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for discharging the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 and the inclination of the opening of the first through gate 35 in the game board 610 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configurations different from those in the first embodiment are described below. Note that the description of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 620 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. The adjustment mechanism 620 periodically supplies game balls B1 to the first through gate 35. FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board 610 showing an enlarged view of the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610 of this embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 620 is provided above the first through gate 35 instead of the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the adjustment mechanism 620 of this embodiment, the storage section 181 has a left side standing wall 181h and a right side standing wall 181d as described in the first embodiment above, which defines a storage space for storing the rotating body 183.

The left side standing wall 181h and the right side standing wall 181d are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a in a manner that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 61, the left side standing wall 181h and the right side standing wall 181d are spaced apart, so that the intake port 185 described in the first embodiment is present at the top of the adjustment mechanism 620, and the discharge port 621 is present at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 620. As shown in FIG. 61, the discharge port 621 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 61, the adjustment mechanism 620 includes the adjustment driver 184 described in the first embodiment above, behind the rotor 183. The adjustment driver 184 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12). In this embodiment, the adjustment driver 184 is supplied with a drive signal and enters a driving state, causing the rotor 183 to slowly rotate clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° over 5 seconds.

When any of the recesses 183b-183e of the rotating body 183 is open upward at the inlet 185 located at the top of the adjustment mechanism 620, the adjustment mechanism 620 is capable of taking in the game ball B1, and when any of the recesses 183b-183e is open downward and to the right at the outlet 621 located at the bottom right of the adjustment mechanism 620, the adjustment mechanism 620 is capable of discharging the game ball B1.

The duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in through the inlet 185 and the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged through the outlet 621 are determined depending on the rotation speed of the rotating body 183. If the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is slow, the time that the recesses 183b to 183e are open to the outside at the inlet 185 and the outlet 621 becomes longer. This extends the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in and discharged.

In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotor 183 is set to be sufficiently slow so that the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged at the discharge port 621 continues until the game ball B1 is completely discharged. The flow in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port 621 is the same regardless of which of the recesses 183b to 183e the discharged game ball B1 has been taken into. For this reason, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 will be described below with reference to FIG. 61, using the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b as an example.

As shown in FIG. 61, the game ball B1 that is taken into the first recess 183b and transported clockwise around the base body 181a is discharged when the discharge port 621 and the first recess 183b overlap at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 620 and the first recess 183b opens toward the lower right.

In detail, even if the first recessed portion 183b starts to overlap with the discharge port 621 as the rotor 183 rotates, if the width of the area open to the outside in the first recessed portion 183b is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 in the first recessed portion 183b will not be discharged to the outside. In this state, the game ball B1 in the first recessed portion 183b is supported by the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b and the right side upright wall 181d, and is prevented from falling downward.

As the rotation of the rotor 183 progresses, the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b supporting the game ball B1 and the right-side upright wall 181d increases, and the width of the area open to the outside in the first recessed portion 183b increases. Then, when the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b and the right-side upright wall 181d becomes longer than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 loses support and falls downward.

If the rotating body 183 rotates quickly, the rotating body 183 will continue to rotate at the outlet 621 between the time when the first recessed portion 183b is open to the outside and the time when the game ball B1 is actually discharged, and the game ball B1 may be pinched between the rotating body 183 and the left standing wall 181h during discharge, or the state in which the first recessed portion 183b is open to the outside may end before the game ball B1 is discharged. In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set sufficiently slow. Therefore, the game ball B1 is discharged between the time when the first recessed portion 183b is open to the outside and the time when this state ends.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the intake port 185 is in an intake permitted state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in when any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are open facing upward. If the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the duration of one intake permitted state at the intake port 185 becomes longer. This reduces the possibility that the intake permitted state ends without there being a game ball B1 to be taken in by the recesses 183b to 183e that are open facing upward. This reduces the frequency of a state in which there is no game ball B1 to be discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 toward the first through gate 35 when the discharge timing of the adjustment mechanism 620 is reached.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, the number of game balls B1 that can be captured in any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotor 183 during one capture permission state is limited to one. If the rotation speed of the rotor 183 is set to a slower speed, the frequency with which the adjustment mechanism 620 enters the capture permission state per unit time decreases, and the number of game balls B1 that the adjustment mechanism 620 can capture per unit time also decreases.

In response to this, as already explained in the first embodiment above, the adjustment mechanism 620 can discharge the game balls B1 that have flowed down near the intake port 185 into the spaces on the left and right of the adjustment mechanism 180 from between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181h, or between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d, and can also discharge the game balls B1 toward the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171 provided behind the intake port 185. Therefore, even if the number of game balls B1 that have flowed down near the intake port 185 and have not been taken in by the intake port 185 increases, it is possible to prevent the game balls B1 from accumulating near the intake port 185.

As already explained, the discharge port 621 is located at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 620, and the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620 is discharged to the outside at a timing earlier than it rotates 180° around the center of the rotating body 183. The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620 does not rotate more than 180° around the center of the rotating body 183. For this reason, the game ball B1 that reaches the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 620 does not rise again due to the rotation of the rotating body 183.

As shown in FIG. 61, the left side standing wall 181h has an end face 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 that falls downward from the discharge port 621. The end face 181i is inclined downward to the right, and comes into contact with the game ball B1 that is discharged from the discharge port 621, guiding the game ball B1 downward and to the right.

As already explained, the width of the discharge opening 621 is set to be relatively narrow, being approximately one size wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. This makes it possible to keep the variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 at the discharge opening 621 small. In addition, because the variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 is small, most of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge opening 621 can be brought into contact with the end face 181i of the left standing wall 261. This makes it possible to keep the variation in the discharge direction of the game ball B1 small.

As shown in FIG. 61, on the game board 610, the first through gate 35 is located below the discharge opening 621. The distance from the discharge opening 621 to the first through gate 35 is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Because there is a gap between the discharge opening 621 and the first through gate 35 through which the game ball B1 can pass, there is a possibility that part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge opening 621 will miss the first through gate 35. For example, if the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge opening 621 deviates to the left or right and the game ball B1 collides with the edge of the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the first through gate 35 will not win.

By avoiding a configuration in which all game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enter the first through gate 35, it is possible to avoid the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 620 being limited only to the capture of the game balls B1. In addition, by setting the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 to be short, it is possible to reduce the effect of the discharge speed of the game ball B1 on the timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 enters the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 61, the first through gate 35 in this embodiment is provided on the game board 610 in such a manner that it slopes downward to the left in order to facilitate the entry of the game ball B1, which is guided by the end face 181i of the left standing wall 181h and falls downward to the right, into the outlet 621.

As shown in FIG. 61, the game ball B1, which is guided by the end face 181i of the left upright wall 181h at the outlet 621 and discharged toward the lower right, falls while gradually correcting its course downward due to the influence of gravity. The inclination angle of the first through gate 35 is set so as to be approximately perpendicular to the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 621 at the height position of the first through gate 35. This increases the possibility that the game ball B1 will enter smoothly without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35. By preventing the game ball B1 from contacting the edge of the first through gate 35 just before entering the first through gate 35, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the timing of the game ball B1 that has contacted the edge of the first through gate 35 will be delayed or that the game ball B1 will fall off the first through gate 35.

As already explained, the variation in the starting position and direction of the game ball B1 at the outlet 621 is kept small, so that most of the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 621 can be made to smoothly enter the first through gate 35.

Next, the low frequency winning judgment value table in this embodiment will be described. As described in the first embodiment above, the low frequency winning judgment value table stored in the main ROM 64 (Figure 12) records winning judgment values that are the target of winning the normal power release in the normal power release lottery executed in the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency winning judgment value table of this embodiment, values different from the winning judgment values set in the low frequency winning judgment value table T1 described in the first embodiment above with reference to Figure 14 (a) are set.

In the low frequency winning judgment value table of this embodiment, the winning judgment value for the normal power release lottery is set to (1250 x n-5) to (1250 x n). Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. The probability of winning the normal power release lottery in the low frequency support mode is approximately 1/210.

The winning judgment value that is the target for winning the regular power release is a consecutive number in units of 6. Also, the update period of the random number for release in the regular power role release counter C4 (Figure 13) is 4 msec. Therefore, in the regular power role release counter C4, the period during which the updated random number for release becomes the winning judgment value for the regular power release in the regular power release lottery in the low frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

In the low-frequency support mode, the winning target period during which the winning determination value that is the target for winning the normal power release continues for 24 msec occurs in a 5-second cycle. As described above, the cycle during which the winning timing occurs when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enters the first through gate 35 is the same 5 seconds as the cycle during which the winning target period occurs in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in low-frequency support mode, when the timing at which a prize can be won overlaps with the winning target period, a consecutive winning period occurs during which regular power release wins occur consecutively. This consecutive winning period continues until the initial value of the regular power feature release counter C4 is updated and the timing at which the winning target period occurs shifts. If the timing at which the winning target period occurs shifts, a consecutive non-winning period occurs during which losing results continue in the regular power release lottery executed in low-frequency support mode until the winning target period and the winning target period overlap again.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The discharge port 621 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 taken in at the top of the adjustment mechanism 620 reaches before rotating 180° around the center of the rotating body 183. Furthermore, when the discharge port 621 is in a state where the game ball B1 can be discharged from the recesses 183b to 183e, the adjustment drive unit 184 is driven and controlled so that this state does not end before the game ball B1 has been completely discharged. This prevents the game ball B1 transported downward from the top of the adjustment mechanism 620 from rotating 180° or more around the center of the rotating body 183 and rising again.

The left standing wall 181h has an end face 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 that is about to fall downward from the discharge outlet 621 due to its own weight, and guides the game ball B1 to the lower right. In addition, the width of the discharge outlet 621 is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Because the width of the discharge outlet 621 is set to be relatively narrow, there is little variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge outlet 621, and most of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge outlet 621 can come into contact with the end face 181i of the left standing wall 261 and be guided to the lower right. This makes it possible to reduce variation in the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge outlet 621.

The variation in the starting position of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 is small, and the variation in the direction of discharge is also small. Therefore, the variation in the moving direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 when it falls to the height position of the first through gate 35 is also small. The first through gate 35 is inclined downward toward the left so that the opening is perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 and flowing down to the height position of the first through gate 35. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 is easily taken in smoothly without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35. This prevents the game ball B1 from colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35 just before entering the first through gate 35, which causes the timing of the winning to be shifted, or the game ball B1 from falling out of the first through gate 35.

The distance from the discharge port 621 of the adjustment mechanism 620 to the first through gate 35 is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since there is a gap between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35 that is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, it is possible to avoid a configuration in which all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enter the first through gate 35. In addition, since the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is relatively short, even if the game ball B1 is discharged at a different discharge speed each time, the difference in the discharge speed does not have a significant effect on the timing of the ball entering the first through gate 35. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the timing of the ball entering the first through gate 35 is shifted due to the difference in discharge speed during a consecutive winning period, resulting in no winning of the normal power opening.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, the type of buffer, of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111, for which the type of input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, is different from that of the first embodiment. Also, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to cause the management CPU 112 to identify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configurations that differ from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, the fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, the sixth buffer 122f receives a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, the seventh buffer 122g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, but in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as an opening/closing execution mode signal to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input as a high-frequency support mode signal to the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as a door open signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The input of an open/close execution mode signal to the 13th buffer 122m, the input of a high frequency support mode signal to the 14th buffer 122n, the input of a door open signal to the 15th buffer 122o, and the input of an output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 can specify that the above-mentioned signals corresponding to the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p are input without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the type of signal to be input to the 1st to 12th buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals is specified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 of the main process (Figure 17) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l that are to be recognized for the signal type (step S1701). Then, output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1702). In this output processing, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the identification start signal. The period for which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Then, the information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output count counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1703). The output count counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to identify the number of times the type identification signal has been output.

In this embodiment, when the management CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, a type identification signal is output the same number of times as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that type of signal. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is understood as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that type of signal.

In step S1703, if the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11" and "10", the output count counter is set to "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31. If the value of the recognition output counter is "9", the output count counter is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32. If the value of the recognition output counter is "8", the output count counter is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33. If the value of the recognition output counter is "7", the output count counter is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. If the value of the recognition output counter is "6", the output count counter is set to "0" since the output counter corresponds to the outlet 24a but the payout of the game balls is not executed even if the game ball enters the outlet 24a. Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is between "5" and "1," there is no corresponding ball entry section and it is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0."

After that, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1704). In this output process, the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is set to a HI level, thereby starting the output of the start trigger signal. The period during which the first signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Then, on condition that the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1705: YES), i.e., on condition that a value of 1 or more was set in the output count counter in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In this output processing, the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the type identification signal. The period during which the second signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Then, the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1707), and it is determined whether the value of the output count counter after decrement is "0" (step S1708). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1708: NO), the process returns to step S1706.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1705, or if a positive judgment is made in step S1708, output processing of the end trigger signal is executed (step S1709). In this output processing, the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the end trigger signal. The period during which the third signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1710), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is "0" (step S1711). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S1711: NO), the process returns to step S1703, and processing is performed to recognize the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1711: YES), output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S1712). In this output processing, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the identification end signal. The period during which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 64. The management process starts when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 starts, as in the first embodiment.

When reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). Thereafter, on the condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES), the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether a type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When a type identification signal is received (step S1804: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1805). The reception count counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to identify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" when a positive determination is made in step S1803.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1804, or if the processing of step S1805 is executed, it is judged whether or not a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1806). If a termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1806: NO), the process returns to step S1804. If a termination trigger signal has been received (step S1806: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1807). In the correspondence setting process, the value set in the reception count counter is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set to "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31, the fourth correspondence area 123d is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33, and the sixth correspondence area 123f is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. In addition, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1808).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1803, or if the processing of step S1808 is executed, it is judged whether or not reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1809). If reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S1809: NO), the process returns to step S1803, and, on the condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES), the processing of steps S1804 and onward is executed. If reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1809: YES), the history setting processing of step S1810 and the external output processing of step S1811 are repeatedly executed.

Figure 65 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 65(a) shows the period when the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(b) shows the period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(c) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(d) shows the period when the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(e) shows the period when the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(f) shows the execution period of the identification state in which processing is executed to identify the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l, FIG. 65(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 65(h) shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S1807) is executed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level at the timing of t1 as shown in Figures 65(a), 65(d), and 65(e). This starts the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. Then, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. This stops the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. At the timing of t2, the management CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S1801 of the management process (Figure 64), and enters the identification state as shown in Figure 65(f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at a HI level from time t3 to time t4 as shown in FIG. 65(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal has been output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at a HI level from time t5 to time t7 as shown in FIG. 65(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 65(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from timing t8 to timing t10 as shown in FIG. 65(c). This results in a state in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes a correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 65(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" when the correspondence setting process is executed, the information "1" is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at HI level from timing t11 to timing t12 as shown in FIG. 65(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at HI level from timing t13 to timing t15, from timing t16 to timing t18, from timing t19 to timing t21, and from timing t22 to timing t24 as shown in FIG. 65(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23 as shown in FIG. 65(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from timing t25 to timing t27 as shown in FIG. 65(c). This results in a state in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes a correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 65(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" when the correspondence setting process is executed, the information "10" is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in Figures 65(c), 65(d), and 65(e), the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. This starts the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. This stops the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S1809 of the management process (Figure 64), and the identification state is released as shown in Figure 65(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry part that triggered the storage of the history information as the correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, the ball entry parts cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 both have one prize ball, the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 cannot be distinguished in the history information. In such circumstances, the number of prize balls in the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 may be made different. As a result, even in a configuration in which history information is stored as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to distinguish the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 in the history information.

In addition, in this embodiment, in step S801 of the history setting process, the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is set to "15." This causes all of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o to become confirmation targets.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, not only the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and the information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open can be identified by the management CPU 112 as the signal path corresponding to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to make the management CPU 112 recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Then, when the correspondence information is made to the management CPU 112, the number of pulse signals equal to the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters using the history information is different from that in the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 66 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 631. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated various parameters are then stored sequentially in the calculation result memory 631. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The timing for calculating various parameters occurs before the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to differentiate between the timing for calculating various parameters and the timing for externally outputting the parameters to the reading device, thereby distributing the processing load.

In addition, by providing a calculation result memory 631 for storing the calculation results of various parameters, it is possible to store not only the various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers together. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate the various parameters at each calculation trigger.

Figure 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p are input with the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning port detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning port detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a. A signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the management CPU 112 with an opportunity to calculate various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, just like the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 can specify that the above-mentioned signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p are input without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the type of signal to be input to the 1st to 14th buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals is specified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a process configuration for allowing the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 18).

In the power failure information storage process, if a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1901: YES), output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1902). In this output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level. After that, after executing the power failure processing in step S1903, an infinite loop is entered and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is saved.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power failure response process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (Figure 34), and after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 in the management process (step S1006: YES), the history setting process in step S1007, the external output process in step S1008, and the power failure response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure response process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2001: YES), in steps S2002 to S2006, the number of balls that have entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33 and second operating port 34 is calculated, similar to steps S1602 to S1606 of the external output process (Figure 40) in the first embodiment described above. In addition, in step S2007, the number of balls that have entered each type when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated, similar to step S1607 of the external output process (Figure 40) in the first embodiment described above. In step S2008, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1608 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2009, the total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1609 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S2008 and the calculation result information in step S2009 are written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2010). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

Then, in step S2011, the number of balls in the opening and closing execution mode is calculated in the same manner as step S1611 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2012, the number of balls in the opening and closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated in the same manner as step S1612 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Also, in step S2013, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1613 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result in step S2014 is written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2014). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine what point in time the calculation result information written this time corresponds to.

After that, in step S2015, the number of balls entering during the high-frequency support mode is calculated in the same manner as step S1615 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2016, the number of balls entering during the high-frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated in the same manner as step S1616 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Also, in step S2017, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1617 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result in step S2017 is written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2018). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time. After that, an infinite loop is entered, and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the external output process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (Figure 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2101: YES), the output process of the calculation result is executed (step S2102). In this output process, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, if only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 631, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of that one calculation trigger are read by the reading device, and if various calculation results corresponding to multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 631, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of those multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device.

After that, a process for outputting the history information is executed (step S2103). In this output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is output in sequence to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it becomes possible for the worker using the reading device to perform a detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

Then, a clear process is executed (step S2104). In the clear process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In the clear process, all areas of the calculation result memory 631 are cleared to all "0". As a result, the calculation result memory 631 is initialized.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, causing the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters. This makes it possible for the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

The various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are written sequentially to the calculation result memory 631. This makes it possible to accumulate the various parameters in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read by a reading device, it becomes possible to read out the various parameters for multiple business days all at once.

When various parameters are written to the calculation result memory 631, information that enables the time when the various parameters were calculated to be identified is written to the calculation result memory 631 together with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze the various parameter information while knowing the time when the various parameters were calculated.

Note that the history memory 117 may be configured to be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for that trigger are written to the calculation result memory 631. This makes it less likely that new history information will be written to the history memory 117 when the maximum number of pieces of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

In addition, the information to be output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output to the outside. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information to be output to the outside.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response processing executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the ninth embodiment. The configuration that differs from the ninth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the ninth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2201: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2202). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S2002 to S2009, steps S2011 to S2013, and steps S2015 to S2017 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2202 is within a reference range (step S2203).
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio Eighth parameter The two parameters, K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34"), are set as parameters to be determined as to whether they are within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, a positive determination is made in step S2203 as the predetermined parameters are within the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh and eighth parameters, and other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters instead of or in addition to the seventh and eighth parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K2/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as the predetermined parameter. In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be within the reference range. Also, only the predetermined parameter to be determined in step S2203 may be calculated in the various calculation processes in step S2202.

If the specified parameters are not within the reference range (step S2203: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2202 are written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2204). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the specified parameter is within the reference range (step S2203: YES), the processing of step S2204 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters when the specified parameter is not within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 631. Therefore, if an abnormal situation occurs, the history of the abnormal situation is left in the calculation result memory 631, while the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 631 can be reduced.

If a positive determination is made in step S2203, or if the processing of step S2204 is executed, a clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2205). In this clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0"s, and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This resets the history area 124 to an initialized state. After the processing of step S2205 is executed, an infinite loop is entered, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, it is determined whether the contents of the various calculated parameters are within a reference range, and only the various parameters that are determined to be within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 631. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 631, and therefore the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 631.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters are different from those of the ninth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the ninth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the ninth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 72 (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (Figure 36).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2301). If a positive determination is made in step S2301, an increment process is performed on the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2302). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined based on the number of times step S1305 has been executed in the management output process (Figure 36) for this processing round. The determined number of game balls is then added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2303). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S2303: YES), a subtraction process is executed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2304). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". Then, an output process of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2305). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

Figure 72 (b) is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed in place of the power failure response process in the ninth embodiment. Therefore, the calculation process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (Figure 34), and after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 in the management process (step S1206: YES), the history setting process in step S1207, the external output process in step S1208, and the calculation process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2401: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2402). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, it becomes possible to precisely manage the ball entry patterns in the game area PA within a business day.

In addition, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent the various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

Twelfth embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters are different from those of the eleventh embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the eleventh embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the eleventh embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (Figure 36).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2501). If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2502). The continuation counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine the period during which no game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34.

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2503: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2504). The stop reference value is set so that a positive judgment is made in step S2503 when a state in which no game ball enters any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds. The time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure the time to specify the timing to switch the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. If the value of the time measurement flag is "0", the time is not measured, and if the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If a positive judgment is made in step S2501, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2505).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2503, if the processing of step S2504 is executed, or if the processing of step S2505 is executed, the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2507) on the condition that the time measurement flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2506: YES). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time to determine the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the indication reference value (step S2508). The indication reference value is set so that a positive determination is made in step S2508 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If a positive determination is made in step S2508, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2509), and output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2510). In this output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period of time elapses, so it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when a game round is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of various parameters, and to appropriately derive various parameters when a game is being played.

In addition, instead of using a measurement counter to measure whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the measurement may be performed using RTC115.

Thirteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters are different from those in the first embodiment, and the occurrence of the calculation trigger is not specified by the main CPU 63 but is performed independently by the control CPU 112. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S1412 in the history setting process (Figure 37).

In the history setting process of the current processing round, it is determined whether history information corresponding to the occurrence of game balls entering any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 has been stored in the history memory 117 (step S2601). If a positive determination is made in step S2601, an increment process of the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2602). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined based on the number of times that history information corresponding to the occurrence of game balls entering has been stored in the history setting process of the current processing round. Then, the determined number of game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2603). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S2603: YES), a subtraction process is executed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2604). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". Then, various calculation processes are executed (step S2605). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power outage response process (Figure 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, it becomes possible to precisely manage the ball entry patterns in the game area PA within a business day.

In addition, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent the various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the management CPU 112 determines the calculation trigger for various parameters independently. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the calculation trigger for various parameters, making it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the ninth embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 631 (see FIG. 66). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters of the calculation result to the calculation result memory 631. In addition, in this embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening and closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening and closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has started, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has ended, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are each sent individually from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S2701). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in which information other than information indicating that the areas are blank is identified, and the information for the identified number is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating which of the ball entry areas they correspond to, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information corresponding to the start of the opening and closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information corresponding to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode, the eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode, the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the start of opening the front door frame 14, and the thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores information corresponding to the end of opening the front door frame 14. Therefore, in step S2701, the confirmation target counter is set to "13".

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has changed from "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S2702). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the targets for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If the determination in step S2702 is affirmative, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2703). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2704). In the write process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S2703 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. In addition, correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th correspondence areas 123a to 123o are the ones to be read for correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading out the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading out the correspondence information.

Then, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S2705). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is incremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2706).

If it exceeds the maximum value (step S2706: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2707). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters and total time information of the calculation results are written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2708). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

Then, a state information handover process is executed (step S2709). In this handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is in the open/close execution mode, whether the current state is in the high frequency support mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. Then, this state information is written to the management side RAM 114.

Then, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2710). In the clearing process, all of the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This causes the history area 124 to be initialized. After the clearing process is executed, the state information written to the management RAM 114 in step S2709 is read. If state information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress is stored, history information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. If state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored, history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. In addition, if status information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2702, if a negative judgment is made in step S2706, or if the processing of step S2710 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2712). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2712: NO), the processing from step S2702 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, various parameters are calculated when the amount of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit of the number of pieces that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information to be stored exceeds the upper limit of the number of pieces that can be stored in the history memory 117, making it impossible to accurately calculate various parameters.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been the subject of calculations of various parameters from becoming the subject of calculations of various parameters again.

In addition, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information handover process is executed. This makes it possible to properly manage state information.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. The configurations that differ from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 641, a first state area 642, a second state area 643, and a third state area 644. Each of these areas 641 to 644 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o. The first counters 641a to 644a of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The second counters 641b to 644b of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The third counters 641c to 644c in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fourth counters 641d to 644d in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fifth counters 641e to 644e in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The sixth counters 641f to 644f in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The seventh counters 641g to 644g in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eighth counters 641h to 644h in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The ninth counters 641i to 644i in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The tenth counters 641j to 644j in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eleventh counters 641k to 644k in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from a low level to a high level. The twelfth counters 641l to 644l in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from a low level to a high level. The thirteenth counters 641m to 644m in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from a low level to a high level. The fourteenth counters 641n to 644n in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from a low level to a high level. The 15th counters 641o to 644o in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level.

However, the measurement targets using the 1st to 15th counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o are the 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g, to which signals corresponding to the result of a ball entering the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, the 8th to 10th buffers 122h to 122j, to which signals corresponding to status information such as whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in effect, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is open, are excluded from the above measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not these are measurement targets is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S2801 the check target counter is set to "10".

Then, it is determined whether the buffer 122a-122o corresponding to the current counter to be checked is a buffer to which a status information signal is input (step S2802). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the following correspondence information is stored in the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked: information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14.

If the determination in step S2802 is affirmative, a setting process for the state information is executed (step S2803). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from a LOW level to a HI level, first state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from a HI level to a LOW level, the first state information is erased from the management RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from a LOW level to a HI level, second state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the ninth signal is switched from a HI level to a LOW level, the second state information is erased from the management RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the 10th signal, which indicates whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, switches from a LOW level to a HIGH level, information on the third state, which indicates that the front door frame 14 is open, is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the 10th signal switches from a HIGH level to a LOW level, information on the third state is erased from the management RAM 114.

If the determination in step S2802 is negative, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and into which a signal of information different from the status information is input is checked to determine whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S2804). If the determination in step S2804 is positive, an addition process is executed for the corresponding counter for totalization (step S2805). In this addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth counters for totalization 641a to 641o in the totalization area 641 of the history memory 117 is added by 1. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter for totalization 641e is added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter for totalization 641a is added.

Then, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the first state, i.e., whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (step S2806). If the state is the first state (step S2806: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the first state (step S2807). In this increment process, one is incremented from the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth counters 642a to 642o for the first state in the first state area 642 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 642e for the first state is the increment target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 642a for the first state is the increment target.

Then, by referring to the status information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the second state, i.e., whether or not the state is in the high frequency support mode (step S2808). If the state is the second state (step S2808: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the second state (step S2809). In this increment process, one is incremented to the value of the counter that corresponds to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 643a to 643o for the second state in the second state area 643 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 643e for the second state is the one to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 643a for the second state is the one to be incremented.

Then, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, i.e., whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2810). If the state is the third state (step S2810: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the third state (step S2811). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter that corresponds to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 644a to 644o for the third state in the third state area 644 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 644e for the third state is the one to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 644a for the third state is the one to be incremented.

When the processing of step S2803 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S2804, when a negative judgment is made in step S2810, or when the processing of step S2811 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2812). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2813). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2813: NO), the processing of steps S2802 and onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history into the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment above, but is stored as information on the number of times the ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this manner, the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a is stored as information, so that in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment, it is not necessary to perform the process of calculating the number of game balls that have entered the outlet 24a (step S1602), the process of calculating the number of game balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 (step S1604), the process of calculating the number of game balls that have entered the first operating port 33 (step S1605), and the process of calculating the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 (step S1606). This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In addition, in the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 such as step S1603, since the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c all correspond to the general winning opening 31, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c. In addition, the number of balls entering the opening and closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the opening and closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the process of step S1612 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entering the opening and closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the opening and closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, in the external output process in this embodiment (Figure 40), step S1616 is not executed.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 78 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a read terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is also provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, and a management RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 has a calculation result memory 631, as in the twelfth embodiment. Since the management IC 66 does not have the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the ball entry history into the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary when executing a program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I/F 111, and when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, it accesses the main RAM 65 to read the goal history, and calculates various parameters using the read goal history. The calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 631. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 631, but the goal history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device.

Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ball scoring detection process is executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 18).

When it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S2901: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2902). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the general winning hole 31 as a ball entry history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 631. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is stored and retained even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2903).

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S2904: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2905). After that, the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2906).

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S2907: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2908). After that, the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S2910: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2911). In addition, the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2912). The special electric winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 as a ball entry history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special electric winning counter is stored and retained even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the 15-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2913).

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a (step S2914: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2915). In addition, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2916). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is stored and retained even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the single winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2917).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S2918: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2919). In addition, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2920). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter is stored and retained even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the single winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2921).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S2922: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2923). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the outlet 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored and retained even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a (step S2924: YES). In this case, the first gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2925).

If it is confirmed that the eighth bit D8 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second gate detection sensor 50a (step S2926: YES). In this case, the second gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2927).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history into the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65 as the number of balls that entered each entry section. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to output a signal to the management CPU 112 every time a ball enters any of the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In this embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls that enter the general winning port 31 from the general winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that enter the special winning device 32 from the special winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 from the first operation counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 from the second operation counter in the main RAM 65, and reads the number of balls that enter the out port 24a from the out counter in the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated using each of the read numbers of balls. However, since the number of balls that enter when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls that enter when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured separately, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated including the number of balls that enter when the front door frame 14 is open. Furthermore, since the number of balls that enter during the opening and closing execution mode and the number of balls that enter during the high frequency support mode are not measured individually, the first to eighteenth parameters and the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters described in the first embodiment above are not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written to the calculation result memory 631. Then, when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters that are currently written in the calculation result memory 631 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 631 is cleared to "0".

In addition, instead of the management IC 66 accessing the main RAM 65 on its own, the information on the number of balls that have been entered, stored in the main RAM 65 as a ball entry history, may be transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 from accessing the main RAM 65 simultaneously.

Seventeenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the history of balls entering each ball entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from those in the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 80 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62, as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a read terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is also provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115. Also, in addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with an alert light-emitting unit 651. The light emission of the alert light-emitting unit 651 is directly controlled by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information on the ball entry history at each entry section read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emission state of the alert light-emitting unit 651 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The alert light-emitting unit 651 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control unit 60, but the board box 60a is formed transparent, and the alert light-emitting unit 651 is provided so that the light emission state of the alert light-emitting unit 651 can be visually confirmed from outside the board box 60a. This allows the gaming machine main body 12 to be opened relative to the outer frame 11, making it possible to visually check the main control device 60, and thus makes it possible to visually check the light emission state of the notification light-emitting unit 651 without having to open the base box 60a.

Figure 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, the fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, the sixth buffer 122f receives a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, the seventh buffer 122g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal.

Meanwhile, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, but in this embodiment, the signals corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 are not input to the input port 121. In other words, no signals related to the ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals that are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. As in the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 begins. On the other hand, it was determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 can identify that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63.

Figure 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o. The first buffer counter 652a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The second buffer counter 652b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The third buffer counter 652c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fourth buffer counter 652d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fifth buffer counter 652e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The sixth buffer counter 652f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The seventh buffer counter 652g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eighth buffer counter 652h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The ninth buffer counter 652i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The tenth buffer counter 652j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eleventh buffer counter 652k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The twelfth buffer counter 652l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The thirteenth buffer counter 652m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fourteenth buffer counter 652n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The 15th buffer counter 652o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level.

However, the objects to be measured using the counters for the first to fifteenth buffers 652a to 652o are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, to which signals corresponding to the result of a ball entering either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the above measurement objects. The distinction as to whether or not these are objects to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (Figure 34).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S3001 the check target counter is set to "7".

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has changed from "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S3002). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the targets for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer 122a is the target for checking the numerical information.

If the determination in step S3002 is positive, an addition process is performed on the corresponding buffer counters 652a-652o (step S3003). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a-652o in the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer counter 652e is added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer counter 652a is added.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3002, or if the processing of step S3003 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3004). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3005). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S3005: NO), the processing from step S3002 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history into the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment above, but is stored as information on the number of times the ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the external output process in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (Figure 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S3101: YES), the number of counters among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o that are to be the output targets of the number information in the management CPU 112 is set in the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S3102). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the identified number of pieces of information is set in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, as already explained, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, so in step S3102, the output target counter is set to "7".

Then, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S3103), and the number information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o in the history memory 117 is read (step S3104). In this case, if the output target counter value is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the nth buffer counters 652a to 652o is the target for reading the number information. For example, if the output target counter value is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading the correspondence information and the fifth buffer counter 652e is the target for reading the number information, and if the output target counter value is "1", the first correspondence area 123a is the target for reading the correspondence information and the first buffer counter 652a is the target for reading the number information.

Then, an information output process is executed (step S3105). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S3103 and the number information read in step S3104 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number information for the correspondence information to be output this time.

Then, the value of the output target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3106). Then, it is determined whether the value of the output target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3107). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or greater (step S3107: NO), the processing from step S3103 onwards is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. Note that if a positive determination is made in step S3107, the values of the 1st to 15th buffer counters 652a to 652o are cleared to "0".

Figure 85 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S221 is executed in the timer interrupt process (Figure 18).

First, it is determined whether or not a calculation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S3201). The calculation trigger occurs when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started, and when the total number of game balls entering the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches or exceeds 500, which is the trigger reference number, as in the eleventh embodiment. Since the first time the parameter management process is executed after the supply of operating power has started is set as the calculation trigger, it is possible to easily generate a calculation trigger for various parameters by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF once and then ON again. Then, if a positive determination is made in step S3201, a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed as described below, so that it is possible to grasp the ball entry state of the game balls in the game area PA up to that point simply by performing the power OFF/ON operation. In addition, by configuring the system so that a calculation trigger occurs each time the total number of game balls entering the game reaches or exceeds the trigger reference number of 500, it becomes possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S3201: YES), the scoring history is read from the counter that is the target of storing the scoring history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o in the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 652a to 652g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 is able to recognize the buffer counters 652a to 652o from which the scoring history is to be read, based on the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various calculation processes are performed (step S3203). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the winning ball history read in step S3202 and the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning ball history. The main CPU 63 can determine which of the outlet 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 each winning history read in step S3202 corresponds to, using the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64, and can determine the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning history read in step S3202.

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S3203 are as follows:
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" the ratio of "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" to the total number of game balls paid out; and the eighth parameter: the ratio of K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34" is calculated.

It is then determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the first range (step S3204). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are within the first range and a positive determination is made in step S3204. If a positive determination is made in step S3204, a setting process for the first alarm state is executed (step S3205). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 651 is controlled to enter the first alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 651 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3204, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are in the second range (step S3206). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are in the second range and a positive determination is made in step S3206. If a positive determination is made in step S3206, a setting process for the second alarm state is executed (step S3207). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 651 is controlled to enter the second alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 651 emits yellow light.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3206, this means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, a setting process for the third notification state is executed (step S3208). In this setting process, the light emission of the notification light-emitting unit 651 is controlled so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting unit 651 emits red light.

The light emission state set in step S3205, step S3207, or step S3208 continues until a new notification state is set for the notification light-emitting unit 651 or until the supply of operating power to the notification light-emitting unit 651 is stopped. In addition, since the notification state of the notification light-emitting unit 651 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light-emitting unit 651 is temporarily turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission control of the notification light-emitting unit 651 is executed so that the light emission state corresponds to the type of information on the notification state stored in the main RAM 65.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The ball entry history into the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times the ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

An indicator light-emitting section 651 is provided to indicate the contents corresponding to the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112. As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are indicated by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the state of balls entering the game area PA without having to read the information stored in the history memory 117.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with an MPU 62 and a notification light-emitting unit 651. This makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light-emitting unit 651.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light-emitting unit 651 are performed by the main CPU 63, not the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content in the notification light-emitting unit 651.

When the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is reached; when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is reached; and when the calculation results of the various parameters do not correspond to either the first or second range, the third notification state is reached. In other words, the various parameters are not reported as they are, but rather content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent too many notification patterns in the notification light-emitting unit 651, and makes it possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light-emitting unit 651.

Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of power to the notification light-emitting unit 651 may be continued, so that the light-emitting state immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped is maintained. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the state of entry of the game ball in the game area PA by checking the notification light-emitting unit 651.

Alternatively, instead of this configuration, the notification light-emitting unit 651 may be configured to be turned off when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, but to be controlled to emit light corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, so that the notification light-emitting unit 651 emits light corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light-emitting unit 651 before opening at an amusement hall, it is possible to understand the ball entry status on the previous business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the notification light-emitting unit 651, but may be a display device having a display surface such as the pattern display device 41, or may be the speaker unit 54. In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the gaming hall via the external terminal board 97.

The special chart display unit 37a of the special chart unit 37 or the ordinary chart display unit 38a of the ordinary chart unit 38 may be configured to double as the notification light emitting unit 651. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or other range as in the above embodiment, a notification corresponding to the calculation result is executed in the special chart display unit 37a or the ordinary chart display unit 38a immediately after the supply of operating power is started. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the picture change display in the special chart display unit 37a or the start condition of the picture change display in the ordinary chart display unit 38a is satisfied, or may be configured to be temporarily suspended when the start condition of the picture change display is satisfied and to resume when the picture change display is finished. According to this configuration, it is possible to double as the special chart display unit 37a or the ordinary chart display unit 38a as a notification means for notifying the ball entry state of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light-emitting unit 651 may be provided in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light-emitting unit 651 may be provided in a position that is rearward of the pachinko machine 10 from the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to check the notification content that corresponds to the calculation results of various parameters without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for providing the information of each shot result to the management IC 66 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning port detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

The first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without the intervention of processing by the main CPU 63. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing to make the management CPU 112 recognize the results of each ball entry at the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, making it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

The branching points of the branching paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are located inside the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branching points and the branching paths SL21 to SL27 from outside, and prevents fraudulent behavior such as inputting abnormal ball entry results only to the management IC 66.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The following configurations of the other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the discharge adjustment means for periodically discharging the captured game ball B1 is configured to be provided above the first through gate 35, but the location of the discharge adjustment means is not limited to this. Here, the discharge adjustment means is a general term for the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first and sixth embodiments, the adjustment mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 430 in the fourth embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. For example, instead of the second through gate 39 in each of the above embodiments, in a game board that has a first opening that is an opening through which game balls can enter and that opens upward, and a second opening that is an opening equipped with an opening/closing means that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, the discharge adjustment means may be configured to be disposed above the first opening and the second opening.

Specifically, the first opening and the second opening are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board. The discharge adjustment means is located above the first opening, and only game balls discharged from the discharge adjustment means can enter the first opening. The opening/closing means of the second opening prohibits game balls from entering the second opening when in the closed state. When a game ball is taken into the discharge adjustment means and discharged from the discharge adjustment means to enter the first opening, the opening/closing means switches from the closed state to the open state, allowing the game ball to enter the second opening. The open state of the opening/closing means continues for a predetermined period, and if the number of game balls entering the second opening reaches a predetermined number during that predetermined period, a beneficial bonus is given to the player.

To transition the opening/closing means from a closed state to an open state, the player must aim the discharge adjustment means and fire the game ball. Also, to allow the game ball to enter the second opening a predetermined number of times, the player must aim the game ball at the second opening and fire it. In this way, the player can aim and fire the game ball, and if a predetermined result is achieved, a special bonus is awarded to the player, thereby increasing the player's sense of participation and making the game more interesting.

In this case, by using the discharge adjustment means to limit the timing at which the game ball enters the first opening, it is possible to avoid the opening/closing means being in the open state frequently. In other words, by using the discharge adjustment means, it is possible to appropriately manage the interval at which the opening/closing means transitions to the open state.

(2) The discharge adjustment means in each of the above embodiments may be provided above the first operating port 33, and the lottery mode by the winning/losing lottery means may be configured to have only one type of lottery mode. Here, the discharge adjustment means is a collective term for the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first and sixth embodiments, the adjustment mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 430 in the fourth embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, the main CPU 63 drives and controls the discharge adjustment means so that the dischargeable period during which the captured game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first operating port 33 occurs in a 1 sec cycle in the discharge adjustment means. The main ROM 64 stores a winning/losing judgment table in which a judgment value that is a target for winning a jackpot in the winning/losing judgment process is set. As already explained, the winning/losing judgment process is a process for judging whether the reserved information corresponds to a jackpot winning or not, and is a process executed in the special chart special power control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). In the winning/losing judgment table, (1250×n-5) to (1250×n) are set as the judgment value for winning the jackpot. Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. The probability of winning the jackpot by executing the winning/losing judgment process is approximately 1/210. In the first operating port 33, the jackpot target period during which the reserved information obtained by winning the game ball B1 is eligible for winning the jackpot occurs at 5 sec intervals and continues for 24 msec. If the dischargeable period in the discharge adjustment means does not correspond to the jackpot target period, the winning/losing judgment process does not result in a jackpot result. In this case, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 (FIG. 13) is updated, so that the dischargeable period may correspond to the jackpot target period. When the dischargeable period corresponds to the jackpot eligible period, the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/loss determination process is high. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge adjustment means toward the first operating port 33 at a 1-second cycle without fail, a win at the first operating port 33 will be eligible for a jackpot once in five times. In this way, by configuring the discharge adjustment means to create a situation in which a jackpot is likely to occur and a situation in which a jackpot is not likely to occur in the win/loss determination process, the player's interest can be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 around the discharge adjustment means, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

(3) The configuration for preventing the game ball B1 from rising or stopping, as described in each of the above embodiments, may be applied to the member for distributing the game ball B1 to one of the two passages.

Specifically, the game board is provided with a distribution winning device. When a winning occurs in either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a winning lottery is executed. If a small winning is won in the winning lottery executed in response to a winning in the second operating port 34, the distribution execution mode is entered. When a V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, the special power winning device 32 enters an open/close execution mode in which it is opened.

The distribution winning device has an upstream passage, which branches into a V winning passage and a discharge passage in a branching space. The upstream passage, V winning passage, and discharge passage have a passage cross section that allows one game ball B1 to pass through but does not allow multiple game balls B1 to pass through at the same time. Around the branching space, the upstream passage is formed in a straight line facing downward. Also, around the branching space, an entrance to the discharge passage is provided directly below the exit of the upstream passage. Therefore, if a game ball B1 that flows straight down the upstream passage around the branching space continues to move downward, it will enter the discharge passage.

In the branch space, a switching member is provided below the upstream passage and above the discharge passage. The switching member includes a rotating shaft, a plate-shaped switching piece that rotates around the rotating shaft from an initial position to a displaced position, and a switching drive unit that switches the switching piece from the initial position to the displaced position and from the displaced position to the initial position based on a signal from the main CPU 63. When the switching piece is in the initial position, the switching piece is in a first state in which it extends downward. In the first state, the discharge passage is opened upward. As a result, the game ball B1 that has flowed down the upstream passage enters the discharge passage.

On the other hand, when the switching piece is in the displaced position, the switching piece is in a second state in which it extends diagonally forward to the left. In the second state, the switching piece is located above the discharge passage, so that the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage comes into contact with the switching piece. In the second state, the contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined downward toward the front. Therefore, the path of the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the switching piece moves forward. The V winning passage is formed in front of the discharge passage in such a manner that the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the switching piece in the second state can enter the V winning passage. Therefore, when the switching drive unit switches the switching piece to the displaced position, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage is guided to the V winning passage. The distribution winning device is equipped with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 flowing down the V winning passage, and when the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor, it is a V winning.

The V winning passage is separated from the discharge passage by a plate-shaped partition member. The displacement position of the switching piece is set so that the distance from the free end of the switching piece in the displacement position to the upper end of the partition member is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. This prevents the game ball B1 from entering the discharge passage through the gap between the switching piece and the partition member in the second state in which the switching piece is in the displacement position. In this configuration, an intermediate state occurs in which the distance from the free end of the switching piece to the upper end of the partition member is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B1 while the switching piece is switching from the initial position to the displacement position. In the intermediate state, if the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage enters the gap between the rotating switching piece and the partition member, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 will be sandwiched between the switching piece and the partition member and stop there.

The configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, the distribution winning device has an escape passage adjacent to the discharge passage on the left side of the discharge passage. The entrance of the escape passage is provided at a position lower than the upper end of the partition member. The contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined backward toward the left, and the wall surface on the discharge passage side near the upper end of the partition member is inclined forward toward the left. In other words, both of the two surfaces that contact the game ball B1 in the intermediate state have an inclination for pushing the game ball B1 toward the escape passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 is pushed into the escape passage as the switching piece moves to the displacement state. This makes it possible to avoid the game ball B1 being pinched in the distribution winning device without causing the game ball B1 to rise or stop. The escape passage merges with the discharge passage at a midpoint of the discharge passage. When the game ball B1 is pushed toward the escape passage in the intermediate state where the switching piece is switched, the game ball B1 flows down the escape passage and is guided to a midway position in the discharge passage. The game ball B1 guided to the escape passage is not detected by the detection sensor installed in the V winning passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pushed into the escape passage in the intermediate state, a V winning does not occur, just as when the game ball B1 flows down the discharge passage.

The configuration described in the third embodiment above can be applied to this configuration. In detail, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352, the blade member 343 rotates around the rotation axis 344 with the rotation of the rotating body 340, and the blade member 343 takes a displaced position, thereby avoiding pinching of the game ball B1. Specifically, the plate-shaped switching piece has a fixed part on the fixed end side and a rotatable part on the free end side. A rotation axis is provided on the free end side of the plate-shaped fixed part, and the plate-shaped rotatable part is connected to the fixed part in a manner that allows it to rotate around the rotation axis. When no external force is applied, the surface of the fixed part in the switching piece is on the same plane as the surface of the rotatable part. When the rotatable part is pushed downward from the outside, it rotates downward, and when the external force is removed, it returns to its original state by the restoring force of the biasing member. When the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the rotatable part rotates downward as the switching piece moves to the displacement position. The restoring force of the biasing member is not strong enough to prevent the game ball B1 in contact with the partition member and the rotatable part from falling downward under its own weight. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is temporarily in contact with the partition member and the rotatable part does not get pinched and stop, but moves downward under its own weight and enters the discharge passage. In the switching piece in the displacement position, the protruding length of the fixed part above the discharge passage is a length that allows the fixed part alone to guide the game ball B1 to the V winning passage. When the switching piece is in the displacement position, if the game ball B1 that has fallen from above collides with the rotatable part, the rotatable part rotates downward. However, whether the rotatable part is not rotating or is rotating, the distance from the free end of the rotatable part to the upper end of the partition member is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the switching piece is fully moved to the displacement position, the game ball B1 does not get into the gap between the free end of the rotatable part and the upper end of the partition plate and does not enter the discharge passage. As described above, the switching piece has a fixed part, a rotation axis, and a rotatable part, and the rotatable part is configured to be rotatable around the rotation axis, so that the game ball B1 can enter the discharge passage without rising or stopping.

(4) In a gaming machine in which the second operating port 34 is opened when a gaming ball B1 that has entered the trigger generating device is detected, a configuration for preventing the gaming ball B1 from rising or stopping as described in each of the above embodiments may be applied to the trigger generating device.

Specifically, the game area PA is composed of an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 of the variable display unit 36. The first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, and a trigger generating device and a special opening device are provided in the right area PA3.

In the right area PA3, the special opening device is disposed below the trigger generating device. The trigger generating device includes a rotating body, a storage section that stores the rotating body, a trigger generating drive section that rotates the rotating body based on a signal from the main CPU 63, and a trigger generation detection sensor that detects the game ball B1 in the trigger generating area of the trigger generating device. The storage section includes standing walls that divide the storage space. At the top of the storage section, the left standing wall and the right standing wall are spaced apart, and the gap between the left standing wall and the right standing wall forms the entrance to the trigger generating device. The entrance to the trigger generating device is an opening that opens upward, and the width of the entrance is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The game ball B1 can enter the trigger generating device through the entrance. As the rotor rotates, the entrance of the trigger generating device changes between a state in which the game ball B1 can enter and a state in which the game ball B1 cannot enter. The special opening device includes a special opening that opens upward, an opening/closing member that can open and close the special opening, and a special drive unit that opens and closes the special opening by driving the opening/closing member based on a signal from the main CPU 63.

When a winning entry occurs in the first operating port 33, the main CPU 63 executes a jackpot lottery. The jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, which triggers a right generation state. In the right generation state, when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generation device and is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor, the opening/closing period of the special opening device begins. Then, the ball's entry into the open special opening triggers the payout of the game ball B1. When a preset reference time has elapsed while the special opening device is opening/closing, and when the number of balls entering the special opening reaches the reference number, the opening/closing period of the special opening device ends. Of these, when a preset reference time has elapsed while the special opening device is opening/closing, a second opening/closing operation is executed by the special opening device.

In this configuration, if a rotating body having one or more recesses capable of accommodating the game ball B1 is used as the rotating body of the trigger generating device, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 will be pinched between the rotating body and the standing wall when it enters the trigger generating device. In response to this, the configuration described in the first embodiment above can be applied to this configuration.

Specifically, a passage entrance is provided on the surface of the game board at a position corresponding to the upper part of the trigger generating device. In addition, an escape passage is formed on the game board to allow the game ball B1 that enters from the passage entrance to escape rearward and downward. The rotating body is disk-shaped, and the peripheral surface of the rotating body, excluding the recessed portion, is inclined in the axial direction toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is not taken into the recessed portion at the upper part of the trigger generating device is guided to the passage entrance along the inclination of the peripheral surface of the rotating body. At the upper part of the trigger generating device, the contact surface of the standing wall with the game ball B1 is inclined to the right toward the rear. In addition, the rotating body rotates clockwise. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pressed against the standing wall from the rotating body at the upper part of the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 is guided along the inclination of the standing wall and escapes toward the passage entrance at the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body and the standing wall at the top of the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance as the rotating body rotates. In this way, by applying a configuration to the top of the trigger generating device that prevents the game ball B1 from getting caught, the game ball B1 is prevented from rising or stopping when it enters the trigger generating device. The trigger generation detection sensor is provided inside the trigger generating device and can only detect game ball B1 that has been taken into the trigger generating device. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance, the ball's entry does not trigger the opening and closing operation of the special opening device.

The configuration described in the second embodiment above can be applied to this configuration. In detail, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252, the upper right standing wall 252 rotates around the rotation axis 254 to allow the game ball B1 to be taken in. Specifically, the standing wall has a rotation axis and a movable standing wall that can rotate around the rotation axis. The movable standing wall is located at the top of the trigger generating device and defines the right end of the entrance in the trigger generating device. The rotating body rotates clockwise. At the top of the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 that is about to enter the trigger generating device may be in contact with the rotating body and the movable standing wall. In this case, the game ball B1 is pushed toward the right where the movable standing wall is located as the rotating body rotates. The movable standing wall rotates around the rotation axis, allowing the force of the rotating body pressing the game ball B1 against the movable standing wall to be released. In addition, the contact surface of the movable upright wall with the game ball B1 is inclined downward and to the right. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pushed toward the contact surface by the rotating body, the movable upright wall rotates to the right, and the game ball B1 is guided by the inclination of the contact surface with the rotating upright wall and taken into the trigger generating device. By preventing the game ball B1, which is temporarily in contact with the rotating body and the movable upright wall, from being pinched, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from rising and stopping. Note that when the game ball B1 is temporarily in contact with the rotating body and the movable upright wall and then taken into the trigger generating device, if it is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor, this triggers the opening and closing operation of the special opening device to begin.

(5) The adjustment mechanism in each of the above embodiments (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) is not limited to a configuration in which the dischargeable period during which the game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 occurs only at regular intervals. For example, the adjustment mechanism may be configured to discharge the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at times other than the dischargeable period that occurs at regular intervals, within a range that does not exceed the upper limit number (4) of numerical information that can be held in the normal power holding area HA (Figure 13).

In the first embodiment, in addition to the four recesses 183b-183e (FIG. 4) that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, an additional fifth recess may be provided on the rotor 183. The fifth recess has the same shape and size as the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d, and can take in one game ball B1. In this case, the game ball B1 discharged from any of the four recesses 183b-183e enters the first through gate 35 at 1-second intervals, and the game ball B1 discharged at a timing other than the dischargeable period that occurs at 1-second intervals is taken into the fifth recess and enters the first through gate 35.

In the fifth embodiment, the open state of the adjustment unit 546 (FIG. 55) may be configured to occur at 0.5 sec intervals. When a game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 during the consecutive winning period of the low frequency support mode, a normal power opening win may occur in the normal power opening lottery at a rate of once every two times. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the open state of the adjustment unit 546 (FIG. 55) that occurs at 1 sec intervals may be configured to continue for 0.5 sec, which is longer than the fifth embodiment. In this case, in one open state, multiple game balls B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35. Here, the shortest launch interval in the game ball launch mechanism 27 is 0.6 sec. Therefore, in one open state, the number of game balls B1 that are discharged at a timing outside the original dischargeable period and enter the first through gate 35 can be kept within a range that does not exceed the upper limit number of numerical information that can be reserved by the normal power reservation area HA.

By configuring the game ball B1 to enter the first through gate 35 within a range that does not exceed the upper limit of the number of numerical information that can be held by the normal power holding area HA even at times other than the possible discharge period that occurs in a 1-second cycle, it is possible to generate a single, non-consecutive normal power release win even during a continuous period of no wins in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a continuous period of no wins in the low-frequency support mode continues for a long time, the player's anticipation for the continuous period of wins is heightened each time a normal power release win occurs, and the configuration prevents the player from getting bored.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history), but this is not limited to this, and only some of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry state of the game balls during a specified period for the ball entry section for which history information is stored.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the signal paths 118a to 118c are set to transmit information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game hole, corresponding to each of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. However, this is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the result of the ball entering the game hole of the same type may be transmitted as one type of information, even if there are multiple winning holes of the same type and multiple ball entering detection sensors corresponding to them. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(8) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but this is not limited thereto, and the correspondence information may be pre-stored in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute a process to cause the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and therefore it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(9) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be capable of two-way communication, and the correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting the transmission of the correspondence information is received from the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(10) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. However, this is not limited to this, and a dedicated signal path may be provided for transmitting the correspondence information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This allows the management IC 66 to determine what type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 based on the type of buffer 122a to 122o that receives the information.

(11) In the first embodiment and the like, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means as in the above-mentioned 17th embodiment so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received are made, or the main CPU 63 may be configured to send commands corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received to the audio and light-emitting control device 81, so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters are made using the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display device 41.

(12) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 may calculate various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the pattern display unit 41, etc. In this case, when the game hall opens for business, it is possible to check whether the ball entry pattern in the game area PA on the previous business day was normal or not.

(13) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to allow play to begin until a prohibition release operation is performed. Examples of configurations that prevent play from beginning include prohibiting the release of game balls, disabling each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, and not executing a win/loss determination process even if a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The prohibition release operation may also be an operation of turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erase switch turned ON, or an operation of an operation means that becomes operable when the game machine main body 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11. This makes it possible to prevent play from continuing in a situation where the game ball entry mode in the game area PA is abnormal.

(14) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using that history information may not be performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the calculation of various parameters using the read history information may be performed by the operator performing the reading operation, or the calculation of various parameters using the read history information may be performed by the reading device. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

(15) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the function of executing the storage process of the history information and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments may be provided by the main CPU 63, the payout CPU 92, or the sound and light emission control device 81. If the payout CPU 92 or the sound and light emission control device 81 has these functions, the information on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a will be sent from the main CPU 63 to a control entity that has those functions.

(16) The management IC 66 may be provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and may be configured to be able to calculate various parameters using history information in the management IC 66 and output information on the history information or various parameters even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to read the history information and various parameters using a reading device even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(17) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is configured to double as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with a reading device, this is not limited thereto, and the terminal used to read history information or various parameters with a reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position on the main control board 61 separate from the MPU 62.

(18) In the above embodiments, the correspondence memory 116, history memory 117, and calculation result memory 631 are not limited to configurations in which they are provided as non-volatile storage means such as flash memory. For example, any of these memories 116, 117, and 131 may be provided as volatile storage means that require a supply of power to store and retain information, and backup power may be supplied to the memory so that information can be stored and retained even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, or backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply and launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65.

(19) The configuration is not limited to one in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and the history information may not be stored and held, and various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new game ball is detected by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at any time.

(20) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and performs storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113, and a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. Also, for example, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the counter value corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is incremented by one. In addition, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using the history information at that time. In addition, when a trigger for external output to the read terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit outputs the various parameters that are the calculation results to the outside, and also outputs the history information to the outside.

(21) In addition to or instead of storing the information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the opening and closing execution mode may be stored as history information, the timing of the transition to the opening and closing execution mode and the timing of the end may be stored as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the high-frequency support mode may be stored as history information, or the occurrence of a specified abnormality may be stored as history information. Furthermore, the above-mentioned history information may be used to calculate the probability of transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode, or the frequency of occurrence of a specified abnormality. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device.

(22) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be configured as separate chips, as separate boards, or as separate control devices.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the outlet 24a is counted, while history information including RTC information may be stored for game balls entering bonus-triggering entry sections that trigger the payout of prize balls and the win/lose determination process, such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. This makes it possible to extract the history of game balls entering bonus-triggering entry sections, while calculating the frequency of game balls entering each bonus-triggering entry section relative to the total number of game balls dispensed.

(24) The configuration may include items other than those in each of the above embodiments that are recorded as history information. For example, the configuration may be such that at least one of the following is stored as history information: the lower tray 56a being full, the timing at which the full state began, and the timing at which the full state was released; the configuration may be such that at least one of the following is stored as history information: the tank 75 being in a ball-free state, the timing at which the ball-free state began, and the timing at which the ball-free state was released; and the configuration may be such that at least one of the following is stored as history information: the dispensing device 76 being in an abnormal state, the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 began, and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(25) In the first embodiment and the like, the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal, which is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, this is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 may recognize that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by sending a type identification command from the main CPU 63. In this case, it is not necessary to preset in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each buffer 122a to 122p and the type of signal input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(26) The number of game balls that enter a specific ball entry section while the front door frame 14 is open may be stored as history information, and the number of balls that is determined using the history information may be output to a reading device. This makes it possible to determine the number of game balls that enter a specific ball entry section while the front door frame 14 is open, and to determine whether or not there is any cheating. In addition, the number of game balls that enter a specific ball entry section while the front door frame 14 is open may be calculated when a specified calculation trigger occurs, and an abnormality notification may be issued if the calculated number of balls is abnormal. This makes it possible to deal with cheating that involves opening the front door frame 14 illegally and allowing game balls to enter a specific ball entry section.

(27) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when the management IC 66 is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(28) In the first embodiment and the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that in the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process to change the output state of each signal will match the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for each buffer 122a to 122o.

(29) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64 to the outside, the configuration may be such that one of the programs and data can be selectively output to the outside, or such that only a specific program can be output to the outside. In this case, it is possible to selectively read the information to be analyzed by the reading device. Note that a possible configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside is such that the main CPU 63 selects information to be output to the outside from the selection information received from the reading device via the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside.

(30) The other information to be outputted externally through the read terminal 102 for outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 externally is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs, history information of the abnormality occurrence may be stored, and the stored history information may be outputted externally through the read terminal 102.

(31) Detection sensors 42a-48a are provided for each of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, and the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA is determined by adding up the numbers of game balls detected by the detection sensors 42a-48a. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a passage area may be provided through which all game balls discharged from the play area PA pass one by one, and a discharge detection sensor may be provided to detect game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, the detection results of the discharge detection sensor can be used to determine the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA. In addition, in this configuration, as in each of the above embodiments, by providing detection sensors 42a-47a for detecting the number of game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry section to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(32) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio/light emitting control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 may be configured to control the audio/light emitting control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio/light emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, the functions of one of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the audio/light emitting control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio/light emitting control device 81 to the display control device 82 may be arbitrary.

(33) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, the results of the lottery process for the roles executed when starting a game by operating the start lever may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of winning each role may be calculated using that history information. When a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, this may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of transitioning to the special gaming state may be calculated using that history information. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of games played in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, and notifications corresponding to the results of the calculation of various parameters may be given by the gaming machine itself.

(34) The characteristic configurations of the first to eighteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the twelfth embodiment, and the eighteenth embodiment may be combined, or the characteristic configurations of the second embodiment, the tenth embodiment, and the fourteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, the configurations of the other embodiments may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fifteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) for awarding a bonus on at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the ball entry section;
Equipped with
A first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) in which the privilege is granted more easily than in the first mode are set as a control mode of the privilege granting state,
A guide means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entrance portion;
A predetermined situation generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63) for generating a predetermined situation (a consecutive winning period) in which each induction timing of the game ball guided by the induction means in the first mode corresponds to or is likely to correspond to the timing of the award trigger that triggers the award of the game ball guided to the ball entrance section;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A1, the first mode is configured to be less likely to result in a bonus-granting situation than the second mode. For this reason, in the first mode, the player's expectations for the bonus-granting situation are low. In this configuration, a predetermined situation is provided as a situation that occurs in the first mode, in which the timing of the game ball guided by the guidance means corresponds to or is likely to correspond to the bonus-granting trigger timing. This makes it possible to give a player performing the game ball launch operation in the first mode a sense of expectation that the predetermined situation may occur. By suppressing a decrease in the player's expectations for the bonus-granting situation in the first mode, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature A2. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) for awarding a bonus on at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the ball entry section;
A guide means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry portion;
A predetermined situation generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63) generates a predetermined situation (a consecutive winning period) in which each induction timing of the game ball guided by the guiding means to the ball entrance section at a predetermined time interval corresponds to or is likely to correspond to an award trigger timing that triggers the award of the privilege for the game ball guided to the ball entrance section;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A2, all or part of the conditions for the awarding of a bonus are met when the induction timing corresponds to the timing for triggering the awarding of a bonus or when a specified situation occurs that makes it easier to respond. The specified situation is a situation in which the possibility of awarding a bonus arises each time the induction timing occurs, and is an advantageous situation for the player. By configuring the game so that the specified situation occurs, the player can be made aware of the occurrence of the specified situation even when it is not, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined situation generating means generates the predetermined situation by changing the timing of the trigger for granting the bonus.

According to feature A3, the specified situation occurs when the award trigger timing is changed so that the guiding timing corresponds to the award trigger timing, or when the situation becomes easier to respond to, and the specified situation ends when the award trigger timing is changed so that the guiding timing does not correspond to the award trigger timing. By making the specified situation occur without warning, it is possible to make the player constantly aware of the specified situation. By constantly maintaining high expectations among the player for the occurrence of the specified situation, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature A4. A first update means (a normal power device opening counter C4, a function for executing the process of step S202 in the main CPU 63) for updating and storing numerical information;
A second updating means (opening initial value counter C5, a function for executing the process of step S113 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S204 in the main CPU 63) that updates and stores numerical information for updating the initial value of the first updating means;
Equipped with
The reward granting means includes:
A means for executing a predetermined process (a normal power release lottery) using the numerical information stored in the first update means based on the judgment criteria information (low frequency winning judgment value table T1) in which numerical information corresponding to the award trigger timing is set (a function for executing the process of step S705 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S717 in the main CPU 63);
In the predetermined process, when the numerical information stored in the first update means becomes a predetermined award result (a normal power release winning) which is numerical information corresponding to the award trigger timing, a means for awarding the privilege (a function for executing the processes of steps S410 and S411 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the processes of steps S803 to S807 in the main CPU 63);
It is equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A3, wherein the specified situation generating means generates the specified situation by setting numerical information stored in the second updating means as an initial value of the first updating means.

According to feature A4, by setting the numerical information stored in the second update means as the initial value of the first update means, the timing of occurrence of the specified situation can be made irregular. By making it unclear when the specified situation will occur, the player can be made constantly aware of the specified situation. By constantly maintaining high expectations among the player for the occurrence of the specified situation, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature A5. The predetermined situation generating means is
A means for executing a predetermined change process to change the temporal relationship between the guidance timing and the grant trigger timing each time a predetermined change timing occurs, thereby causing the predetermined situation (a function for executing the processes of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63);
When the change timing is reached in the predetermined situation, an extension means (a function for executing step S305 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the processing of step S712 in the main CPU 63) for extending the predetermined situation by postponing the execution of the predetermined change processing;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature A5, by postponing the execution of the specified change process, the specified situation that is advantageous to the player continues for a long time, making the specified situation more appealing. This increases the player's anticipation for the specified situation, and increases the player's interest in the game.

Feature A6. A starting ball entry section (first actuation port 33, 581, second actuation port 34, 582) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A means for creating a state advantageous to a player by setting as at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry section (a function for executing the process of step S215 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The starting ball entry section is equipped with an acceptance control means (a function of executing a normal ball entry control process in the main CPU 63) that can switch the starting ball entry section between a first predetermined state (a closed state of the normal power device 34a) in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second predetermined state (an open state of the normal power device 34a) in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the first predetermined state,
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the second predetermined state is more likely to occur than in the first mode are set as control modes of the starting ball entry section by the receiving control means,
The bonus granting means executes a predetermined judgment (a lottery for opening a normal power supply) with at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the ball entry section, and when the predetermined judgment results in a predetermined judgment result (a winning of the ball entry), the bonus is provided with a means for setting the start ball entry section to the second predetermined state (a function for executing the processes of steps S407 to S411 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the specified situation generating means generates the specified situation under one condition that the control mode of the starting ball entry section is the first mode.

According to feature A6, in the first mode, the starting ball entry area is less likely to enter the second predetermined state compared to the second mode. Therefore, in the first mode, the player's anticipation of the game ball entering the starting ball entry area is lower compared to the second mode. In contrast, by configuring the game to have a predetermined situation occur in the first mode, the player's anticipation of the game ball entering the starting ball entry area in the first mode can be increased. Because the predetermined situation occurs conditionally in the first mode, the impression that the first mode is at a disadvantage compared to the second mode can be alleviated.

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that the occurrence probability of the predetermined situation is set to a probability that is more advantageous to the player when the control mode of the reception control means is the second mode than when the control mode is the first mode, which includes both the predetermined situation and the situation not being the predetermined situation.

According to feature A7, when comparing the first mode as a whole, which includes both cases where a specified situation exists and cases where a specified situation does not exist, with the second mode, the second mode is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. By generating a specified situation in the first mode while maintaining the premise that the second mode is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the player's anticipation of the game ball entering the starting ball entry area in the first mode.

Feature A8. The game machine includes a launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) that launches game balls toward the game area based on a launching operation by a player.
The game area is provided with a first ball entry section (first through gate 35) located at a position where a ball can enter when a player operates the launch means in a first launch mode, and a second ball entry section (second through gate 39) located at a position where a ball can enter when a player operates the launch means in a second launch mode different from the first launch mode,
The guiding means guides the game ball toward the first ball entry portion,
A gaming machine as described in Feature A7, characterized in that when the control mode in the acceptance control means is the first mode, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the firing operation in the first firing mode than to perform the firing operation in the second firing mode, and when the control mode is the second mode, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the firing operation in the second firing mode than to perform the firing operation in the first firing mode.

According to feature A8, when there is one ball entry section, even when the control mode of the reception control means is the second mode, the game ball needs to be guided by the guiding means in order to enter the ball entry section. For this reason, a game ball that is not guided by the guiding means cannot enter the ball entry section. In contrast, by providing a second ball entry section that is different from the first ball entry section in which the guiding means is provided, when in the second mode, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entry section without passing through the guiding means. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which a predetermined judgment is executed in the second mode.

In addition, by changing the firing mode according to the situation to give the player an advantage, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of participation and increase the player's interest in the game, compared to a configuration in which the same firing mode is continued.

Feature A9. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A6 to A8, wherein the bonus granting means sets the starting ball entry section to the second predetermined state in a manner that makes it easier for a gaming ball to enter the starting ball entry section when the predetermined judgment results in the predetermined judgment when the control mode of the acceptance control means is the second mode, compared to when the predetermined judgment results in the predetermined judgment when the control mode of the acceptance control means is the first mode.

According to feature A9, when a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, which is inherently more disadvantageous to the player than the second mode, a predetermined judgment results in a predetermined judgment every time the game ball enters the entry section. Therefore, when the first mode is in a predetermined situation, the start entry section may enter the second predetermined state more frequently than when the second mode is in effect. In contrast, the configuration is such that the state in which the start entry section enters the second predetermined state when the predetermined judgment in the second mode results in a predetermined judgment is more likely to result in the game ball entering the start entry section than the state in which the start entry section enters the second predetermined situation when the predetermined judgment in the first mode results in a predetermined judgment. This makes it possible to achieve a balance between the frequency with which the game ball enters the start entry section in the second mode and the frequency with which the game ball enters the start entry section in the first mode and the predetermined situation.

Feature A10. The guiding means is
Guidance sections (near the intake port 185, near the intake port 262, above the adjustment mechanisms 330 and 430, near the adjustment section 546) that game balls flowing down the game area can reach;
A means (rotating body 183, 230, 340, 440) for guiding a game ball that has reached the guiding section toward the ball entrance section at a guiding possible timing (a timing when the ball is allowed to be taken in) when the guiding means is capable of guiding the game ball toward the ball entrance section;
Discharge means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding possible timing to a region different from the ball entry portion;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A10, game balls that reach the guiding section at a timing different from the guiding timing can be discharged, so game balls that are not taken in by the guiding means can be prevented from remaining near the guiding section. This makes it possible to maintain the area near the guiding section in a state where game balls that reach the guiding section at the guiding timing can be easily guided toward the ball entry section.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A10, characterized in that the ejection means includes a means (peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of blade portions 188-191) for ejecting gaming balls that reach the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding possible timing to the outside of the guiding means.

According to feature A11, by discharging a game ball that reaches the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to the outside of the guidance means at the guidance section, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying near the guidance section. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a game ball that is the target of guidance will be prevented from being guided to the ball entry section by a game ball that is not the target of guidance.

Feature A12. The discharge means is
A space through which game balls can flow down, the space being a flow-down space provided around the guiding means in the game area (spaces provided on the left and right of the adjustment mechanisms 180, 430, 530, 620, and a space provided to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220);
ball guide means (nails 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) that are provided in the game area with a gap between them that allows the game ball guided to the guide section at a timing different from the guideable timing to flow down into the flow space, and that guides the game ball flowing down in the game area toward the guide section;
The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A12, by configuring game balls that are guided to the induction section and not taken in by the induction means to flow downstream through the flow space, the possibility of game balls becoming stuck near the induction section can be reduced. In addition, since game balls can be guided to the induction section by the ball guiding means, the possibility of a shortage of game balls that the induction means guides to the ball entry section can be reduced.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A10 to A12, characterized in that the discharge means is provided with an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which a gaming ball that reaches the guiding section at a timing different from the guiding possible timing can enter.

According to feature A13, by configuring a game ball that reaches the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to be moved to another location via an auxiliary passage, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has reached the guidance section from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area while moving to another location after reaching the guidance section, and to prevent a game ball that has reached the guidance section from becoming stuck around the guidance section.

Feature A14. The rear boundary of the game area is defined by a plate-shaped area defining means (game board 24, 610);
The gaming machine described in feature A13, wherein the auxiliary passage enables the gaming ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

According to feature A14, by configuring the game ball that reaches the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to be discharged rearward from the front face of the area defining means, it is possible to prevent the member that divides the auxiliary passage from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area and disrupting the path of the game ball.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14, characterized in that the auxiliary passage is provided with a passage outlet (passage outlet 173) that discharges gaming balls that flow down the auxiliary passage toward the gaming area in front of the area defining means.

According to feature A15, in a configuration in which game balls that enter the auxiliary passage do not return to the play area, there is a possibility that there will be a shortage of game balls flowing downstream of the guiding means. In contrast, by configuring game balls that flow down the auxiliary passage to return to the play area from the passage exit, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a decrease in the number of game balls flowing downstream of the guiding means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine described in Feature A15, characterized in that the gaming area is provided with a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) for preventing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from upstream of the passageway exit from colliding with gaming balls discharged from the passageway exit toward the gaming area.

Feature A16 prevents a game ball attempting to return to the play area from the passageway exit from colliding with a game ball flowing down from upstream of the passageway exit in the play area and being returned back into the auxiliary passageway.

Feature A17. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A13 to A16, characterized in that the movement of the gaming ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to feature A17, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from outside, it is possible to avoid a situation where the movement of the game ball becomes untrackable as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in a configuration in which the game ball returns to the game area after passing through the auxiliary passage, it is possible to configure the game ball so that the player can continuously grasp its movement, thereby preventing the player from feeling unnatural when a game ball that entered the auxiliary passage and became invisible suddenly returns to the game area.

Feature A18. The guiding means is
an entrance prevention means (left side standing walls 181c, 181h, right side standing wall 181d, upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261, standing wall 352) for preventing the game balls flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means;
A rotating means (rotating body 183, 230, 340, 440) that is rotatable and has a taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, step surfaces 241a to 244a, vane member 343) that can take in and hold the game ball in the guiding means;
A rotation control means (a function for executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
It is equipped with
The entry prevention means is provided with an intake opening (intake port 185) as an opening through which the game ball that has reached the induction section can be taken into the inside of the induction means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A13 to A17, characterized in that the discharge means is equipped with avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right side upright wall 181d) that prevents a gaming ball from being pinched by discharging the gaming ball that has come into contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening so that the gaming ball enters the auxiliary passage.

According to feature A18, by discharging a gaming ball that has come into contact with the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening so that the gaming ball enters the auxiliary passage, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from becoming trapped and becoming stuck. In addition, by preventing the gaming ball from becoming trapped, it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden that must be performed by the manager of the amusement hall.

Feature A19. The gaming machine described in Feature A18, characterized in that the avoidance means applies a force toward the entrance of the auxiliary passage to a gaming ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening when the rotation means rotates.

According to feature A19, the rotation of the rotation means eliminates the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening. Therefore, no special configuration is required to prevent the game ball from getting caught. This makes it possible to avoid a complicated configuration and reduce manufacturing costs, and also ensures freedom in the placement of the guide means by avoiding an increase in size.

Feature A20. The gaming machine described in Feature A18 or A19, characterized in that the avoidance means includes a means (inclination of front faces 188b-191b) for applying a force including a downward component to the gaming ball when the gaming ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means.

According to feature A20, a force having a downward component is applied to a game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means. This makes it possible to prevent a game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means from being ejected upward, disrupting the flow of game balls upstream.

Feature A21. The discharge means is provided with a passage inlet (passage inlet 171) as an opening that allows the game ball to enter the auxiliary passage,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A18 to A20, characterized in that the intake means is provided with a means (a slope of the inner walls of recesses 183b to 183e) for preventing the gaming ball taken into the guiding means by the intake means from moving toward the passage entrance.

Feature A21 reduces the possibility that a game ball taken in by the intake means will be guided and enter the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the ball entry section. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the number of game balls guided to the ball entry section by the guidance means.

Feature A22. The guiding means is
An intake opening (intake port 262) that allows the game balls flowing down toward the guiding means to enter the inside of the guiding means;
An opening partitioning means (upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that partitions the intake opening;
A rotating means (rotating body 230, 340) that is rotatable and has a transporting means (step surface 241a to 244a, blade member 343) that transports the game ball taken into the inside of the guiding means inside the guiding means;
A rotation control means (a function for executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
A deformation means (upper right upright wall 252, vane member 343, pivot shaft 254, 344) is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball comes into contact with both the rotation means and the opening partition means at the intake opening, the deformation means enables the release of a force that tries to pinch the game ball;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized in that it comprises:

According to feature A22, the intake permission means around the intake opening is deformed, thereby preventing the game ball from becoming stuck between the rotation means and the opening partition means.

Feature A23. The gaming machine described in Feature A22, characterized in that the deformation means includes means (upper right upright wall 252, pivot shaft 254) that allows the force applied to the opening partition means to be released by temporarily displacing the opening partition means to a predetermined position.

According to feature A23, when the gaming ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and the gaming ball is pushed toward the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates, the opening partitioning means is temporarily displaced to a predetermined position, thereby preventing the gaming ball from becoming trapped and becoming stuck.

Feature A24. The gaming machine described in Feature A22 or A23, characterized in that the deformation means includes a means (wing member 343, rotating shaft 344) that allows the force applied to the rotation means to escape by temporarily displacing a part of the rotation means to a specific position.

According to feature A24, when a gaming ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates, a part of the rotating means temporarily displaces to a specific position to release the force pinching the gaming ball, thereby preventing the gaming ball from becoming pinched and becoming stuck.

Feature A25. The guiding means is
A rotating means (rotating body 183, 230, 340, 440) that is rotatable and has a taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, step surfaces 241a to 244a, vane member 343) that can take in and hold the game ball in the guiding means;
A rotation control means (a function for executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
A release means (discharge port 256, 621) for releasing the game ball being transported by the intake means toward the ball entrance section at a timing before the timing when the vertical movement direction of the intake means switches from downward to upward;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature A25, in the case of a configuration in which the game ball transported by the intake means is released at the timing when the up-down movement direction of the intake means switches from downward to upward, if the release timing of the game ball in the release means is delayed, the game ball transported by the intake means may start to rise in the guiding means. In contrast, by configuring the game ball transported by the intake means to be released at a timing before the up-down movement direction of the intake means switches from downward to upward, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the game ball rising in the guiding means if the release timing of the game ball is delayed.

Feature A26. The guiding means is provided with a fall prevention means (left side standing wall 181h, right side standing wall 181d) that prevents the game balls taken into the guiding means and transported by the taking-in means from falling downward and from being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means;
The gaming machine described in feature A25, characterized in that the release means is equipped with a release opening (discharge port 621) provided in the fall prevention means so that a gaming ball transported while in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guiding means.

According to feature A26, the game ball is transported while in contact with the drop prevention means, and is released towards the outside of the guiding means when it reaches the release opening. Because the position of the release opening in the drop prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the same every time. In addition, because the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature A27. The gaming machine described in Feature A26, characterized in that the release direction of the gaming ball released from the release opening is a direction toward the ball entrance section at the edge of the release opening.

According to feature A27, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it comes into contact with the edge of the release opening and is released toward the ball entry section. By fixing the position and direction in which the game ball is released from the guiding means, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means will reach the ball entry section.

Feature A28. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A25 to A27, characterized in that the release means is provided with a direction change means (discharge protrusion 181e, discharge protrusion end 263a) that changes the moving direction of the gaming ball that has reached the release position in the guide means at the release position where the gaming ball is released, to the moving direction for release.

According to feature A28, the direction change means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction in which the game ball is released, so that the game ball can be prevented from passing the release position without being released from the release means. This makes it possible to prevent game balls that are not released at the release position from rising up within the guiding means.

Feature A29. The direction change means protrudes to a midpoint in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner capable of contacting the game ball guided by the rotation means;
The gaming machine described in feature A28, wherein the rotating means is provided with a contact avoidance means (collision avoidance groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to feature A29, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without interfering with the rotation of the rotating means, the direction of movement of the game ball can be changed at the release position, facilitating the release of the game ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine described in Feature A28 or A29, characterized in that the direction change means includes a means (discharge right side 181g) for guiding the gaming ball that has come into contact with the direction change means at the release position toward the ball entry section.

According to feature A30, the release direction of the game ball at the release position is directed toward the ball entry area, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball released from the guidance means at the release position will reach the ball entry area.

Feature A31. The guiding means is
A direction control means (guide passage 545) for controlling the release direction of the game ball toward the ball entrance portion;
In the direction regulating means, an opening/closing means (adjustment unit 546) is located upstream in the flow direction of the game ball in the direction regulating means, and allows the game ball to enter the direction regulating means by opening the opening and prevents the game ball from entering the direction regulating means by closing the opening/closing means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, comprising:

According to feature A31, by simplifying the configuration of the guiding means, the volume of the guiding means in the play area can be reduced. This increases the options for where to place the guiding means in the play area, and increases the freedom of design.

Feature A32. The guiding means releases the game ball toward the ball entry portion,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A31, characterized in that a course adjustment means (electric nail 560) is provided at a position along the way of the gaming ball released from the guiding means toward the ball entry section, which sometimes allows the gaming ball to flow down toward the ball entry section and sometimes does not.

According to feature A32, some of the game balls released from the guiding means towards the entry area will miss the entry area. By making it uncertain whether the game ball released from the guiding means will enter the entry area, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means becomes one of the players' interests, increasing the attention paid to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature A33. The course adjustment means is
A change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when the change execution means comes into contact with the game ball;
a path adjustment drive means (nail drive unit 560a) capable of moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the guiding means comes into contact with the change execution means, and of moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the guiding means does not come into contact with the change execution means;
The gaming machine described in feature A32, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A33, by using a simple configuration in which the change execution means is moved to create a state in which the game ball can flow down toward the ball entry area and a state in which it cannot flow down, the volume occupied by the course adjustment means can be reduced and design freedom can be increased.

Feature A34. The guiding means is
A means for releasing a game ball so that the released game ball comes into contact with the course adjustment means (a first support surface 241, a second support surface 242, and a third support surface 243);
A means for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjustment means (a fourth support surface 244);
The gaming machine according to feature A32 or A33, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature A34, by configuring the guiding means to release game balls in multiple ways, it is possible to generate game balls that are released from the guiding means and enter the ball entry section and game balls that do not enter the ball entry section. In addition, by making the ratio of game balls released from the guiding means in which the balls come into contact with the trajectory adjustment means and in which the balls do not come into contact constant, it is possible to make the ratio of game balls released from the guiding means that enter the ball entry section and the ratio of game balls that do not enter the ball entry section close to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature A35. The guiding means releases the game ball toward the ball entry portion,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A34, characterized in that the ball entry section is provided in the gaming area at a position that is at least the diameter of the gaming ball away from the position where the release of the gaming ball is started by the induction means.

According to feature A35, the game ball can pass between the position where the guiding means starts releasing the game ball and the entry area. Therefore, there remains the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means will not enter the entry area. By making it uncertain whether the game ball released from the guiding means will enter the entry area, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means becomes one of the players' concerns, increasing the attention paid to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature A36. The guiding means releases the game ball from a predetermined release start position toward a predetermined release direction, thereby causing the game ball to reach the ball entrance portion;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A35, characterized in that the ball entry section has an inclined opening that is approximately perpendicular to the direction of movement of the gaming ball at the height position of the ball entry section after being released from the induction means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry section.

According to feature A36, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a game ball released from the guiding means and reaching the ball entry area will enter the ball entry area without coming into contact with the edge of the ball entry area. This reduces the likelihood that a game ball released from the guiding means will collide with the edge of the ball entry area, causing a delay in the ball entry timing or the ball falling out of the ball entry area.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features A1 to A36. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group A can solve the following problems.

Known gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, when a predetermined lottery condition is met, a lottery is held using numerical information, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the lottery.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, numerical information is obtained from an update means that updates numerical information for the lottery, and a determination is made as to whether or not the obtained numerical information corresponds to winning information. In addition, a configuration is also known in which numerical information is obtained based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a specific performance or notification is performed based on the result of a lottery that is performed using the numerical information.

In this regard, innovative gameplay is required for gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A guidance means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) capable of guiding a game ball that has reached a guidance section (near the intake port 185, near the intake port 262, the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 330, 430, near the adjustment section 546) toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581) at a guidance possible timing (timing when the intake is permitted);
Discharge means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding possible timing to a region different from the predetermined region;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, by discharging game balls that reach the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance possible timing, it is possible to prevent game balls that are not guided from remaining near the guidance section. This makes it possible to maintain the area near the guidance section in a state where game balls that reach the guidance section at the guidance possible timing can be easily guided.

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1 is characterized in that the ejection means includes a means (peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of blade portions 188-191) for ejecting gaming balls that reach the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding possible timing to the outside of the guiding means.

According to feature B2, by discharging a game ball that reaches the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to the outside of the guidance means at the guidance section, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying near the guidance section. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a game ball that is the target of guidance will be prevented from being guided to a specified area by a game ball that is not the target of guidance.

Feature B3. The discharge means is
A space through which the game balls can flow down, the flow-down space being provided around the guiding means in the game area (game area PA) (spaces provided on the left and right of the adjustment mechanisms 180, 430, 530, 620, and space provided to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220);
ball guide means (nails 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) that are provided in the game area with a gap between them that allows the game ball guided to the guide section at a timing different from the guideable timing to flow down into the flow space, and that guides the game ball flowing down in the game area toward the guide section;
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature B3, by configuring game balls that are guided to the induction section and not taken in by the induction means to flow downstream through the flow space, the possibility of game balls becoming stuck near the induction section can be reduced. In addition, since game balls can be guided to the induction section by the ball guiding means, the possibility of a shortage of game balls that the induction means guides to a specified area can be reduced.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B3, characterized in that the discharge means is provided with an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which a gaming ball that reaches the guiding section at a timing different from the guiding possible timing can enter.

According to feature B4, by configuring a game ball that reaches the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to be moved to another location via an auxiliary passage, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has reached the guidance section from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area while moving to another location after reaching the guidance section, and to prevent a game ball that has reached the guidance section from becoming stuck around the guidance section.

Feature B5. The rear boundary of the play area (play area PA) is defined by a plate-shaped area defining means (play board 24, 610),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the auxiliary passage allows the gaming ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

According to feature B5, by configuring the game ball that reaches the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to be discharged rearward from the front face of the area defining means, it is possible to prevent the members that define the auxiliary passage from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area and disrupting the path of the game ball.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in Feature B5, characterized in that the auxiliary passage is provided with a passage outlet (passage outlet 173) that discharges gaming balls that flow down the auxiliary passage toward the gaming area in front of the area defining means.

According to feature B6, if game balls that enter the auxiliary passage do not return to the play area, there is a possibility that there will be a shortage of game balls flowing downstream of the guiding means. In contrast, by configuring game balls that flow down the auxiliary passage to return to the play area from the passage exit, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a decrease in the number of game balls flowing downstream of the guiding means.

Feature B7. The gaming machine described in Feature B6 is characterized in that the gaming area is provided with a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) for preventing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from upstream of the passageway exit from colliding with gaming balls discharged from the passageway exit toward the gaming area.

Feature B7 prevents a game ball attempting to return to the play area from the passageway exit from colliding with a game ball flowing down from upstream of the passageway exit in the play area and being returned back into the auxiliary passageway.

Feature B8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B4 to B7, characterized in that the movement of the gaming ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to feature B8, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from outside, it is possible to avoid a situation where the movement of the game ball becomes impossible to follow as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in a configuration in which the game ball returns to the play area after passing through the auxiliary passage, it is possible to configure the game ball so that the player can continuously grasp its movement, thereby preventing the player from feeling unnatural when a game ball that entered the auxiliary passage and became invisible suddenly returns to the play area.

Feature B9. The guiding means is
an entrance prevention means (left side standing walls 181c, 181h, right side standing wall 181d, upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261, standing wall 352) for preventing the game balls flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means;
A rotating means (rotating body 183, 230, 340, 440) that is rotatable and has a taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, step surfaces 241a to 244a, vane member 343) that can take in and hold the game ball in the guiding means;
A rotation control means (a function for executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
Equipped with
The entry prevention means is provided with an intake opening (intake port 185) as an opening through which the game ball that has reached the induction section can be taken into the inside of the induction means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the discharge means is equipped with avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right side upright wall 181d) that prevents a gaming ball that has come into contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening from being pinched by discharging the gaming ball to an area other than the specified area.

According to feature B9, by discharging a gaming ball that has come into contact with the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening to an area other than the specified area, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from becoming trapped and becoming stuck. In addition, by preventing the gaming ball from becoming trapped, it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden that must be performed by the manager of the amusement hall.

Feature B10. The gaming machine described in Feature B9, characterized in that the avoidance means applies a force toward an area different from the predetermined area to a gaming ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening when the rotation means rotates.

According to feature B10, the rotation of the rotation means eliminates the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening. Therefore, no special configuration is required to prevent the game ball from getting caught. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs by avoiding a complicated configuration, and also ensures freedom in the placement of the guide means by avoiding an increase in size.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to Feature B9 or B10, characterized in that the avoidance means includes a means (inclination of front faces 188b-191b) for applying a force including a downward component to the gaming ball when the gaming ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means.

According to feature B11, a force having a downward component is applied to a game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means. This makes it possible to prevent a game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means from being ejected upward, disrupting the flow of game balls upstream.

Feature B12. The discharge means is
An auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which a game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding possible timing can enter;
A passage entrance (passage entrance 171) which is an opening that allows a game ball to enter the auxiliary passage;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in any one of features B9 to B11, characterized in that the intake means is provided with a means (a slope of the inner walls of recesses 183b to 183e) for preventing the gaming ball taken into the guiding means by the intake means from moving toward the passage entrance.

Feature B12 reduces the possibility that a game ball taken in by the intake means will enter the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before being guided to the specified area. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the number of game balls guided to the specified area by the guidance means.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features B1 to B12. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group B can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a gaming board that defines the gaming area through which gaming balls flow, and various components such as nails and windmills are arranged on the gaming board to appropriately disperse the direction in which the gaming balls fall as they flow down the gaming area. The gaming board also has openings from which the gaming balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. A gaming ball launched from a gaming ball launching device flows down the gaming area while coming into contact with various components, and when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, or an operating opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the gaming ball behaves in an optimal manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. Equipped with a guide means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581),
The induction means is
A rotating means (rotating body 183, 230, 340, 440) that is rotatable and has a taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, step surfaces 241a to 244a, vane member 343) that can take in and hold the game ball in the guiding means;
A rotation control means (a function for executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
A release means (discharge port 256, 621) for releasing the game balls being transported by the intake means toward the predetermined area at a timing before the timing when the vertical movement direction of the intake means switches from downward to upward;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C1, in the case of a configuration in which the game ball transported by the intake means is released at the timing when the up-down movement direction of the intake means switches from downward to upward, if the release timing of the game ball in the release means is delayed, the game ball transported by the intake means may start to rise within the guiding means. In contrast, by configuring the game ball transported by the intake means to be released at a timing before the up-down movement direction of the intake means switches from downward to upward, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the game ball rising within the guiding means if the release timing of the game ball is delayed.

Feature C2. The guiding means is provided with a fall prevention means (left side standing wall 181h, right side standing wall 181d) that prevents the game balls taken into the guiding means and transported by the taking-in means from falling downward and from being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means;
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that the release means is equipped with a release opening (discharge port 621) provided in the fall prevention means so that a gaming ball transported while in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guiding means.

According to feature C2, the game ball is transported while in contact with the drop prevention means, and is released towards the outside of the guiding means when it reaches the release opening. Because the position of the release opening in the drop prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the same every time. In addition, because the timing at which the rotation means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotation means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C2, characterized in that the release direction of the gaming balls released from the release opening is a direction toward the specified area at the edge of the release opening.

According to feature C3, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it comes into contact with the edge of the release opening and is released toward a predetermined area. By fixing the position and direction in which the game ball is released from the guiding means, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means will reach the predetermined area.

Feature C4. The predetermined area is provided with a ball entry section (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581) through which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter,
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) is provided for awarding a bonus under at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the ball entry section,
The gaming machine described in feature C3, wherein the release direction is a direction that enables the gaming ball released from the release opening to enter the ball entry section without colliding with the edge of the ball entry section.

According to feature C4, the possibility of the game ball released from the release opening colliding with the edge of the ball entry section, which can cause a delay in the timing at which the game ball enters the ball entry section, or the game ball falling out of the ball entry section, can be reduced.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C4, characterized in that the release means is provided with a direction change means (discharge protrusion 181e, discharge protrusion end 263a) that changes the moving direction of the gaming ball that has reached the release position at which the gaming ball is released by the guiding means to the moving direction for release.

According to feature C5, the direction change means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction in which the game ball is released, so that the game ball can be prevented from passing the release position without being released from the release means. This makes it possible to prevent game balls that are not released at the release position from rising up within the guiding means.

Feature C6. The direction change means protrudes to a midpoint in the front-rear direction of the play area (play area PA) in a manner that allows it to come into contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means;
The gaming machine described in feature C5, wherein the rotating means is provided with a contact avoidance means (collision avoidance groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to feature C6, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without interfering with the rotation of the rotating means, the direction of movement of the game ball can be changed at the release position, facilitating the release of the game ball.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C5 or C6, characterized in that the direction change means includes a means (discharge right side 181g) for guiding the gaming ball that has come into contact with the direction change means at the release position toward the specified area.

According to feature C7, the release direction of the game ball at the release position is directed toward a predetermined area, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball released from the guidance means at the release position will reach the ball entry area.

Feature C8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C7, characterized in that a course adjustment means (electric nail 560) is provided at a position on the way of the gaming ball released from the guiding means toward the specified area, which may or may not allow the gaming ball to flow down toward the specified area.

According to feature C8, some of the game balls released from the guiding means towards the specified area will miss the specified area. By making it uncertain whether the game ball released from the guiding means will enter the specified area, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means becomes one of the players' interests, increasing the attention paid to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature C9. The course adjustment means is
A change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when the change execution means comes into contact with the game ball;
a path adjustment drive means (nail drive unit 560a) capable of moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the guiding means comes into contact with the change execution means, and of moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the guiding means does not come into contact with the change execution means;
The gaming machine described in feature C8 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature C9, by using a simple configuration in which the change execution means is moved to create a state in which the game ball can flow down toward a specified area and a state in which it cannot flow down, the volume occupied by the course adjustment means can be reduced and design freedom can be increased.

Feature C10. The guiding means is
A means for releasing a game ball so that the released game ball comes into contact with the course adjustment means (a first support surface 241, a second support surface 242, and a third support surface 243);
A means for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjustment means (a fourth support surface 244);
The gaming machine according to feature C8 or C9, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature C10, by configuring the guiding means to release game balls in multiple ways, it is possible to generate game balls that are released from the guiding means and enter the specified area and game balls that do not enter. In addition, by making the ratio of released game balls that contact the trajectory adjustment means and released game balls that do not contact the trajectory adjustment means constant, it is possible to make the ratio of game balls released from the guiding means that enter the specified area and the ratio of game balls that do not enter the specified area close to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature C11. The guiding means releases the game ball toward the predetermined area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that the specified area is provided in the gaming area (game area PA) at a position that is at least the diameter of the gaming ball away from the position where the release of the gaming ball is started by the induction means.

According to feature C11, the game ball can pass between the position where the guiding means starts releasing the game ball and the predetermined area. Therefore, there remains the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means will not enter the predetermined area. By making it uncertain whether the game ball released from the guiding means will enter the predetermined area, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means becomes one of the players' concerns, increasing the attention paid to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature C12. The predetermined area is provided with a ball entry section (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter, and one of the conditions for granting a special benefit is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entry section;
The guiding means causes the game ball to reach the ball entrance portion by releasing the game ball from a predetermined release start position toward a predetermined release direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C11, characterized in that the ball entry section has an inclined opening that is approximately perpendicular to the direction of movement of the gaming ball at the height position of the ball entry section after being released from the induction means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry section.

According to feature C12, it is possible to increase the possibility that a game ball released from the guiding means and reaching the ball entry area will enter the ball entry area without coming into contact with the edge of the ball entry area. This reduces the possibility that a game ball released from the guiding means will collide with the edge of the ball entry area, causing a delay in the ball entry timing or falling out of the ball entry area.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features C1 to C12. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group C can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a gaming board that defines the gaming area through which gaming balls flow, and various components such as nails and windmills are arranged on the gaming board to appropriately disperse the direction in which the gaming balls fall as they flow down the gaming area. The gaming board also has openings from which the gaming balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. A gaming ball launched from a gaming ball launching device flows down the gaming area while coming into contact with various components, and when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, or an operating opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the gaming ball behaves in an optimal manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Equipped with a guide means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first actuation port 33, 581),
The induction means is
An intake opening (intake port 262) that allows the game balls flowing down toward the guiding means to enter the inside of the guiding means;
An opening partitioning means (upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that partitions the intake opening;
A rotating means (rotating body 230, 340) that is rotatable and has a transporting means (step surface 241a to 244a, blade member 343) that transports the game ball taken into the inside of the guiding means inside the guiding means;
A rotation control means (a function for executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
A deformation means (upper right upright wall 252, vane member 343, pivot shaft 254, 344) is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball comes into contact with both the rotation means and the opening partition means at the intake opening, the deformation means enables the release of a force that tries to pinch the game ball;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature D1, the deformation means around the intake opening deforms, and the game ball can be guided to a specified area while avoiding a situation in which the game ball becomes stuck between the rotation means and the opening partition means and becomes stuck there. This prevents the game ball from getting stuck, which would cause the game to be interrupted, or the need to deal with the problem of removing the stuck game ball.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the deformation means includes means (upper right upright wall 252, pivot shaft 254) that allows the force applied to the opening partition means to be released by temporarily displacing the opening partition means to a predetermined position.

According to feature D2, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and the game ball is pushed toward the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates, the opening partitioning means is temporarily displaced to a predetermined position, thereby preventing the game ball from becoming trapped and becoming stuck.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the deformation means includes a means (wing member 343, rotating shaft 344) that allows the force applied to the rotation means to escape by temporarily displacing a part of the rotation means to a specific position.

According to feature D3, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates, a part of the rotating means temporarily displaces to a specific position to release the force pinching the game ball, thereby preventing the game ball from becoming pinched and becoming stuck.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features D1 to D3. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group D can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a gaming board that defines the gaming area through which gaming balls flow, and various components such as nails and windmills are arranged on the gaming board to appropriately disperse the direction in which the gaming balls fall as they flow down the gaming area. The gaming board also has openings from which the gaming balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. A gaming ball launched from a gaming ball launching device flows down the gaming area while coming into contact with various components, and when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, or an operating opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the gaming ball behaves in an optimal manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A guide means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entrance portion;
Equipped with
The guiding means is provided with a discharge means (discharge port 256, 621) for discharging the game ball toward the ball entrance portion,
A gaming machine characterized in that the ball entrance section is provided at a position away from the release means by at least the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to feature E1, the game ball released from the releasing means must flow down a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball before entering the entry area. For this reason, depending on the direction and speed of the game ball released from the releasing means, the game ball may or may not enter the entry area. If all game balls released from the releasing means enter the entry area, the player may lose interest in the fate of the game balls after release. In contrast, by making it uncertain whether the game ball released from the releasing means will enter the entry area, the player's attention is drawn to the fate of the game balls after release, which can increase the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The guiding means is
A rotating means (rotating body 183, 230, 340, 440) that is rotatable and has a taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, step surfaces 241a to 244a, vane member 343) that can take in and hold the game ball in the guiding means;
A rotation control means (a function for executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
A fall prevention means (a left standing wall 181h and a right standing wall 181d) for preventing the game balls taken into the guiding means and being transported by the taking-in means from falling downward and from being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature E1 is characterized in that the release means is equipped with a release opening (discharge port 621) provided in the fall prevention means so that a gaming ball transported while in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guiding means.

According to feature E2, the game ball is transported while in contact with the drop prevention means, and is released towards the outside of the guiding means when it reaches the release opening. Because the position of the release opening in the drop prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the same every time. In addition, because the timing at which the rotation means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotation means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, characterized in that the release direction of the gaming ball released from the release opening is a direction toward the ball entrance section at the edge of the release opening.

According to feature E3, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it comes into contact with the edge of the release opening and is released toward the ball entry section. By fixing the position and direction in which the game ball is released from the guiding means, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means will reach the ball entry section.

Feature E4. The gaming machine described in Feature E2 or E3, wherein the release means is provided with a direction change means (discharge protrusion 181e, discharge protrusion end 263a) that changes the moving direction of the gaming ball that has reached the release position in the guide means at the release position where the gaming ball is released, to the moving direction for release.

According to feature E4, the direction change means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction in which the game ball is released, thereby preventing the game ball from passing the release position without being released from the release means.

Feature E5. The direction change means protrudes to a midway position in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner capable of contacting the game ball guided by the rotation means;
The gaming machine described in feature E4, wherein the rotating means is provided with a contact avoidance means (collision avoidance groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to feature E5, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without interfering with the rotation of the rotating means, the direction of movement of the game ball can be changed at the release position, facilitating the release of the game ball.

Feature E6. The gaming machine described in Feature E4 or E5, characterized in that the direction change means includes a means (discharge right side 181g) for guiding the gaming ball that has come into contact with the direction change means at the release position toward the ball entry section.

According to feature E6, the release direction of the game ball at the release position is directed toward the ball entry area, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball released from the guidance means at the release position will reach the ball entry area.

Feature E7. The release means is provided with a direction regulating means (guide passage 545) for regulating the release direction of the game ball toward the ball entrance portion,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the guiding means is located upstream of the direction in which the gaming ball flows downstream in the direction regulating means, and is equipped with an opening/closing means (adjustment unit 546) that allows the gaming ball to enter the direction regulating means when in an open state, and prevents the gaming ball from entering the direction regulating means when in a closed state.

According to feature E7, by using a simple guiding means composed of a direction-determining means and an opening/closing means, the volume of the guiding means in the play area can be reduced. This increases the options for where to place the guiding means in the play area, and increases the freedom of design.

Feature E8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E7, characterized in that the gaming area is provided with a course adjustment means (electric nail 560) at a position midway along the way of the gaming ball released from the release means toward the ball entry section, which allows or does not allow the gaming ball to flow down toward the ball entry section.

According to feature E8, some of the game balls released from the release means towards the ball entry section will miss the ball entry section. By providing a course adjustment means that causes the game ball released from the release means to either enter the ball entry section or not enter the ball entry section, it is possible to make it uncertain whether the game ball released from the release means will enter the ball entry section.

Feature E9. The course adjustment means is
A change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when the change execution means comes into contact with the game ball;
a path adjustment drive means (nail drive unit 560a) capable of moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the release means comes into contact with the change execution means, and of moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the release means does not come into contact with the change execution means;
The gaming machine described in feature E8 is characterized by being equipped with:

Feature E9 has a simple configuration in which the change execution means is moved to create a state in which the game ball can flow down toward the ball entry area and a state in which it cannot flow down, thereby reducing the volume occupied by the course adjustment means and increasing the freedom of design.

Feature E10. The release means comprises:
A means for releasing a game ball so that the released game ball comes into contact with the course adjustment means (a first support surface 241, a second support surface 242, and a third support surface 243);
A means for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjustment means (a fourth support surface 244);
The gaming machine according to feature E8 or E9, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature E10, by configuring the release means to release game balls in a plurality of different ways, it is possible to produce both game balls that are released from the release means and enter the ball entry section and game balls that do not enter the ball entry section. In addition, by making the rate at which the released game balls come into contact with the trajectory adjustment means and the rate at which they do not come into contact with the trajectory adjustment means constant in the release means, it is possible to make the rate at which the game balls released from the release means enter the ball entry section and the rate at which they do not enter the ball entry section close to the rate set in the design stage.

Feature E11. The release means releases the game ball from a predetermined release start position toward a predetermined release direction to cause the game ball to reach the ball entrance portion;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E10, characterized in that the ball entry section has an inclined opening that is approximately perpendicular to the direction of movement of the gaming ball at the height position of the ball entry section after being released from the release means and flowing down to that height position.

Feature E11 increases the likelihood that a game ball released from the release means and reaching the ball entry area will enter the ball entry area without coming into contact with the edge of the ball entry area. This reduces the likelihood that a game ball released from the release means will collide with the edge of the ball entry area, resulting in a delay in the ball entry timing or the ball falling out of the ball entry area.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features E1 to E11. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention related to the above feature group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a gaming board that defines the gaming area through which gaming balls flow, and various components such as nails and windmills are arranged on the gaming board to appropriately disperse the direction in which the gaming balls fall as they flow down the gaming area. The gaming board also has openings from which the gaming balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. A gaming ball launched from a gaming ball launching device flows down the gaming area while coming into contact with various components, and when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, or an operating opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the gaming ball behaves in an optimal manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific storage execution means (a function of executing ball entry detection processing in the main CPU 63) for storing corresponding information in a specific storage means (main RAM 65) when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the process of step S219 in the master CPU 63, and a function for executing the process of step S1008 in the payout CPU 92) for executing a process for awarding a bonus to a player based on information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means being stored in the specific storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the sixteenth embodiment), and predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) that enables the number of gaming balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment).

According to feature F1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a special benefit is given to the player. This allows the player to play while hoping that the game ball will enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and the predetermined information that allows the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine is stored in the specific storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, in which the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of a process for granting a bonus to a player.

According to feature F2, the specified information does not trigger the execution of a process for granting a bonus to a player, making it possible to store and retain the specified information in an information format aimed at appropriately managing the manner in which game balls enter the specified entry means.

Feature F3. The game machine is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
The gaming machine described in feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined memory execution means executes storage of corresponding information in the predetermined memory means when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, and stores specific information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) that enables the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific ball entry means to be identified by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine in the predetermined memory means.

According to feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the ball entry patterns of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means but also the ball entry patterns of game balls into the specific ball entry means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequencies between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F3, characterized in that all ball entry means for discharging entered gaming balls from the game area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are ball entry means that are the subject of storing information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering the game area in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature F4, all ball entry means that eject game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in a specified storage means, making it possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means using information stored in the specified storage means. In addition, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls that enter a specified ball entry means to the number of game balls that are ejected from the game area using information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature F5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature F5, the specified information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the specified ball entry means, and by using the specified information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of game balls into the specified ball entry means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of gaming balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature F6, the specified information is counting information on the number of game balls that have entered the specified ball entry means, making it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the specified ball entry means while minimizing the information volume of the specified information.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F6, characterized in that the predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information in the predetermined storage means that enables identification of whether or not a gaming ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined circumstance (a function for executing the processes of steps S1404 and S1409 in the management CPU 112 in the first to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2704 in the management CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2803 in the management CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment).

Feature F7 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and manage the manner in which a game ball enters a specific entry means.

Feature F8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F7, characterized in that it is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature F8, it is possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to analyze the manner in which gaming balls enter a specified ball entry means.

Feature F9. The gaming machine is provided with a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the external output means utilizes the information output section to output the information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature F9, it is possible to output information stored in a specified storage means to the outside by utilizing an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output information stored in a specified storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The gaming machine described in Feature F9 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S1502 in the main CPU 63) for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and for outputting information corresponding to the identification result.

According to feature F10, in a configuration in which information stored in a specified storage means is output to the outside using an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output to the outside is the control program or the information stored in the specified storage means, and outputs the identified information to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature F11. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature F11, the second control means, which is provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means, has a predetermined memory execution means, so that it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing an extreme increase in the processing load of the first control means.

Feature F12. The gaming machine described in Feature F11, characterized in that the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature F13. The game machine is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
The predetermined storage execution means executes storage of information corresponding to a game ball entering the specific entry means in the predetermined storage means when the game ball enters the specific entry means, thereby storing specific information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) that enables the number of game balls entering the specific entry means or the frequency of the game balls entering the specific entry means to be specified by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine in the predetermined storage means;
The first control means is
A first transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A second transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to feature F11 or F12, further comprising:

According to feature F13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the ball entry patterns of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means but also the ball entry patterns of game balls into the specific ball entry means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequencies between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the specified ball entry means, first information is sent to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, second information is sent to the second control means using the second signal path. This allows the type of information to be transmitted to correspond to the signal path, making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the second control means.

Feature F14. The gaming machine described in Feature F13, characterized in that the first control means includes a third transmission means (a function of outputting one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function of outputting one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63) that transmits, to the second control means, identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, via a third path.

According to feature F14, it is possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and to manage the entry patterns of game balls into the predetermined entry means and the entry patterns of game balls into the specific entry means. In addition, because the identification information that enables identification of whether a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing the identification information from other information such as the first information and the second information in the second control means.

Feature F15. The gaming machine described in feature F13 or F14, characterized in that the first control means includes an identification information transmission means (a function for executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature F15, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined goal entry means and that the second information corresponds to a specific goal entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F16. The gaming machine described in Feature F15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature F16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means, so that in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means and a specific ball entry means, it becomes possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature F17. The gaming machine described in Feature F15 or F16, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature F17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, making it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature F18. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F15 to F17, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, is provided with a means (function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature F18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the goal entry means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the goal entry means that corresponds to the information to be transmitted to the second control means each time the first information or second information is transmitted from the first control means. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and second information.

Feature F19. The first control means is provided with a third transmission means for transmitting third information, which enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path (a function for outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function for outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the eighth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features F15 to F18, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation is present, even without receiving the identification information.

According to feature F19, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined entry means and the manner in which the game ball enters the specific entry means. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F20. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F13 to F19, characterized in that the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) capable of receiving information from the first control means, the number of receiving units being greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

According to feature F20, the second control means is provided with a greater number of receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the gaming machine, it is possible to accommodate this without changing the configuration related to the receiving units. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F21. A first external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) for outputting a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables the user to recognize that the predetermined ball entry means corresponds to the first external output means to a device outside the gaming machine;
A second external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) outputs a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables recognition of the specific ball entry means to be associated with the specific ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F20, further comprising:

According to feature F21, it is possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine, and to use the read information to identify the manner in which a gaming ball enters a specified entry means and the manner in which a gaming ball enters a specific entry means. In addition, when the external output is performed, information that is a combination of the specified information and information that allows recognition that the information corresponds to the specified entry means is output to the outside, and information that is a combination of the specific information and information that allows recognition that the information corresponds to the specific entry means is output to the outside. This makes it possible to identify each entry mode using the information read from the specified storage means.

Feature F22. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F21, characterized in that it is provided with information calculation means for calculating state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the gaming area during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information (in the first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management CPU 112; in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013, and S2017 in the management CPU 112; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2202 in the management CPU 112; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2402 in the management CPU 112; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2605 in the management CPU 112; and in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S3203 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature F22, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the entrance behavior of the gaming ball using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the entrance behavior of the gaming ball itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature F23. The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that can specify whether or not the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined situation (a function for executing the processes of steps S1404 and S1409 in the management CPU 112 in the first to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2704 in the management CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2803 in the management CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in feature F22 is characterized in that the information calculation means is provided with a means for calculating the state information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entrance of a gaming ball into the predetermined ball entrance means in the predetermined situation (in the first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the management CPU 112; in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the management CPU 112; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2202 in the management CPU 112; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2402 in the management CPU 112; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2605 in the management CPU 112; and in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3203 in the main CPU 63).

Feature F23 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate state information corresponding to the ball's entry state.

Feature F24. A gaming machine according to feature F22 or F23, characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the process of step S1619 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S2205 in the management CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to feature F24, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, which makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the specified information exceeds the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature F25. A gaming machine according to feature F22 or F23, characterized in that even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature F25, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means, so that when the mode information is read out and the game ball's entry mode is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature F26. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F22 to F25, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific memory execution means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific memory execution means is started.

According to feature F26, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature F27. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F22 to F26, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific memory execution means.

According to feature F27, since the behavior information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the control means, it becomes possible to manage the behavior information in detail within a business day.

Feature F28: The information calculation means calculates the state information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F22 to F27, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when a game is not being played, and when a game is started when the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to feature F28, since the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of calculation of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is stopped, and when a game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of the mode information, and to appropriately derive the mode information when a game is being played.

Feature F29. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F22 to F28, characterized in that it is provided with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature F29, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state in which the gaming ball entered the game.

Feature F30. The gaming machine described in Feature F29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature F30, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read out and the mode of the game ball's entry is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature F31. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature F29 or F30, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature F31, in a configuration in which a second control means having an external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature F32: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F22 to F31, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (in the 9th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management CPU 112, and in the 10th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2204 in the management CPU 112) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631).

Feature F32 allows the gaming machine to accumulate status information. This makes it possible to read out multiple status information at once when managing the game ball's entry status.

Feature F33. The result storage and execution means
A means for determining whether the aspect information is information to be stored (a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112);
A means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine described in feature F32 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature F33, when the behavior information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, the behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature F34. The gaming machine according to feature F32 or F33, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in association with the mode information in the calculation result storage means.

According to feature F34, information that allows the time when the behavior information was calculated to be identified is attached to the behavior information. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing the time when each behavior information was calculated.

Feature F35. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features F22 to F34, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature F35, in a configuration in which a second control means having an information calculation means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature F36. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F22 to F35, characterized in that it is provided with a notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S3205, S3207, and S3208 in the main CPU 63) that controls a notification means (notification light-emitting unit 651) so as to notify content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature F36, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or the like to understand the management results of the game ball's entry mode without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature F37: The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine described in feature F36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature F37 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature F38. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F36 or F37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature F38, in a configuration in which a second control means having a predetermined storage means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it is possible to consolidate in the first control means the function of calculating the status information and the function of executing a notification corresponding to the calculation result.

Feature F39. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F36 to F38, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the state information is information in a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the state information is information in a second range.

According to feature F39, the behavior information is not reported as is, but rather the content corresponding to the range in which the behavior information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature F40. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F39, characterized in that it is provided with a means for externally outputting corresponding information when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of step S220 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature F40, in a configuration in which corresponding information is output to the outside when a gaming ball enters a specified entry means, the specified information is stored in a specified storage means. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the specified entry means by using the corresponding information, while accurately grasping the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the specified entry means by using the specified information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature F41. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F40, characterized in that the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature F41 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features F1 to F41. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the master CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured in the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
an information calculation means for calculating aspect information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the control CPU 112; in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the control CPU 112; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2202 in the control CPU 112; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2402 in the control CPU 112; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2605 in the control CPU 112; and in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3203 in the master CPU 63);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature G1, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in a specified storage means, and the specified information is stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of a specified event. Furthermore, by storing and holding the specified information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the specified information.

In addition, the gaming machine uses the specified information stored in the specified storage means to calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specified period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game results during a specified period, for example, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature G2. The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that enables identification of whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation or not in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1204 and S1209 in the management CPU 112 in the first to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2704 in the management CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2803 in the management CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment);
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (in the first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the control CPU 112; in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the control CPU 112; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2202 in the control CPU 112; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2402 in the control CPU 112; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2605 in the control CPU 112; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S3203 in the main CPU 63).

Feature G2 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specific period of time.

Feature G3. A gaming machine according to Feature G1 or G2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the process of step S1619 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S2205 in the management CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to feature G3, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, which makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the specified information exceeds the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature G4. A gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature G4, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means, so that when reading out the mode information and analyzing the results of playing during a specified period, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G4, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature G5, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature G6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G5, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62).

According to feature G6, since the behavior information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the control means, it becomes possible to manage the behavior information in detail within a business day.

Feature G7: The information calculation means calculates the status information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when a game is not being played, and when a game is started when the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to feature G7, since the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of calculation of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is stopped, and when a game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of the mode information, and to appropriately derive the mode information when a game is being played.

Feature G8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G7, characterized in that it is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature G8, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state in which the gaming ball entered the game.

Feature G9. The gaming machine described in Feature G8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature G9, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read out and the mode of the game ball's entry is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature G10. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature G8 or G9, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature G10, in a configuration in which a second control means having an external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature G11: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (in the 9th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management CPU 112, and in the 12th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2204 in the management CPU 112) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631).

Feature G11 allows the gaming machine to accumulate behavior information. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature G12. The gaming machine described in Feature G11, characterized in that the result storage execution means includes a means for storing the state information in the calculation result storage means when the state information is information to be stored (a function for executing the processing of step S2204 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature G12, when the behavioral information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, the behavioral information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavioral information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature G13. The gaming machine according to feature G11 or G12, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means in association with the mode information.

According to feature G13, information that allows the time when the behavior information was calculated is attached to the behavior information. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing the time when each behavior information was calculated.

Feature G14: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G13, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature G14, in a configuration in which a second control means having an information calculation means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature G15. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3205, S3207, and S3208 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 651) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature G15, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other person in charge to understand the results of gaming management for a specified period of time without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature G16: The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine described in feature G15 is characterized in that the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature G16 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature G17: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature G15 or G16, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature G17, in a configuration in which a second control means having a predetermined storage means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it is possible to consolidate in the first control means the function of calculating the status information and the function of executing a notification corresponding to the calculation result.

Feature G18. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G15 to G17, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the state information is information in a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the state information is information in a second range.

According to feature G18, the behavior information is not reported as is, but rather the content corresponding to the range in which the behavior information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature G19. A predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured in a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
an information calculation means for calculating state information corresponding to the ball-entry state of the game ball in the game area during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information (a function for executing the processes of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the control CPU 112 in the first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013, and S2017 in the control CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2202 in the control CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2402 in the control CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2605 in the control CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature G19, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, a storage process for the corresponding information is executed on the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior by itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature G20. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G19, characterized in that the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature G20 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features G1 to G20. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the master CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured in the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, by using the predetermined information, aspect information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period (in the first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the control CPU 112; in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the control CPU 112; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2202 in the control CPU 112; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2402 in the control CPU 112; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2605 in the control CPU 112; and in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3203 in the master CPU 63);
a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2010, S2014, and S2018 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (a calculation result memory 631);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature H1, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine uses the specified information stored in the specified storage means to calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specified period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game results during a specified period, for example, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

In addition, it is possible to accumulate behavior information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature H2. The gaming machine described in Feature H1, characterized in that the result storage execution means includes a means for storing the state information in the calculation result storage means when the state information is information to be stored (a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature H2, when the behavioral information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, the behavioral information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavioral information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or H2, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means in association with the mode information.

According to feature H3, information that allows the time when the behavior information was calculated to be identified is attached to the behavior information. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing the time when each behavior information was calculated.

Feature H4. The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that enables identification of whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1204 and S1209 in the management CPU 112 in the first to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2704 in the management CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2803 in the management CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment),
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (in the first to seventh, eighth, tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the control CPU 112; in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the control CPU 112; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2202 in the control CPU 112; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2402 in the control CPU 112; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2605 in the control CPU 112; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S3203 in the main CPU 63).

Feature H4 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specific period of time.

Feature H5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H4, characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the process of step S1619 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S2205 in the management CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to feature H5, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, which makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the specified information exceeds the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature H6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H5, characterized in that even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature H6, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means, so that when reading out the mode information and analyzing the results of playing during a specified period, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature H7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H6, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature H7, the behavior information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, making it possible to manage the behavior information on a business day basis.

Feature H8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H7, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62).

According to feature H8, since the behavior information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the control means, it becomes possible to manage the behavior information in detail within a business day.

Feature H9: The information calculation means calculates the state information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H8, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when a game is not being played, and when a game is started when the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to feature H9, since the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of calculation of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is stopped, and when a game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of the mode information, and to appropriately derive the mode information when a game is being played.

Feature H10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H9, characterized in that it is provided with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature H10, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering the game machine.

Feature H11. The gaming machine described in Feature H10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature H11, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read out and the game ball's entry mode is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature H12. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature H10 or H11, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature H12, in a configuration in which a second control means having an external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature H13: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H12, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature H13, in a configuration in which a second control means having an information calculation means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature H14. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H13, characterized in that it is provided with a notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S3205, S3207, and S3208 in the main CPU 63) that controls a notification means (notification light-emitting unit 651) so as to notify content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature H14, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other person in charge to understand the results of game management for a specified period of time without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature H15: A control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature H14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature H15 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature H16: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature H14 or H15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature H16, in a configuration in which a second control means having a predetermined storage means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it is possible to consolidate in the first control means the function of calculating the state information and the function of executing a notification corresponding to the calculation result.

Feature H17. The gaming machine according to any one of Features H14 to H16, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the state information is information in a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the state information is information in a second range.

According to feature H17, the behavior information is not notified as is, but rather the content corresponding to the range in which the behavior information is included is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature H18. A predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured in a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
an information calculation means for calculating state information corresponding to the ball-entry state of the game ball in the game area during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs (a function for executing the processes of steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the control CPU 112 in the first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the control CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2202 in the control CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2402 in the control CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2605 in the control CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment);
a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2010, S2014, and S2018 in the management CPU 112 in the 12th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112 in the 13th embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (a calculation result memory 631);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature H18, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, a storage process of the corresponding information is executed on the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior by itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

In addition, it is possible to accumulate behavior information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature H19. The gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H18, characterized in that the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature H19 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features H1 to H19. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A first storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the master CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured in the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
a second storage execution means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920 and S2923 in the master CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) for storing specific information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in the specified storage means when a specific event occurs as a result of a game;
a first external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine in such a manner that it is possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event;
A second external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature I1, it is possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine, and to use the read information to identify the occurrence mode of a specified event and the occurrence mode of a specific event. Furthermore, when the external output is performed, the specified information is output to the outside in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the specified information corresponds to a specified event, and the specific information is output to the outside in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the specific information corresponds to a specific event. As a result, even if the second control means does not process the information, it is possible to identify the occurrence mode of each event using the information read from the specified storage means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for externally outputting corresponding information when the specified event occurs (a function for executing the processing of step S220 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature I2, in a configuration in which corresponding information is output to the outside when a specified event occurs, the specified information is stored in a specified storage means. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of occurrences and frequency of a specified event by using the corresponding information, while accurately grasping the number of occurrences and frequency of a specified event by using the specified information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature I3. The gaming machine described in Feature I1 or I2, characterized in that the predetermined information is count information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to feature I3, the specified information is count information of the number of times a specified event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times a specific event has occurred, so that it is possible to manage the occurrence patterns of the specified event and the occurrence patterns of the specific event while suppressing the information volume of the specified information and the specific information.

Feature I4. Equipped with a program output means (function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the first external output means and the second external output means utilize the information output unit to output information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature I4, it is possible to output information stored in a specified storage means to the outside by utilizing an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output information stored in a specified storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a selection means (a function for executing the process of step S1502 in the main CPU 63) that identifies which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is to be output from the information output unit, and causes information corresponding to the identification result to be output.

According to feature I5, in a configuration in which information stored in a specified storage means is output to the outside using an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output to the outside is the control program or the information stored in the specified storage means, and outputs the identified information to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature I6. The gaming machine described in Feature I5, characterized in that the selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit.

According to feature I6, the information to be output from the information output unit is identified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting the information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature I7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I4 to I6, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that prestores the control program has the information output section, the first external output means, and the second external output means.

Feature I7 makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths to the information output unit within the chip. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal paths to the information output unit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features I1 to I7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristic Group J>
Feature J1. A program output means (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
An information output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management CPU 112) for outputting special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature J1, it is possible to output special information to the outside by utilizing an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature J2. A gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that it is equipped with a selection means (a function for executing the process of step S1502 in the main CPU 63) that identifies whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, and outputs information corresponding to the identification result.

According to feature J2, in a configuration in which special information is output to the outside using an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output to the outside is the control program or the special information, and outputs the identified information to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature J3. The gaming machine described in Feature J2, characterized in that the selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit.

According to feature J3, the information to be output from the information output unit is identified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting the information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature J4. A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that prestores the control program has the information output unit and the information output means.

Feature J4 makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths to the information output unit within the chip. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal paths to the information output unit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features J1 to J4. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Equipped with a first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means is
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the process of step S219 in the master CPU 63, and a function for executing the process of step S1008 in the payout CPU 92) for awarding a bonus to a player when a predetermined event occurs;
An information transmission means (a function of executing an output process for management in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
The second control means, when receiving the predetermined event information, stores the corresponding information in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the sixteenth embodiment), thereby storing predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured in a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) that enables the occurrence number or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment).

According to feature K1, a bonus is awarded to a player when a predetermined event occurs. This allows the player to play in the hope that the predetermined event will occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and predetermined information that allows the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event to be identified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, since the second control means, which is provided separately from the first control means having the bonus granting means, has a predetermined memory execution means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without excessively increasing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, characterized in that the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature K2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature K3: The predetermined storage execution means, when a specific event occurs, executes a storage process of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that specific information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) that enables the number of occurrences or frequency of the specific event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means;
The first control means is
A first transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when the predetermined event occurs;
A second transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when the specific event occurs;
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature K3, not only the specified information corresponding to the specified event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the specified event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, by using both the specified information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequency between the specified event and the specific event.

In addition, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. This allows the type of information to be transmitted to correspond to the signal path, making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the second control means.

Feature K4. The gaming machine described in Feature K3, characterized in that the first control means includes a third transmission means (a function of outputting one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function of outputting one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63) that transmits, to the second control means, identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, via a third path.

According to feature K4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing the identification information from other information such as the first information and the second information in the second control means.

Feature K5. The gaming machine described in Feature K3 or K4, characterized in that the first control means includes an identification information transmission means (a function for executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means.

According to feature K5, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature K6. The gaming machine described in Feature K5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature K6, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means, so that in a situation where a specified event and a specific event may occur, it becomes possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature K7. The gaming machine described in Feature K5 or K6, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature K7, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, making it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature K8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features K5 to K7, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes a means for storing in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) correspondence information that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112).

According to feature K8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means every time the first information or second information is transmitted from the first control means. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and second information.

Feature K9. The first control means is provided with a third transmission means for transmitting third information, which enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means using a third path (a function for outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function for outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the sixth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features K5 to K8, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation is present even without receiving the identification information.

According to feature K9, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that makes it possible to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature K10. The gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K9, characterized in that the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature K10 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features K1 to K10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group E, feature group F, feature group G, feature group H, feature group I, and feature group J can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A first control means (main CPU 63),
A second control means (control CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A first transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a first event occurs;
A second transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) for transmitting second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a second event occurs;
An identification information transmission means (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature L1, when a first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a second event occurs, the second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. This allows the type of information to be transmitted to correspond to the signal path, making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between the types of information in the second control means.

In addition, because identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L2. The gaming machine described in Feature L1, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature L2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means, so that in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means and a specific ball entry means, it becomes possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature L3. The gaming machine described in feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature L3, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, making it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature L4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L3, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes a means for storing in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) correspondence information that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112).

According to feature L4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means every time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature L5. The first control means is provided with a third transmission means for transmitting third information, which enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path (a function for outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, and a function for outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation is present even without receiving the identification information.

According to feature L5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not a specified situation exists. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that makes it possible to identify whether or not a specified situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature L6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L1 to L5, characterized in that the number of signal paths capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

According to feature L6, by providing a number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to accommodate an increase or decrease in the number of types of information depending on the type of gaming machine without changing the configuration related to the signal paths. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L7. A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, characterized in that the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature L7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied to the features L1 to L7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features K can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have an optimal communication configuration, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: gaming machines equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is started by operating a start operation means, the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is given to the player according to the picture after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 24... Game board, 24a... Outlet, 24b... Nail, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 31... General winning port, 32... Special power winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 34a... General power device, 35... First through gate, 39... Second through gate, 61... Main control board, 62... MPU, 63... Main CPU, 65... Main RAM, 92... Payout CPU, 102... Reading terminal, 112... Management CPU, 116... Counter Correlation memory, 171...passage entrance, 172...escape passage, 173...passage exit, 174...exit roof, 180...adjustment mechanism, 181c...left side standing wall, 181d...right side standing wall, 181e...discharge protrusion, 181g...discharge right side surface, 181h...left side standing wall, 183...rotating body, 183b-183e...recessed portion, 184...adjustment drive portion, 185...intake port, 188-191...blade portion, 188a-191a...circumferential surface, 188b-191 b...front surface, 192...collision avoidance groove, 220...adjustment mechanism, 230...rotating body, 241-244...support surfaces, 241a-244a...step surfaces, 252...upper right standing wall, 254...rotating shaft, 256...discharge port, 261...left standing wall, 262...inlet port, 263a...discharge protruding end, 291...left side guide nail, 292...right side guide nail, 330...adjustment mechanism, 340...rotating body, 343...blade member, 344...rotating shaft, 352...standing wall, 371...downstream guide Nail, 430...adjustment mechanism, 440...rotating body, 472...guide nail, 530...adjustment mechanism, 545...guide passage, 546...adjustment unit, 560...electric nail, 560a...nail drive unit, 581...first operating port, 610...game board, 620...adjustment mechanism, 621...discharge port, 631...calculation result memory, 651...notification light-emitting unit, PA...game area, C4...normal electric device release counter, C5...release initial value counter, T1...low frequency winning determination value table.

Claims (1)

A ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus under at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the ball entry section;
Equipped with
A first mode and a second mode in which the privilege is granted more easily than the first mode are set as a control mode of the privilege granting state,
A guide means for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry portion;
a predetermined situation generating means for generating a predetermined situation in which each induction timing of the game ball guided by the induction means in the first mode corresponds to or is likely to correspond to a timing at which the game ball guided to the ball entrance section is a timing at which the privilege is granted;
A gaming machine comprising:

Images